DPS Calvin Rampton - Arnell-West · DPS Calvin Rampton 2nd Floor Remodel DFCM Project No.: 17332550...

PROJECT MANUAL May 08, 2017

DPS Calvin Rampton 2nd Floor Remodel

DFCM Project No.: 17332550 JRCA Project No.: 16028

Permit Documents

JRCA Architects, Inc. 577 South 200 East

Salt Lake City, Utah 84111 (801) 533-2100 Phone

(801) 533-2101 Fax www.jrcadesign.com

09/28/2017

TABLE OF CONTENTS / PROJECT MANUAL

INTERMOUNTAIN HEALTHCARE

World Trade Center 16-18 FLOOR RENOVATION

Project No.: 16011

DIVISION / SECTION TITLE PAGES

Table of Contents Page 1 of 3

DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Section 011000 Summary Page 01 to 03 Section 013100 Project Management and Coordination Page 01 to 09 Section 013200 Construction Progress Documentation Page 01 to 07 Section 013300 Submittal Procedures Page 01 to 10 Section 014000 Quality Requirements Page 01 to 09 Section 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls Page 01 to 07 Section 016000 Product Requirements Page 01 to 04 Section 017300 Execution Page 01 to 09 Section 017419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal Page 01 to 15 Section 017700 Closeout Procedure Page 01 to 04 Section 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data Page 01 to 07 Section 017839 Project Record Documents Page 01 to 04

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS Section 024119 Selective Structure Demolition Page 01 to 06

DIVISION 3 CONCRETE Section 035416 Hydraulic Cement Underlayment Page 01 to 04

DIVISION 4 MASONRY Not Applicable

DIVISION 5 METALS Not Applicable

DIVISION 6 WOOD / PLASTICS / COMPOSITES Section 064023 Interior Architectural Woodwork Page 01 to 08 Section 064100 Architectural Wood Casework Page 01 to 03

DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION Section 079200 Sealants Page 01 to 06

DIVISION 8 OPENINGS Section 081213 Hollow Metal Frames Page 01 to 05 Section 081416 Flush Wood Doors Page 01 to 04 Section 084313 Aluminum Framed Storefronts Page 01 to 05 Section 087100 Door Hardware Page 01 to 06 Section 088000 Glazing Page 01 to 07

DIVISION 9 FINISHES Section 092116 Gypsum Board Assemblies Page 01 to 02 Section 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing Page 01 to 06 Section 095100 Acoustical Ceilings Page 01 to 03 Section 096500 Resilient Flooring Page 01 to 03 Section 096813 Tile Carpeting Page 01 to 05 Section 097733 Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels Page 01 to 02 Section 099123 Interior Painting Page 01 to 06




Project No.: 16011



DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES Section 101400 Signage Page 01 to 03 Section 102239 Folding Panel Partitions Page 01 to 02 Section 102800 Toilet, Bath, and Laundry Accessories Page 01 to 02

DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT Not Applicable

DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS Section 122113 Horizontal Louver Blinds Page 01 to 05

DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION Not Applicable

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT Not Applicable

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION Section 211313 Fire Sprinklers Performance Specification Page 01 to 07

DIVISION 22 PLUMBING Section 220100 General Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC Page 01 to 14 Section 220500 Basic Plumbing and HVAC Materials and Methods Page 01 to 09 Section 220523 Valves Page 01 to 08 Section 220548 Vibration & Seismic Controls for HVAC and Plumbing Page 01 to 09 Section 220553 Identification for Mechanical and Plumbing Page 01 to 05 Section 220700 HVAC and Plumbing Insulation Page 01 to 16 Section 221116 Domestic Water Piping Page 01 to 14 Section 221119 Domestic Water Piping Specialties Page 01 to 05 Section 221316 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Page 01 to 08 Section 221319 Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties Page 01 to 07 Section 224440 Plumbing Fixtures Page 01 to 09

DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING Section 230100 General Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC Page 01 to 02 Section 230500 Basic Plumbing and HVA Material and Methods Page 01 to 01 Section 230523 Valves Page 01 to 01 Section 230529 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment Page 01 to 01 Section 230548 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC and Plumbing Page 01 to 01 Section 230593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Page 01 to 14 Section 230700 HVAC and Plumbing Insulation Page 01 to 01 Section 230900 Controls Page 01 to 28 Section 233133 Metal Ducts Page 01 to 14 Section 233300 Duct Accessories Page 01 to 09 Section 233423 Exhaust Fans Page 01 to 06 Section 233600 Air Terminal Units Page 01 to 07 Section 233713 Diffusers, Registers, and Grills Page 01 to 03

DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL Section 260500 Electrical General Provisions Page 01 to 13 Section 260507 Electrical Connections for Equipment Page 01 to 02




Project No.: 16011



Section 260526 Grounding Page 01 to 04 Section 260529 Supporting Devices Page 01 to 02 Section 260532 Conduit Raceway Page 01 to 06 Section 260533 Electrical Boxes and Fittings Page 01 to 04 Section 260536 Raceway Systems Page 01 to 04 Section 260548 Electrical Seismic Control Page 01 to 04 Section 260553 Electrical Identification Page 01 to 08 Section 260573 Protective Device Study Page 01 to 03 Section 260923 Occupancy Sensors Page 01 to 11 Section 260943 Lighting Control Equipment Page 01 to 06 Section 262726 Wiring Devices Page 01 to 06 Section 262815 Overcurrent Protective Devices Page 01 to 05 Section 262816 Motor and Circuit Disconnects Page 01 to 02 Section 262913 Motor Starters Page 01 to 03 Section 263353 Uninterruptible Power Supply Page 01 to 11 Section 264119 Demolition Page 01 to 02 Section 265100 Interior and Building Lighting Page 01 to 06

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS Section 271500 Telephone/Data Systems Page 01 to 04 Section 274100 Audiovisual Systems (Raceways) Page 01 to 06

DIVISION 28 ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY Section 283111 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems Page 01 to 04

DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK Not Applicable

DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS Not Applicable

DIVISION 33 UTILITIES Not Applicable

011000 - SUMMARY Page 1 of 3 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Addendum and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Work by Owner. 4. Access to site. 5. Work restrictions 6. Specification and drawing conventions.

B. Related Section:

1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.3 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: Calvin Rampton Complex 2nd Floor Remodel

1. Project Location: 4501 South 2700 West, 2nd Floor, West Valley City, Utah 84119

B. Owner: State of Utah.

1. Owner's Representative: Randy Mellor (801) 960-7647.

C. Architect: JRCA Architects, Inc.: Project Manager- Annette Coleman (801) 533-2100.

D. Other Owner Consultants: The Owner has retained the following design professionals who have prepared designated portions of the Contract Documents:

1. See Drawing GI101 for the design team information.

E. Project Web Site (Optional): A Project Web site administered by the Architect will be used for purposes of managing communication and documents during the construction stage.

1. See Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for Contractor's requirements for utilizing the Project Web site.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS


A. The Work of the Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. Interior remodel of approximately 13,852 sf. including reconfiguration of demountable partitions, replace carpet, paint, and ceiling system.

2. Electrical and Lighting Systems. 3. Mechanical Systems. 4. Fire Protection and Alarm Systems.

B. Type of Contract

1. Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.

1.5 WORK BY OWNER

A. General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Owner.

B. Subsequent Work: Owner will perform the following additional work at site concurrently during construction and after Substantial Completion. Completion of the work will depend on successful completion of preparatory work under this Contract.

1. Installation of Owner furnished misc. equipment.

1.6 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated unless described otherwise or required to complete the Work as per the Contract Documents.

1. Limits: Confine construction operations to as described and shown on all listed drawings.

1.7 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. On-Site work hours: Work shall generally be performed during business working hours of seven (7) a.m. to six (6) p.m. Monday through Friday, except otherwise indicated or approved by the Owner. Coordinate with Owner for work required to be done after normal business hours. Weekends and after hours, coordinated with the building, are allowed due to the schedule of the project. 1. Weekday non business hours: Six (6) p.m. to Seven (7) a.m. 2. Weekend hours: Same as weekday business hours.

B. A freight elevator is available on a restricted basis. Use of the elevator must be coordinated with the building managers.

C. Disposal of construction waste debris must be via underground dock. Use of dock must be co-ordinated with building dock master. Hours of use are limited.


1.8 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on the Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on the Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)

END OF SECTION 011000

013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION Page 1 of 9 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. General project coordination procedures. 2. Administrative and supervisory personnel. 3. Coordination drawings. 4. Requests for Information (RFIs). 5. Project Web site. 6. Project meetings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 4. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for coordinating the Work with

Owner's commissioning authority.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information from each other during construction.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.


B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. 9. Project closeout activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. Refer to other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property.

1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings in accordance with requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

b. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

c. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation.

d. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

e. Indicate required installation sequences. f. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that

appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:


1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire protection, fire alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of

embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:

a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems.

b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.

c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

7. Electrical Work: Show the following:

a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1 ¼ -inch diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire alarm

locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor

control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

8. Fire Protection System: Show the following:

a. Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.

9. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are the Contractor's responsibility. If the Architect determines that the coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or are otherwise deficient, the Architect will so inform the Contractor, who shall make changes as directed and resubmit.

10. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

C. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files in accordance with the following requirements:

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Drawings.

2. File Preparation Format: DWG, Version Autocad 2012 or earlier, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system.

3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File (PDF) format.

4. Architect will furnish Contractor digital data files of requested Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.


a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to the Drawings.

b. Digital Data Software Program: The Drawings are available in Autocad 2013 or earlier.

c. Contractor shall execute the Architect’s Electronic File Transfer Waiver upon request of digital data files.

1.6 KEY PERSONNEL

A. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and email addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract Time or

the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

C. RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect.


D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 3:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 4. RFI description. 5. Date the RFI was submitted. 6. Date Architect's response was received. 7. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and

Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 PROJECT WEB SITE

A. Use Architect's Project FTP Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication and documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions:

1. Project directory. 2. Project correspondence. 3. Meeting minutes. 4. Contract modifications forms and logs. 5. RFI forms and logs. 6. Photo documentation. 7. Schedule and calendar management. 8. Submittals forms and logs.


1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and

agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor

and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including but not limited to the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Lines of communications. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Sustainable design requirements. l. Preparation of record documents. m. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Office, work, and storage areas. u. Equipment deliveries and priorities. v. First aid. w. Security. x. Progress cleaning.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Pre-installation Conferences: Conduct a pre-installation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.


1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written recommendations. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a Project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 60 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.

2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following:

a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final

inspection for acceptance.


c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing sustainable design documentation. e. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. General Commissioning. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for

final payment. j. Submittal procedures. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. l. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. m. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.

4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

E. Progress Meetings: Architect will conduct progress meetings at biweekly intervals.

1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor,

subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Sequence of operations. 2) Status of submittals. 3) Temporary facilities and controls. 4) Progress cleaning. 5) Quality and work standards. 6) Status of correction of deficient items. 7) Field observations. 8) Status of RFIs. 9) Status of proposal requests. 10) Pending changes. 11) Status of Change Orders.

4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.


013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION Page 1 of 7 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Start-up construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Field condition reports. 5. Special reports.


1. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports. 3. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. 2. One paper copy.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label.

C. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

1. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.


3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

D. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

E. Field Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

F. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss project constraints. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 7. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting

agencies. 8. Review time required for completion and startup procedures. 9. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 10. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them

in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.


B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include not less than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial

Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Building Commissioning. 7. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for punch list and final

completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase (Coordinate with drawing GI103). 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by

Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery

date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.

7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting.


k. Curing. l. Startup and placement into final use and operation.

8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:

a. Structural completion. b. Permanent space enclosure. c. Completion of mechanical installation. d. Completion of electrical installation. e. Substantial Completion.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Cost Correlation: At the head of schedule, provide a cost correlation line, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show dollar volume of the Work performed as of dates used for preparation of payment requests.

1. Refer to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.

F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered RFIs. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals.

G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.

H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

2.2 START-UP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit start-up horizontal bar-chart-type construction schedule within seven days of date established for the Notice of Award.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.

2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)

A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.


B. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

1. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.

2. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

3. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to correlate with Contract Time.

C. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the start-up network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Fabrication. d. Utility interruptions. e. Installation. f. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. g. Testing and commissioning. h. Punch list and final completion. i. Activities occurring following final completion.

2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.

3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.

4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges.

a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.

D. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

E. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Principal events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time.


F. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or

snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (refer to special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized.

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS

A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.

B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At bi-weekly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the

same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.


013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Page 1 of 10 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.


1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values.

2. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule.

3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

5. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as action submittals.

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as informational submittals.

C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files.

D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS


A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or modifications to submittals noted by the Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with start-up construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication.

3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule.

a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action, informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled dates for installation. h. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. Contractor or Sub-Contractor shall execute the Architect’s “Electronic File Transfer Waiver” prior to release of drawing files.

a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.

b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in Autocad 2013. Windows XP Operating System.

c. The following digital data files will be provided:

1) All drawing files with the exception of the Owner provided Healthcare Equipment drawings are available for the contractors use.

d. Additional files may be released upon request, but at the sole discretion of the Architect.

e. Architects consults may provide digital data files upon completion of the Architect’s “Electronic File Transfer Waiver”.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.


2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 10 days for review of each re-submittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,

Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 14 days for initial review of each submittal.

D. Identification and Information: Place a permanent label or title block on each paper copy submittal item for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Include the following information for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of subcontractor. f. Name of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

E. Identification and Information: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.


a. File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Include the following information on an inserted cover sheet:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. f. Name of subcontractor. g. Name of supplier. h. Name of manufacturer. i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Related physical samples submitted directly. m. Other necessary identification.

5. Include the following information as keywords in the electronic file metadata:

a. Project name. b. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. c. Manufacturer name. d. Product name.

F. Options: Identify options requiring selection by the Architect.

G. Deviations: Identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

H. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of copies to Architect.

I. Transmittal: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Destination (To:). d. Source (From:). e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. f. Category and type of submittal. g. Submittal purpose and description. h. Specification Section number and title. i. Indication of full or partial submittal. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.


k. Transmittal number, numbered consecutively. l. Remarks. m. Signature of transmitter.

2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.

J. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action

stamp.

K. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

L. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals in PDF format.

a. Contractor to provide electronic submittal via e-mail to the Architect. b. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an

electronic Project record document file.

2. Action Submittals: Submit PDF Electronic files each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Informational Submittals: Submit PDF electronic files of each submittal, unless otherwise

indicated. Architect will not return copies. 4. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements

specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures." 5. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of

entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically-submitted certificates and certifications where indicated.

b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated.

6. Test and Inspection Reports Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."


B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Standard color charts. c. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. d. Testing by recognized testing agency. e. Application of testing agency labels and seals. f. Notation of coordination requirements. g. Availability and delivery time information.

4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:

a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop

Drawings.

5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. 6. Submit Product Data in the following format:

a. PDF electronic file.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:


D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:


a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

a. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a Project record sample.

1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations.

E. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

F. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

G. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

H. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. 4. Submit subcontract list in the following format:



I. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

J. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified.

K. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on American Welding Society (AWS) forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

L. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

M. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

N. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

O. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

Q. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

R. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information:

1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers' names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use.

S. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

T. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.


U. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

V. Field Test Reports: Submit reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

W. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

X. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

2.2 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally-signed PDF electronic file of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Project Closeout and Maintenance/Material Submittals: Refer to requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.


3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will provide transmittal information which includes both approval status and comments applicable to said submittal.

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

E. Incomplete submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

F. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.


014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 9 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products.

2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Sections:

1. Division 01 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections.

2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation


tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on the project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies and subassemblies.

D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade or trades.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Shop Drawings: For laboratory mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction.


1. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 2. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.


A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.

B. Contractor's Quality-Control Manager Qualifications: For supervisory personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems.

1. Seismic-force resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

2. Main wind-force resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting system quality assurance plan prepared by the Architect.

D. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

E. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

1. Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.

C. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.


D. Testing and Inspection: Include in quality-control plan a comprehensive schedule of Work requiring testing or inspection, including the following:

1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.

2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of Special Inspections."

3. Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents, including tests and inspections indicated to be performed by the Commissioning Authority.

E. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

F. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and

inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the

Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements

and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.


C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance

complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.


H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

J. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing

results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory

mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.

d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project.

e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.

f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups; do not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

K. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be

constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that

will be employed during the construction at the Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.


1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

2. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

3. Notify testing agencies at least 48 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

4. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

5. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

6. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."

D. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation in preinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

E. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.


G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing

agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

I. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by the Contract Documents as a component of the Contractor's quality-control plan. Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the work progresses.

1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

4. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

5. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:


1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS Page 1 of 5 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, occupants of Project, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.

D. Natural Gas: Pay natural gas service use charges as used by all entities for construction operations.


A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

B. Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction from water absorption and damage, including delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or water damage, discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion into completed Work, and replacing water damaged Work.

1. Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering, and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Show procedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finish materials.


C. Dust-Control and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust-control and HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for their operation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Include the following:

1. Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of the work. 2. HVAC system isolation schematic drawing. 3. Location of proposed air filtration system discharge. 4. Other dust-control measures. 5. Waste management plan.


A. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage installer of each permanent service to assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, Construction Manager, and construction personnel office activities and to accommodate project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections. Keep office clean and orderly.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air grille in system and remove at end of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures".

C. Air Filtration Units: HEPA primary and secondary filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration. Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Sanitary Facilities: Use of existing toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water or use of construction personnel is only permitted with authorization of owner. General Contractor shall be responsible for cleaning and maintaining these facilities during and until the completion of the project.

C. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner’s existing power service required for construction operations.

1. Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.

D. Telephone Service:

1. Post a list of important telephone numbers.

a. Police and fire departments. b. Ambulance service. c. Contractor's home office. d. Architect's office. e. Engineers' offices. f. Owner's office.

2. Provide superintendent with cellular telephone for use when away from field office.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

1. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

2. Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Temporary Access Areas: Construct and maintain temporary pave access areas adequate for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas within construction limits indicated on Drawings.


1. Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required to minimize dust.

C. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

D. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.

E. Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs. 2. Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and

individuals seeking entrance to Project.

a. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.

3. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

F. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.

3.5 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions. 2. Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity. 3. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and

exposure to water limits.

a. Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-based products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hours are considered defective.

b. Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture during construction operations or after installation. Record daily readings over a forty-eight hour period. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher than allowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.

c. Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.

3.6 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL


A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during

construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."


016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS Page 1 of 4 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions. 2. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products specified.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.


A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article.


2. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within seven days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable

product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on


product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications

establish salient characteristics of products. 6. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or

approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Products:

a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Manufacturers:


a. Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered, unless otherwise indicated.

b. Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

4. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.



017300 - EXECUTION Page 1 of 8 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Installation of the Work. 2. Cutting and patching. 3. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 4. Progress cleaning. 5. Starting and adjusting. 6. Protection of installed construction. 7. Correction of the Work.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project

Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

3. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work.


A. Qualification Data: For professional engineer.

B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.


A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.


1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from the Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Conveying systems. i. Electrical wiring systems. j. Operating systems of special construction.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Equipment supports. e. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. f. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

B. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, utilize products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01 Section "Sustainable Design Requirements."

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to the Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

a. Description of the Work. b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. c. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. d. Recommended corrections.

2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

4. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

B. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

C. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of


the Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

D. Surface and Substrate Preparation: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for preparation of substrates to receive subsequent work.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General:

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

C. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

D. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance

and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in

unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.


F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions

for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

D. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching in accordance with requirements of Division 01 Section "Summary."

E. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a

diamond-core drill.


4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

F. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.

b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

G. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel.

1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.


3.7 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F .

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

a. Utilize containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.

4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire

work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.8 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."


B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.9 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.10 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


017419 – CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL Page 1 of 5 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.

B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations.

C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Practice efficient waste management in the use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

1. Construction Waste: a. Wood trim. b. Metals. c. Insulation. d. Carpet and pad. e. Gypsum board. f. Piping. g. Electrical conduit. h. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in paragraph above,

salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

1) Paper. 2) Cardboard.


3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails.


A. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

B. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.

C. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

D. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

E. Qualification Data: For waste management coordinator.


A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: Experienced firm, with a record of successful waste management coordination of Projects with similar requirements.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management coordinator.

2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers

and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal

facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract.

1. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for operation, termination, and removal requirements.

B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan.

C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site.

1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.

2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.

2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.

3.2 SALVAGING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Salvaged Items for Reuse in the Work: Salvage items for reuse and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until installation. 4. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 5. Install salvaged items to comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make items functional for use indicated.

B. Salvaged Items for Sale and Donation: Not permitted on Project site.

C. Salvaged Items for Owner's Use: Salvage items for Owner's use and handle as follows:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.


D. Doors and Hardware: Brace open end of door frames. Except for removing door closers, leave door hardware attached to doors.

E. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather.

F. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.

G. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall be shared equally by Owner and Contractor.

B. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approved construction waste management plan.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

4. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.

3.4 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

B. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and dispose of bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

D. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.


E. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

F. Carpet: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.

1. Store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

G. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

H. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

3.5 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project

site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of clean ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.


017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES Page 1 of 4 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 3. Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record

Specifications, and Record Product Data. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for

the Work in those Sections.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete with request.

1. Contractor shall prepare a list of incomplete items and items to be corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. The list will be submitted to the Architect prior to the Architects Substantial Completion inspection procedure.

2. Architect’s Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list) will be prepared and issued. Contractor will submit a certified copy of the list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance with the request of inspection of Substantial Completion

3. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 4. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 5. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to

services and utilities as approved by jurisdictional authority. Include final inspection reports, occupancy permits (as necessary), operating certificates, and similar releases.

6. Prepare and submit operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information for review and commenting.


7. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

8. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

9. Complete startup testing of systems. 10. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 11. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance. 13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

1.4 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit final Project Record Documents. 3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. 5. Submit any additional requested documentation as requested by Owner and or Architect.

1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. Use CSI Form 14.1A.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,

individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Contractor. d. Page number.

4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:


1.6 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.


B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

1. Use cleaning products that meet Green Seal GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project

site.


e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free

of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo

if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment[, elevator equipment,] and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

n. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter upon inspection.

1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report upon completion of cleaning.

r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

s. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."


017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Page 1 of 7 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals.

3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual specification sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to modifications and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return three copies.


C. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 14 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Agent will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Agent's Comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 14 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Agent's Comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY

A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:

1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents.

B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.

C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.

D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect.


7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Agent. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the

systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system.

b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.


B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.4 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:


1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS


A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and

component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.

2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION


A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.

B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.

E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section "Project Record Documents."

G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Page 1 of 4 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for final property survey. 2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance

manual requirements. 4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of

the Work in those Sections.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Final Submittal: Submit one paper copy set and PDF electronic files of marked-up record prints. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.

1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.


E. Reports: Submit written report bi-weekly indicating items incorporated in Project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including modifications, concealed conditions, field changes, product selections, and other notations incorporated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.

2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. d. Revisions to electrical circuitry. e. Actual equipment locations. f. Duct size and routing. g. Locations of concealed internal utilities. h. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. i. Changes made following Architect's written orders. j. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. k. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. l. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Utilize personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with Comment function enabled.


3. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.

5. Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up paper copy of Product Data.

1. Include record Product Data directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file or scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked up miscellaneous record submittals.

1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by specification section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and modifications to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.


024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION Page 1 of 5

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 011000 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner-occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements.

2. Section 017300 "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.

1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,

demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.


3. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations.

4. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.


A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.

B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property for environmental protection, for dust control and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building on floors above and below immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.

D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify

Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. Prior to demolition of mechanical or electrical elements, ceiling shall be removed. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Building manager will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.

2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. c. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and

remove equipment and deliver to Owner. d. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug

remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."


3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use

cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner.

C. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect and Owner, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition, cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.

3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS

A. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requiring solvent-based adhesive strippers.

3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces

and areas. 3. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management

and Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.7 CLEANING


A. Clean adjacent improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT Page 1 of 3

SECTION 035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certifying that products are compatible.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide hydraulic-cement underlayment systems identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another qualified testing agency.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.



A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting underlayment performance.

1. Place hydraulic-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and adhesives, to ensure compatibility of products.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/4 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Ardex; SD-T Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete. b. Maxxon Corporation; Level-Right. c. RAECO, Inc.; SLT-HS d. Teck Specialties; Teck 600.

2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined by ASTM C 219.

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, size as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F .

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

C. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion.

3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface. 2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during application and curing processes.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.


064023-INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK Page 1 of 8

SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 2. Plastic-laminate countertops. 3. Solid Surface countertops and integral sinks. 4. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and finishing materials and processes.

B. Product Data: For panel products, high-pressure decorative laminate, solid-surfacing material, cabinet hardware and accessories.

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components.

1. Show details full size. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed

blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other

items installed in architectural woodwork.


D. Samples for Verification:

1. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish, with 1 sample applied to core material and specified edge material applied to 1 edge.

2. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers.

B. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that woodwork, including installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation.


A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.


2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. Low-Emitting Materials: Composite wood products shall comply with the testing and

product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. 3. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD, made with binder containing no

urea formaldehyde. 4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1. 5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1, made with adhesive

containing no urea formaldehyde.

C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or, if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard.

2.2 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-response characteristics specified.

1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective.

2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials.

3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.


B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type:

1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-

test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency.

4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork.

5. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials.

C. Fire-Retardant Particleboard: Panels complying with the following requirements, made from softwood particles and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 25 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. For panels 3/4 inch thick and less, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-2 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1600 psi; modulus of elasticity, 300,000 psi; internal bond, 80 psi; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 225 lbf, respectively.

2. For panels 13/16 to 1-1/4 inches thick, comply with ANSI A208.1 for Grade M-1 except for the following minimum properties: modulus of rupture, 1300 psi; modulus of elasticity, 250,000 psi; linear expansion, 0.50 percent; and screw-holding capacity on face and edge, 250 and 175 lbf, respectively.

3. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Duraflake FR" by Weyerhaeuser.

D. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke-developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Medite FR" by SierraPine Ltd.; Medite Div.

2.3 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials as indicated on drawings.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.

B. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.


C. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

D. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-scale Environmental Chambers."

E. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Premium-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.

B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.

C. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication.

D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be complete.

2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.

E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.

2.6 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS

A. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay.

B. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate complying with the following requirements:

1. Horizontal Surfaces Other Than Tops: Grade HGS.


2. Postformed Surfaces: Grade HGP. 3. Vertical Surfaces: Grade HGS. 4. Edges: PVC edge banding,0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and

finish.

C. Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:

1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC edge banding, 0.12 inch thick, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish.

b. For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface of high-pressure decorative laminate, Grade VGS.

2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.

D. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate, Grade BKL.

E. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated on drawings.

F. Provide dust panels of 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers, unless located directly under tops.

2.7 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS

A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade: HGS.

B. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures of exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

1. As indicated on drawings.

C. Grain Direction: Parallel to cabinet fronts.

D. Edge Treatment: As indicated.

E. Core Material: Medium-density fiberboard.

F. Core Material at Sinks: Marine grade plywood made with exterior glue.

G. Backer Sheet: Provide plastic-laminate backer sheet, Grade BKL, on underside of countertop substrate.

H. Paper Backing: Provide paper backing on underside of countertop substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.

B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved.

B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.

C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.

D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.

E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork.

F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.

G. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

2. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head screws sized for 1-inch penetration into wood framing, blocking, or hanging strips, toggle bolts through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish.

H. Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop.

1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line.

3. Secure backsplashes to walls with adhesive. 4. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section

"Joint Sealants."


I. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.

C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.


06 4100 - Page 1 of 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

SECTION 06 4100

ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 12 3600 - Countertops.

1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) - Architectural Woodwork Standards; 2014.

B. AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) - North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, U.S. Version 3.0;2016.

C. BHMA A156.9 - American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2010.

D. NEMA LD 3 - High-Pressure Decorative Laminates; 2005.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, andaccessories.

1. Scale of Drawings: 1-1/2 inch to 1 foot (125 mm to 1 m), minimum.

2. Provide the information required by AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS).

C. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.


A. Protect units from moisture damage.


A. During and after installation of custom cabinets, maintain temperature and humidity conditionsin building spaces at same levels planned for occupancy.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 CABINETS

A. Quality Standard: Custom Grade, in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI(NAAWS), unless noted otherwise.

B. Plastic Laminate Faced Cabinets: Custom grade.

C. Breakroom Cabinets: Plastic laminate faced, Custom grade.

D. Cabinets at _____:

1. Finish - Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.

2. Finish - Exposed Interior Surfaces: Decorative laminate.

3. Finish - Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Decorative laminate

4. Finish - Concealed Surfaces: Manufacturer's option.

5. Door and Drawer Front Edge Profiles: Square edge with thin applied band.

6. Door and Drawer Front Retention Profiles: Fixed panel.

7. Cabinet Design Series: As indicated on drawings.

8. Adjustable Shelf Loading: 50 lbs. per sq. ft.

9. Cabinet Style: Flush overlay.

10. Cabinet Doors and Drawer Fronts: Flush style.

2.02 WOOD-BASED COMPONENTS

A. Wood fabricated from old growth timber is not permitted.

2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers:

1. As indicated on drawings; ____:.

2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

3M Second Floor Remodel 06 4100 - Page 2 of 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

B. Thermally Fused Laminate (TFL): Melamine resin, NEMA LD 3, Type VGL laminate panels.

C. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): NEMA LD 3, types as recommended for specificapplications.

D. Provide specific types as scheduled.

1. Horizontal Surfaces: HGS, 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colorsas scheduled, finish as scheduled.

2. Vertical Surfaces: VGS, 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors asscheduled, finish as scheduled.

3. Cabinet Liner: CLS, 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) nominal thickness, through color, colors asscheduled, finish as scheduled.

2.04 COUNTERTOPS

A. Countertops are specified in Section 12 3600.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Plastic Edge Banding: Extruded PVC, convex shaped; smooth finish; self locking serratedtongue; of width to match component thickness.

1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range.

2. Use at all exposed plywood edges.

3. Use at all exposed shelf edges.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. Hardware: BHMA A156.9, types as recommended by fabricator for quality grade specified.

B. Adjustable Shelf Supports: Standard side-mounted system using recessed metal shelfstandards or multiple holes for pin supports and coordinated self rests, polished chrome finish,for nominal 1 inch (25 mm) spacing adjustments.

C. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 4 inch centers ("U"shaped wire pull, steel with chrome finish, 100 mm centers).

D. Drawer Slides:

1. Type: Extension types as scheduled.

2. Static Load Capacity: Commercial grade.

3. Mounting: Side mounted.

4. Stops: Integral type.

5. Features: Provide self closing/stay closed type.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Accuride International, Inc; ____: www.accuride.com.

b. Grass America Inc; ____: www.grassusa.com.

c. Hettich America, LP; _____: www.hettich.com/sle.

d. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Company; _____: www.knapeandvogt.com.

e. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

E. Hinges: European style concealed self-closing type, steel with polished finish.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Grass America Inc; ____: www.grassusa.com.

b. Hardware Resources; _____: www.hardwareresources.com.

c. Hettich America, LP; ______: www.hettich.com/sle.

d. Blum, Inc; _____: www.blum.com.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Assembly: Shop assemble cabinets for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permitpassage through building openings.

B. Edging: Fit shelves, doors, and exposed edges with specified edging. Do not use more thanone piece for any single length.

3M Second Floor Remodel 06 4100 - Page 3 of 3 ARCHITECTURAL WOOD CASEWORK

C. Fitting: When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance forcutting. Provide matching trim for scribing and site cutting.

D. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent withmanufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightlybevel arises. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet (600 mm) from sink cut-outs.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install work in accordance with AWI/AWMAC/WI (AWS) or AWMAC/WI (NAAWS) requirementsfor grade indicated.

B. Set and secure custom cabinets in place, assuring that they are rigid, plumb, and level.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust installed work.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures.

END OF SECTION

079200 - JOINT SEALANTS Page 1 of 6

SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Latex joint sealants.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 088000 "Glazing" for glazing sealants. 2. Section 095113 "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters with

acoustical sealant.


A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.

C. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:

1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant color.


A. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.

C. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.

2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.



A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer.


A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:

1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for

applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed

from joint substrates.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following:

1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.

2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric

contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL


A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.2 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac. b. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+. c. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.

2.3 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin) , and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.

2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:

a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS

A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.


3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not

discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per

Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:

1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:

a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.

b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or 1 test per each floor per elevation.

2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:

a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified

requirements.


c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.

5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant.

B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.


081213-HOLLOW METAL FRAMES Page 1 of 5

SECTION 081213 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes hollow-metal frames.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 081416 "Flush Wood Doors" for wood doors installed in hollow-metal frames.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings according to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following:

1. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 2. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 3. Details of each different wall opening condition. 4. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 5. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 6. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.


B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each unit to permit air circulation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 2. Republic Doors and Frames. 3. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow-metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 INTERIOR FRAMES

A. Construct interior frames to comply with the standards indicated for materials, fabrication, hardware locations, hardware reinforcement, tolerances, and clearances, and as specified.

B. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4. 2. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. 3. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

2.3 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.


B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow-metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for metal thickness. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottoms of jambs with at least four spot welds per anchor; however, for slip-on drywall frames, provide anchor clips or countersunk holes at bottoms of jambs.

3. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus one additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high.

4. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction.

a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

C. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates.

1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware. 2. Comply with applicable requirements in SDI A250.6 and BHMA A156.115 for preparation

of hollow-metal work for hardware.


2.6 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted hardware.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow-metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow-Metal Frames: Install hollow-metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with SDI A250.11 or NAAMM-HMMA 840 as required by standards specified.

1. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

b. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. c. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. d. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured.


e. Check plumb, square, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing" and with hollow-metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Remove and replace defective work, including hollow-metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow-metal work immediately after installation.

C. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.

D. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of abraded areas of paint are specified in painting Sections.


081416-FLUSH WOOD DOORS Page 1 of 4

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Replacement of all existing wood doors on this floor with new doors of same size and performance, which includes the following: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.


A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Undercuts. 3. Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors and Refinished doors.

D. Samples for Verification:

1. Finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work.


A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

B. Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.

1.5 STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.


C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace new doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch

span.

2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors.

3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and as indicated in drawings, provide products by one of the following: 1. Oshkosh (Preferred as building standard) 2. VT Industries, Inc. 3. Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Marlite.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards.

1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.

2. Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements in addition to quality standard.

B. Low-Emitting Materials: Fabricate doors with adhesives and composite wood products that do not contain urea formaldehyde.

C. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.

D. Particleboard-Core Doors:

1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde.

2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.


3. Provide doors with structural-composite-lumber cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.

E. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors:

1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA I.S.10.

a. Screw Withdrawal, Face: 700 lbf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 400 lbf.

2.3 VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species: Match existing. 3. Cut: Match existing. 4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. 5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Center-balance match. 6. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces - edge Type A 7. Core: Particleboard or Structural composite lumber. 8. Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive

planed before veneering. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press. 9. Fire Rating: Match fire rating of exiting door being replaced.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates.

1. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

2.5 FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Finish all doors that are indicated to be within project area.

C. Transparent Finish:


1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: Match existing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.

1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.

2. Reject doors with defects.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.


UDOT Beaver Station Remodel Page 1 of 5 ALUMINUM-FRAMEDSTOREFRONTS

08 4313

SECTION 08 4313ALUMINUM-FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 GENERAL1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Aluminum-framed storefront.B. Infill panels of metal.C. Aluminum doors and frames.D. Weatherstripping.E. Perimeter sealant.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Perimeter sealant and back-up materials.B. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Hardware items other than specified in this section.C. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass and glazing accessories.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2015.B. AAMA 1503 - Voluntary Test Method for Thermal Transmittance and Condensation Resistance

of Windows, Doors and Glazed Wall Sections; 2009.C. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for

High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2013.D. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2010, with 2013

Supplements and Errata.E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.F. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate

[Metric]; 2014.G. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2014.H. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,

Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2013.I. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior

Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across theSpecimen; 2004 (Reapproved 2012).

J. ASTM E330/E330M - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows,Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2014.

K. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

L. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

M. ASTM E331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights,Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTSA. Coordinate with installation of other components that comprise the exterior enclosure.B. Preinstallation Meeting: Conduct a preinstallation meeting one week before starting work of this

section; require attendance by all affected installers.1.05 SUBMITTALS



08 4313

B. Product Data: Provide component dimensions, describe components within assembly,anchorage and fasteners, glass and infill, internal drainage details .

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate system dimensions, framed opening requirements and tolerances,affected related Work, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field weldingrequired.

D. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, engineeringcalculations, dimensional limitations.

E. Hardware Schedule: Complete itemization of each item of hardware to be provided for eachdoor, cross-referenced to door identification numbers in Contract Documents.

F. Samples: Submit two samples 6" x 6" inches in size illustrating finished aluminum surface,glass, glazing materials.

G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that the products supplied meet or exceed the specifiedrequirements.

H. Report of field testing for water leakage.I. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's

name and registered with manufacturer.J. Provide third party certification that site built aluminum storefront systems including

glazing meet the following: Thermal conductance: Provide aluminum framed assemblies(including glazing and framing) with fixed glazing and framing areas having an averageU-Factor of not more than .45 when tested according to AAMA 1503. Third partycertification shall be approved by Building Official.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct

supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work andlicensed at the State in which the Project is located.

B. Manufacturer and Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminumglazing systems with minimum five years of documented experience. Same as curtain wallmanufacturer and installer.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Handle products of this section in accordance with AAMA CW-10.B. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed

coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain thisminimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.09 WARRANTYA. See Section 01 7800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.C. Provide ten year manufacturer warranty against failure of glass seal on insulating glass units,

including interpane dusting or misting. Include provision for replacement of failed units.D. Provide five year manufacturer warranty against excessive degradation of exterior finish.

Include provision for replacement of units with excessive fading, chalking, or flaking.PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 BASIS OF DESIGN -- FRAMING FOR INSULATING GLAZING

A. Center-Set Style, Thermally-Broken:1. Basis of Design: Kawneer; Trifab Versaglaze 451.2. Vertical Mullion Dimensions: 2 inches wide by 4-1/2 inches deep.


08 4313

B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalentproduct of one of the manufacturers listed below:1. EFCO, a Pella Company; _____: www.efcocorp.com.2. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC; _____: www.trulite.com.3. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com.

C. Substitution Procedures: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for

substitutions.2.02 BASIS OF DESIGN -- SWINGING DOORS

A. Wide Stile, Insulating Glazing, Not Thermally-Broken:1. Basis of Design: Kawneer; 500 Entrance.2. Bottom Rail Height: 10 inches.3. Thickness: 1-3/4 inches.

B. Other Manufacturers: Provide either the product identified as "Basis of Design" or an equivalentproduct of one of the manufacturers listed below:1. EFCO, a Pella Company; _____: www.efcocorp.com.2. Trulite Glass & Aluminum Solutions, LLC; _____: www.trulite.com.3. YKK AP America Inc: www.ykkap.com.

C. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.1. For any product not identified as "Basis of Design", submit information as specified for

substitutions.2.03 STOREFRONT

A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing memberswith infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.1. Glazing Rabbet: For 1 inch insulating glazing.2. Glazing Position: Centered (front to back).3. Exterior Storefront Finish: High performance organic coating.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies.b. Touch-up surfaces cut during fabrication so that no natural aluminum is visible in

completed assemblies, including joint edges.c. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious materials or

dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.4. Finish Color: As indicated on the drawings.5. Fabrication: Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and

secured; prepared to receive anchors and hardware; fasteners and attachments concealedfrom view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.

6. Construction: Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibrationharmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

7. Expansion/Contraction: Provide for expansion and contraction within system componentscaused by cycling temperature range of 170 degrees F over a 12 hour period withoutcausing detrimental effect to system components, anchorages, and other buildingelements.

8. Movement: Allow for movement between storefront and adjacent construction, withoutdamage to components or deterioration of seals.

9. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacentconstruction while allowing expected movement.

10. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughoutassembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel andheel bead of glazing compound.

B. Performance Requirements:


08 4313

1. Wind Loads: Design and size components to withstand the specified load requirementswithout damage or permanent set, when tested in accordance with ASTM E330, usingloads 1.5 times the design wind loads and 10 second duration of maximum load.a. Positive Design Wind Load: 20 lbf/sq ft.b. Negative Design Wind Load: 20 lbf/sq ft.c. Member Deflection: Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass in any direction,

with full recovery of glazing materials.2. Water Penetration Resistance: No uncontrolled water on interior face, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E331 at pressure differential of 8.00 lbf/sq ft.3. Air Leakage: Maximum of 0.06 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E283 at 6.27 pounds per square foot pressure differential across assembly.4. Thermal Conductance: Provide aluminum-framed assemblies (including glazing and

framing) with fixed glazing and framing areas having and Average U-Factor of not morethan .45 when tested according to AAMA 1503.

2.04 COMPONENTSA. Aluminum Framing Members: Tubular aluminum sections, drainage holes and internal weep

drainage system. 1. Framing members for interior applications need not be thermally broken.2. Glazing stops: Flush.3. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of

structural steel member as required.B. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000 - Glazing.C. Infill Panels: Insulated, aluminum sheet face and back, with edges formed to fit glazing channel

and sealed.1. Panel Thickness: One inch thick.2. Face Sheet:.032 inch thick.3. Core: Rigid polyurethane insulation core with R-value of 5.4. Back Sheet:.032 inch thick.5. Exterior Finish: Class I natural anodized.6. Interior Finish: Same as exterior finish.

D. Swing Doors: Glazed aluminum.1. Bottom Rail: 10 inches wide.2. Glazing Stops: Square.3. Finish: Same as storefront.

2.05 MATERIALS A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).B. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M).C. Fasteners: Stainless steel.D. Glazing Gaskets: Type to suit application to achieve weather, moisture, and air infiltration

requirements.E. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.

2.06 FINISHES2.07 HARDWARE

A. For each door, include weatherstripping, sill sweep strip and threshold.B. Other Door Hardware: As specified in and provided by Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.C. Weatherstripping: Wool pile, continuous and replaceable; provide on all doors.

PART 3 EXECUTION3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.

http://global.ihs.com/doc_detail.cfm?rid=BSD&document_name=ASTM%20E283








































08 4313

B. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work ofthis section.

3.02 INSTALLATIONA. Install wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and

other irregularities.C. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure.D. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional

tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.E. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.F. Install sill flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.G. Where fasteners penetrate sill flashings, make watertight by seating and sealing fastener heads

to sill flashing.H. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials.I. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of

thermal barrier.J. Set thresholds in bed of mastic and secure.K. Install hardware using templates provided.

1. See Section 08 7100 for hardware installation requirements.L. Install glass and infill panels in accordance with Section 08 8000, using glazing method required

to achieve performance criteria.M. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 9005.N. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace components that cannot be

satisfactorily repaired.3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 0.06 inches every 3 ft non-cumulative or 1/16 inches per 10 ft,whichever is less.

B. Maximum Misalignment of Two Adjoining Members Abutting in Plane: 1/64 inch.3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation.3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove protective material from pre-finished aluminum surfaces.B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean

wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.C. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

3.06 PROTECTIONA. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

END OF SECTION










































087100 - DOOR HARDWARE Page 1 of 7

SECTION 087100 – DOOR HARDWARE PART I – GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. SECTION INCLUDES

1. The work in this section includes furnishing all items of finish hardware as hereinafter specified or obviously necessary for all swinging, sliding, folding and other doors. Except items, which are specifically excluded from this section of the specification or of unique hardware, specified in the same sections as the doors and frames on which they are installed.

B. RELATED DOCUMENTS

1. Related documents, drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and

Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections apply to this section.

C. RELATED SECTIONS

1. 081416 – Flush Wood Doors 2. 102217 – Demountable Partitions

1.02 REFERENCES

A. STANDARDS

1. ANSI A156.1 – Butts and Hinges 2. ANSI A156.2 – Bored Locks and Latches 3. ANSI A156.4 – Door Controls – Door Closers 4. ANSI A156.5 – Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products 5. ANSI A156.6 – Architectural Door Trim 6. ANSI A156.18 – Material and Finishes 7. ANSI A156.22 – Door Gasketing and Edge Seal Systems 8. NFPA 80 – Fire Doors and Windows 9. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies 10. AIA A201 – General Conditions of the Contract

B. CODES

1. NFPA 101 – Life Safety Code 2. IBC 2009 – International Building Code 3. ANSI A117.1 – Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities 4. ADA – Americans with Disabilities Act

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

1. Submit copies of finish hardware schedule in accordance with Division 1, General Requirements.

B. SCHEDULES AND PRODUCT DATA

1. Schedules to be in vertical format, listing each door opening, and organized into “hardware sets” indicating complete designations of every item required for each door opening to function as


intended. Note any special mounting instructions or requirements with the hardware schedule. Schedules to include the following information:

a. Location of each hardware set cross-referenced to indications on drawings, both on floor

plans and in door and frame schedule. b. Handing and degree of swing of each door. c. Door and frame sizes and materials. d. Keying information. e. Type, style, function, size, and finish of each hardware item. f. Name and manufacturer of each hardware item. g. Fastenings and other pertinent information. h. Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols and codes contained in schedule i. Mounting locations for hardware when varies from standard.

2. Submit catalog cuts and/or product data sheets for all scheduled finish hardware.

3. Submit separate detailed keying schedule for approval indicating clearly how the owner’s final

instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled.

C. SAMPLES

1. Upon request, samples of each type of hardware in finish indicated shall be submitted. Samples are to remain undamaged and in working condition through submittal and review process. Items will be returned to the supplier or incorporated into the work within limitations of keying coordination requirements.

D. TEMPLATES

1. Furnish a complete list and suitable templates, together with finish hardware schedule to

contractor, for distribution to necessary trades supplying materials to be prepped for finish hardware.

E. OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

1. Upon completion of construction and building turnover, furnish two (2) complete maintenance

manuals to the owner. Manuals to include the following items:

a. Approved hardware schedule, catalog cuts and keying schedule. b. Hardware installation and adjustment instructions. c. Manufacturer’s written warranty information. d. Wiring diagrams, elevation drawings and operational descriptions for all electronic openings.


A. SUBSTITUTIONS

1. All substitution requests must be submitted before bidding and within the procedures and time frame as outlined in Division 1, General Requirements. Approval of products is at the discretion of the architect and his hardware consultant.

B. SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS

1. A recognized architectural door hardware supplier who has maintained an office and has been

furnishing hardware in the project’s vicinity for a period of at least two (2) years.

2. Hardware supplier shall have office and warehouse facilities to accommodate this project.


3. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment at least one (1) Architectural Hardware

Consultant (AHC) who is available at reasonable times during business hours for consultation about the project’s hardware and requirements to the owner, architect and contractor.

4. Hardware supplier must be an authorized factory distributor of all products specified herein.

1.05 FIRE-RATED OPENINGS

1. Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that comply with NFPA 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are listed by Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey (WH) for use on types and sizes of doors indicated.

2. Project requires door assemblies and components that are compliant with positive pressure and S-label requirements. Specifications must be cross-referenced and coordinated with door manufacturers to ensure that total opening engineering is compatible with UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

a. Hardware required for fire doors shall be listed with Underwriters Laboratories for ratings

specified.

b. Certification(s) of compliance shall be made available upon request by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. MARKING AND PACKAGING

1. Properly package and mark items according to the approved hardware schedule, complete with necessary screws and accessories, instructions and installation templates for spotting mortising tools. Contractor shall check deliveries against accepted list and provide receipt for them, after which he is responsible for storage and care. Any shortage or damaged good shall be made without cost to the owner.

2. Packaging of door hardware is the responsibility of the supplier. As hardware supplier receives

material from various manufacturers, sort and repackage in containers clearly marked with appropriate hardware set and door numbers to match the approved hardware schedule. Two or more identical sets may be packed in same container.

B. DELIVERY

1. The supplier shall deliver all hardware to the project site; direct factory shipments are not allowed

unless agreed upon beforehand. Hardware supplier shall coordinate delivery times and schedules with the contractor. Inventory door hardware jointly with representatives of hardware supplier and hardware installer/contractor until each is satisfied that count is correct.

2. No keys, other than construction master keys and/or temporary keys are to be packed in boxes

with the locks.

3. At time of hardware delivery, door openings supplier in conjunction with the contractor shall check in all hardware and set up a hardware storage room.

C. STORAGE


1. Provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to the Project, but not yet installed. Control handling and installation of hardware items that are not immediately replaceable so that completion of work will not be delayed by hardware losses both before and after installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. All items, except as noted below, shall be warranted in writing by the manufacturer against failure due to defective materials and workmanship for a minimum period of one (1) year commencing on the date of final completion and acceptance. In the event of product failure, promptly repair or replace item with no additional cost to the owner.

1. Cylindrical locksets – Heavy Duty: Seven (7) years 2. Exit Devices: Five (5) years 3. Door closers: Ten (10) years.

PART II – PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide hardware by Corbin Russwin (or equivalent) as presently exists in the facility as far as practicable.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. SCREWS AND FASTENERS

1. All required screws shall be supplied as necessary for securing finish hardware in the appropriate manner. Thru-bolts shall be supplied for exit devices and door closers where required by code and the appropriate blocking or reinforcing is not present in the door to preclude their use.

B. HANGING DEVICES

1. HINGES

a. Hinges shall conform to ANSI A156.1 and have the number of knuckles as specified, oil-

impregnated bearings as specified with NRP (non-removable pin) feature, at all exterior reverse bevel doors. Unless otherwise scheduled, supply one (1) hinge for every 30” of door height. Hinges shall be a minimum of 4 1/2” high and 4” wide; heavy weight hinges (.180) shall be supplied at all doors.

C. CYLINDERS AND KEYING

1. CYLINDERS

a. Best cylinder with pin system to match existing on Owner controlled doors. Cylinder to match existing on all Property Owner controlled doors. No Substitutions.

. 2. KEYING

a. Supplier shall meet with Owner and building manager to review existing keying system and

document Owner’s direction on keying of all cylinders. Provide (3) three keys per door, and (5) keys of each additional tier (master, grandmaster, etc.) for project.


D. LOCKING DEVICES

1. CYLINDRICAL LOCKSETS – HEAVY DUTY

a. All locksets shall be ANSI 156.2 Series 4000, Grade 1 Certified. Lock housing shall be

fabricated of steel zinc dichromate and stainless steel. Latchbolt shall be brass or stainless steel with a minimum 1/2” throw. Locks shall be non-handed and fully field reversible. Locksets will have lever type ADA compliant handles. Owner will select style of lever handle. Locksets must accept cylinders specified.

2. LOCKSET STRIKES

a. Strikes shall be non-handed and available with curved lip, full lip or ASA type strikes as required. Provide strikes with lip-length required to accommodate jamb and/or trim detail and projection.

E. EXIT DEVICES

1. CONVENTIONAL DEVICES – PUSH RAIL

a. All exit devices shall be ANSI A156.3, Grade 1 Certified and shall be listed by Underwriters

Laboratories and bear the UL label for life safety in full compliance with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Mounting rails shall be formed from a solid single piece of stainless steel, brass or bronze no less than 0.072” thick. Push rails shall be constructed of 0.062” thick material. Lever trim shall be available in finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets.

F. DOOR CLOSERS

1. SURFACE MOUNTED CLOSERS – HEAVY DUTY

a. All door closers shall be ANSI 156.4, Grade 1 Certified. All surface closers shall be of full rack and pinion construction. Closing speed, latching speed and backcheck shall be controlled by key operated valves. Closers shall be non-handed to meet a variety of door conditions and design requirements. Closers shall project no more than 2 3/4” from the surface of the door. All arms shall be finely finished with heavy duty forged steel main arm and closer covers shall be of high impact plastic material of flame retardant grade.

G. DOOR TRIM AND PROTECTIVE PLATES

1. Kick plates shall be .050 gauges and two (2) inches less full width of door, or as specified. Push plates, pull plates, door pulls and miscellaneous door trim shall be as shown in the hardware schedule.

H. DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS

1. WALL MOUNTED DOOR STOPS

a. Where a door is indicated on the plans to strike flush against a wall, wall bumpers shall be provided. Provide convex or concave design as indicated.

I. GASKETING AND THRESHOLDS


1. Provide continuous smoke, light, or sound seals on interior doors where indicated or scheduled.

Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strip is easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware.

B. All finishes shall match existing building standard.

PART III – EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Contractor shall survey all existing doors in project and provide replacement hardware of like finish, function and character as presently exists, and for new doors, function as indicated. Examine hardware before installation to ensure it is free of defects.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Mount hardware units at existing heights, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with the governing regulations.

B. All hardware shall be applied and installed in accordance with best trade practice by an experienced

hardware installer. Care shall be exercised not to mar or damage adjacent work.

C. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation or application of surface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved.

D. Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the

handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.


A. Prior to the installation of hardware, manufacturer's representatives for locksets, closers, and exit devices shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractor's personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect and Owner.

B. The manufacturer’s representative shall do a final inspection prior to building completion to ensure

that all hardware was correctly installed and is in proper working order.

3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND DEMONSTRATING


A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made.

B. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of a space

or area, return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore to proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment.

C. Instruct owner's personnel in the proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware

finishes and usage of any electronic devices. 3.05 PROTECTION

A. Contractor shall protect all hardware, as it is stored on construction site in a covered and dry place.

Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame.

3.06 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

A. 105A, 106A, 107A, 108A, 109A, 110A, 112A, 113A, 119A, 122A, 123A, 124A, 125A, 128A, 129A, 130A, 131A, 135A, 136A, 137A, 141A, 142A, 143A, 144A, 145A, 146A, 147A, 149A. Offices and all rooms requiring minimal secure. Locksets with lever type handles. Strike, hinges, keyed core, wall stop.

B. 103A, 111A, 120A, 121A, 132A, 133A, 133B, 134A, 148A. Passage set (lever type handles), strike, hinges, wall stop or floor stop as necessary.

C. 117A, 118A Passage set (Lever type handles), deadbolt (control outside the room), strike, hinges, wall stop.

D. 101A, 102A, 114A, 115A, 116A, 121B, 138A, BA, CA. Lockset, cylinder, electronic strike, hinges, closer, wall stop. Card Reader required. To be installed by owner. Coordinate location and installation.


088000-GLAZING Page 1 of 7

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Windows. 2. Doors.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.


A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300, ICC's 2009 International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria: 1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to Project

according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings. a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph. b. Importance Factor: 1.15. c. Exposure Category: C.

2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.

3. Glass Type Factors for Wired, Patterned, and Sandblasted Glass: a. Short-Duration Glass Type Factor for Wired Glass: 0.5. b. Long-Duration Glass Type Factor for Wired Glass: 0.3.

4. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever is less.

5. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.


C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.


A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for coated glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations

within previous 36-month period.

C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

C. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's

"Glazing Manual."

D. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.


A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.



A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are

outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion

parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

2.3 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with

other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790. b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700. c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290. d. Pecora Corporation; 890. e. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division; SikaSil-C990. f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

2.5 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.

C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.6 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and

offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.

Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.


H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

3.4 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

C. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.5 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION


A. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

C. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.


09 2116 - Page 1 of 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09 2116

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Gypsum wallboard.

B. Joint treatment and accessories.


A. ASTM C475/C475M - Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for FinishingGypsum Board; 2015.

B. ASTM C840 - Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.

C. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board; 2014a.

D. GA-216 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board; 2013.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, accessories, and joint finishingsystem.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Provide completed assemblies complying with ASTM C840 and GA-216.

2.02 BOARD MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers - Gypsum-Based Board:

1. American Gypsum Company; ____: www.americangypsum.com.

2. CertainTeed Corporation; ____: www.certainteed.com.

3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum; ____: www.gpgypsum.com.

4. National Gypsum Company; ____: www.nationalgypsum.com.


B. Gypsum Wallboard: Paper-faced gypsum panels as defined in ASTM C1396/C1396M; sizes tominimize joints in place; ends square cut.

1. Application: Use for vertical surfaces and ceilings, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Thickness:

a. Vertical Surfaces: 1/2 inch (13 mm).

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Materials: ASTM C475/C475M and as recommended by gypsum board manufacturer forproject conditions.

1. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners, except asotherwise indicated.

2. Tape: 2 inch (50 mm) wide, creased paper tape for joints and corners, except as otherwiseindicated.

3. Ready-mixed vinyl-based joint compound.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are appropriate for work of this section to commence.

3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C840, GA-216, and manufacturer's instructions. Install to minimize butt endjoints, especially in highly visible locations.

3M Second Floor Remodel 09 2116 - Page 2 of 2 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

3.03 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. Control Joints: Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces and as indicated.

B. Corner Beads: Install at external corners, using longest practical lengths.

3.04 JOINT TREATMENT

A. Finish gypsum board in accordance with levels defined in ASTM C840, as follows:

1. Level 4: Walls and ceilings to receive paint finish or wall coverings, unless otherwiseindicated.

2. Level 1: Fire rated wall areas above finished ceilings, whether or not accessible in thecompleted construction.

B. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, and corners to produce smooth surface ready toreceive finishes.

1. Feather coats of joint compound so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm).

END OF SECTION

092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING Page 1 of 6 JRCA Architects, Inc.

SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes non-load-bearing steel framing members for the following applications:

1. Interior framing systems (e.g., supports for partition walls, framed soffits, furring, etc.). 2. Interior suspension systems (e.g., supports for ceilings, suspended soffits, etc.).


1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior and interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses.

2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation installed with Z-shaped furring members.

3. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall joint systems installed with non-load-bearing steel framing.

1.3 SUBMITTALS



A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.


2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch (4.12-mm) diameter.

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.37 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19.1 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) or as indicated on drawings. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) or as indicated on drawings.

2.3 STEEL FRAMING FOR FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) unless indicated otherwise on

drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- (50.8-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

C. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.


1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm).

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38.1 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38.1 by 38.1 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.73-mm-)

thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm) unless indicated otherwise on drawings.

2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.37-mm) bare-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (12.7-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum bare-steel

thickness of 0.0312 inch (0.79 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.0625-inch- (1.59-mm-)

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.0475-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

H. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (31.8 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22.2 mm), minimum bare-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.45 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength.

1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:

1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated.

1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation.

2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation.

3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation.

4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.4 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:


1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that

extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

3.5 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

1. Space studs as follows:

a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile backing panels: 16 inches (406 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to


terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb, unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch

(12.7-mm) clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings, unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs.

On straight lengths of not less than 2 studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.

D. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or

powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

E. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm)o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (300 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.


UDOT Beaver Station Remodel Page 1 of 3 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS09 5100

SECTION 09 5100ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS


A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system.B. Acoustical units.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTSA. Section 07 9005 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical sealant.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. ASTM C635/C635M - Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of

Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings; 2013a.B. ASTM C636/C636M - Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels; 2013.C. ASTM E580/E580M - Standard Practice for Installation of Ceiling Suspension Systems for

Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panels in Areas Subject to Earthquake Ground Motions; 2014.1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Sequence work to ensure acoustical ceilings are not installed until building is enclosed,sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work iscompleted, tested, and approved.

B. Do not install acoustical units until after interior wet work is dry.1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Shop Drawings: Indicate grid layout and related dimensioning.C. Product Data: Provide data on suspension system components.D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCEA. Suspension System Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.B. Acoustical Unit Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the

products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and maximum humidity of 40 percentprior to, during, and after acoustical unit installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 ACOUSTICAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc: www.armstrong.com.2. Acoustic Ceiling Products, Inc.: www.acpideas.com.3. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.4. Hunter Douglas Contract: www.hunterdouglascontract.com.5. USG: www.usg.com.6. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. 2'x2' Acoustical Panels for Acoustical Panel Ceiling: Where 2' x 2' panels are indicated, provideacoustical panels complying with the following:1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Optima;

Armstrong or a comparable product by one of the manufacturers listed.


2. Color: White.3. Edge Detail: Tegular.4. Thickness: 1 inch (19 mm).5. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 1220 mm).

2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM(S)A. Manufacturers:

1. Same as for acoustical units.2. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

B. Suspension Systems - General: ASTM C635; die cut and interlocking components, withstabilizer bars, clips, splices, perimeter moldings, and hold down clips as required.

C. Exposed Steel Suspension System for use with acoustical panels: Formed steel, commercialquality cold rolled; heavy-duty.1. Profile: Tee; 15/16 inch wide face.2. Construction: Double web.3. Finish: White painted.4. Perimeter Moldings: Same material and finish as grid.

a. At Exposed Grid: Provide L-shaped molding for mounting at same elevation as faceof grid.

b. Size: 7/8 inch 7/8 inch.c. Seismic Clips: Armstrong, Berc2 or equal. Install at each end of grid.

2.03 ACCESSORIESA. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, seismic

requirements, and ceiling system flatness requirement specified.B. Acoustical Sealant For Perimeter Moldings: Non-hardening, non-skinning, for use in

conjunction with suspended ceiling system.C. Touch-up Paint: Type and color to match acoustical and grid units.


A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work.

3.02 INSTALLATION - SUSPENSION SYSTEMA. Install suspension system in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M, ASTM E580/E580M, and

manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this section.B. Rigidly secure system, including integral mechanical and electrical components, for maximum

deflection of 1:360.C. Lay out system to a balanced grid design with edge units no less than 50 percent of acoustical

unit size.D. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan.E. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other

work.F. Hang suspension system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where

carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members.G. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest

affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance.H. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load

to exceed deflection capability.I. Support fixture loads using supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner, or

support components independently.


J. Do not eccentrically load system or induce rotation of runners.K. Perimeter Molding: Install at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces and at junctions with

other interruptions.1. Install in bed of acoustical sealant.2. Use longest practical lengths.3. Overlap corners.4. Exposed rivets not permitted.

3.03 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL UNITSA. Install acoustical units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.B. Fit acoustical units in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to

appearance and function.C. Lay directional patterned units with pattern parallel to longest room axis.D. Fit border trim neatly against abutting surfaces.E. Install units after above-ceiling work is complete.F. Install acoustical units level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp, and dents.G. Cutting Acoustical Units:

1. Cut to fit irregular grid and perimeter edge trim.2. Make field cut edges of same profile as factory edges.3. Double cut and field paint exposed reveal edges.

H. Where round obstructions occur, provide preformed closures to match perimeter molding.3.04 TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.B. Maximum Variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: 2 degrees.

END OF SECTION

096519-RESILIENT TILE FLOORING Page 1 of 4

096500 – RESILIENT FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Resilient sheet flooring.

B. Resilient base.

C. Installation accessories.


A. ASTM F710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring;

2011.

B. ASTM F1303 - Standard Specification for Sheet Vinyl Floor Covering with Backing; 2004

(Reapproved 2009).

C. ASTM F1861 - Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base; 2008 (Reapproved 2012).

D. ASTM F1913 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Sheet Floor Covering Without Backing; 2004

(Reapproved 2010).

E. ASTM F2169 - Standard Specification for Resilient Stair Treads; 2015.

F. BAAQMD 8-51 - Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51, Adhesive and

Sealant Products; www.baaqmd.gov; 2002.

G. GEI (SCH) - GREENGUARD "Children and Schools" Certified Products; GREENGUARD

Environmental Institute; current listings at www.greenguard.org.

H. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition;

www.aqmd.gov.

I. SCS (CPD) - SCS Certified Products; Scientific Certification Systems; current listings at

www.scscertified.com.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performance

characteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Architect's initial

selection.

D. Concrete Testing Standard: Submit a copy of ASTM F710.

E. Certification: Prior to installation of flooring, submit written certification by flooring manufacturer

and adhesive manufacturer that condition of sub-floor is acceptable.

F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and

suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re-waxing.


A. Protect roll materials from damage by storing on end.


A. Maintain temperature in storage area between 55 degrees F and 90 degrees F.


B. Store materials for not less than 48 hours prior to installation in area of installation at a

temperature of 70 degrees F to achieve temperature stability. Thereafter, maintain conditions

above 55 degrees F.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET FLOORING

A. Vinyl Sheet Flooring : Homogeneous without backing, with color and pattern throughout full

thickness, and:

1. Minimum Requirements: Comply with ASTM F1303, Type II, without backing, or ASTM

F1913.

2. VOC Content: Certified as Low Emission by one of the following :

a. GreenGuard Children and Schools; www.greenguard.org.

b. SCS Floorscore; www.scscertified.com.

3. Total Thickness and Wear Layer Thickness: 0.080 inch nominal.

4. Sheet Width: 49 inch minimum.

5. Static Load Resistance: 125 psi minimum, when tested as specified in ASTM F1303.

6. Heat welded seams.

7. Integral coved base with cap strip.

8. Pattern: Marbleized.

B. Vinyl Welding Rod: Solid vinyl bead produced by manufacturer of vinyl flooring for heat welding

seams, in multi-color matching field color.

2.02 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: ASTM F1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove,and

as follows:

1. Height: 4 inch.

2. Thickness: 0.125 inch thick.

3. Finish: Satin.

4. Color: Color as selected from manufacturer's standards.

5. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops.

6. Manufacturers:

a. Burke Flooring: www.burkemercer.com.

b. Johnsonite, Inc: www.johnsonite.com.

c. Roppe Corp: www.roppe.com.

d. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by adhesive material manufacturer.

B. Primers, Adhesives, and Seaming Materials: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer.

1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required

by the more stringent of the South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168 and

the Bay Area Air Quality Management District Regulation 8, Rule 51.

C. Moldings, Transition and Edge Strips: Same material as flooring.

D. Filler for Coved Base: Plastic.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are flat to tolerances acceptable to flooring manufacturer, free of cracks that

might telegraph through flooring, clean, dry, and free of curing compounds, surface hardeners,

and other chemicals that might interfere with bonding of flooring to substrate.

B. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work,

are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

C. Cementitious Sub-floor Surfaces: Verify that substrates are dry enough and ready for resilient

flooring installation by testing for moisture and pH.

1. Test in accordance with ASTM F710.

2. Obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring

manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

D. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare floor substrates as recommended by flooring and adhesive manufacturers.

C. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects

with sub-floor filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface.

D. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

3.03 INSTALLATION

B. Starting installation constitutes acceptance of sub-floor conditions.

C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set.

E. Fit joints tightly.

F. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion.

G. Where type of floor finish, pattern, or color are different on opposite sides of door, terminate

flooring under centerline of door.

H. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, where flooring terminates, and where

indicated.

I. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight

joints.

3.04 SHEET FLOORING

A. Lay flooring with joints and seams parallel to longer room dimensions, to produce minimum

number of seams. Lay out seams to avoid widths less than 1/3 of roll width; match patterns

carefully at seams.

B. Double cut sheet at seams.

C. Lay flooring with tightly butted seams, without any seam sealer unless otherwise indicated.

D. Finish seams in sheet vinyl by heat welding.


E. E. Coved Base: Install as detailed on drawings, using coved base filler as backing at floor to wall

junction. Extend sheet flooring vertically to height indicated, and cover top edge with metal cap

strip.

3.05 RESILIENT BASE

C. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints.

B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use

premolded units.

C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces.

D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions.

3.06 STAIR COVERINGS

A. Adhere over entire surface. Fit accurately and securely.

3.07 LEANING

B. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage.

C. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Prohibit traffic on resilient flooring for 48 hours after installation.

END OF SECTION

096813 - TILE CARPETING Page 1 of 5

SECTION 096813 - TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes modular, carpet tile and broadloom carpet base.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for installed with carpet tile.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review methods and procedures related to carpet tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: a. Review subfloor preparation procedures.



1. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance.

2. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following:

1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Type of installation. 5. Pattern of installation. 6. Pattern type, location, and direction. 7. Pile direction. 8. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 9. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 10. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules.


1. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. 2. Carpet Base: 24” section of 4” base with binding tape edge. 3. Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch- (300-mm-) long

Samples.

D. Product Schedule: For carpet tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: For carpet tile, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.


A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tiles to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:

1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.

2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd. (8.3 sq. m).

2. Carpet Base: 50 lineal feet of base material with bound edge.


A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the International Certified Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.

B. Fire-Test-Response Ratings: Where indicated, provide carpet tile identical to those of assemblies tested for fire response according to NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency and will be tested to Class I in corridors, exit enclosures and exit passageways. It will be tested to Class II in all rooms.

C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockups at locations determined by Architect. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the

completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.



A. Comply with CRI 104.


A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet tiles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 5 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

3. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET TILE

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings for both tile and base.

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, non-staining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Metal Edge/Transition Strips: Extruded aluminum with finish of profile and width shown, of height required to protect exposed edge of carpet, and of maximum lengths to minimize running joints.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:

1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet tile.

3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

D. Clean metal substrates of grease, oil, soil and rust, and prime if directed by adhesive manufacturer. Rough sand painted metal surfaces and remove loose paint. Sand aluminum surfaces, to remove metal oxides, immediately before applying adhesive.

E. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.


D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

H. Install carpet base around all perimeters. Where base ends at outside or unfinished vertical edge, provide binding tape at exposed edge.


A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.


09 7733 - Page 1 of 2 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTICPANELS

SECTION 09 7733

GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTIC PANELS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Glass fiber reinforced plastic panels.

B. Trim.


A. 9 CFR 416.2 - Regulatory Requirements Under the Federal Meat Inspection Act and the PoultryProducts Inspection Act, Part 416-Sanitation; current edition.

B. ASTM D256 - Standard Test Methods for Determining the Izod Pendulum Impact Resistance ofPlastics; 2010.

C. ASTM D2583 - Standard Test Method for Indentation Hardness of Rigid Plastics by Means ofBarcol Impressor; 2013a.

D. ASTM D3273 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface ofInterior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2016.

E. ASTM D5319 - Standard Specification for Glass-Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and CeilingPanels; 2012.

F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;2015a.

G. FM 4880 - Class 1 Fire Rating of Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Panels, Interior FinishMaterials or Coatings and Exterior Wall Systems; 2010.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and performancecharacteristics; including sizes, patterns and colors available; and installation instructions.

C. Samples: Submit two samples __2__by__2__ inch (____by____ mm) in size illustratingmaterial and surface design of panels.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.


A. Store panels flat, indoors, on a clean, dry surface. Remove packaging and allow panels toacclimate to room temperature for 48 hours prior to installation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Panels:

1. Crane Composites, Inc; _____: www.cranecomposites.com.

2. Marlite; _____: www.marlite.com.


2.02 PANEL SYSTEMS

A. Wall Panels:

1. Panel Size: 4 by 8 feet (1.2 by 2.4 m).

2. Panel Thickness: 0.10 inch (2.5 mm).

3. Surface Design: Embossed.

4. Color: As selected by Architect.

5. Attachment Method: Adhesive only, sealant joints, no trim.

3M Second Floor Remodel 09 7733 - Page 2 of 2 GLASS FIBER REINFORCED PLASTICPANELS

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Panels: Glass fiber reinforced plastic (FRP), complying with ASTM D5319.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame spread index of 25 and smokedeveloped index of 450; when system tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

2. Class 1 fire rated when tested in accordance with FM 4880.

3. Mold Resistance: Score of 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM D3273.

4. Scratch Resistance: Barcol hardness score greater than 35, when tested in accordancewith ASTM D2583.

5. Impact Strength: Greater than 6 ft lb force per inch (320 J per m), when tested inaccordance with ASTM D256.

6. Sanitation and Cleanability: Comply with 9 CFR 416.2.

B. Trim: Vinyl; color coordinating with panel.

C. Adhesive: Type recommended by panel manufacturer.

D. Sealant: Type recommended by panel manufacturer; white.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions and substrate flatness before starting work.

B. Verify that substrate conditions are ready to receive the work of this section.

3.02 INSTALLATION - WALLS

A. Install panels in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Cut and drill panels with carbide tipped saw blades, drill bits, or snips.

C. Apply adhesive to the back side of the panel using trowel as recommended by adhesivemanufacturer.

D. Apply panels to wall with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels.

E. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints.

F. Place trim on panel before fastening edges, as required.

G. Fill channels in trim with sealant before attaching to panel.

H. Install trim with adhesive and screws or nails, as required.

I. Seal gaps at floor, ceiling, and between panels with applicable sealant to prevent moistureintrusion.

J. Remove excess sealant after paneling is installed and prior to curing.

END OF SECTION

099123-INTERIOR PAINTING Page 1 of 6

SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Gypsum board including demountable partition surfaces. 4. Previously painted surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated.

1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each Sample. 4. Label each Sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List."

2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.


1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups.


A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.


A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: As indicated on the drawings.

2.2 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.


2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250

g/L. 4. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 5. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 6. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250

g/L. 7. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 8. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L.

C. Colors: Match Architect's samples.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 2.

2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.

B. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.

2.5 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Satin): MPI #43 (Gloss Level 2).


B. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 4).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.


C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" and “MPI Repainting Manual” applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting.

1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.

2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

E. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.

F. Gypsum Board Substrates: Patch and repair all existing wall surfaces, eliminating holes, divots, irregularities and out of plane conditions. This may require floating portions of the existing wall. Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

G. Cleaning around existing items not to be painted. Remove any excess paint at edges of door or window frames and the like so that new paint line will be crisp and clean after painting.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed

surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.


B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets

and outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering

or other paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field

painting.


A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Steel Substrates:

1. Latex over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q.

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss.

B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 5.3A.


a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex semigloss.

C. Gypsum Board Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex satin.


UDOT Beaver Station Remodel Page 1 of 3 SIGNAGE10 1400

SECTION 10 1400SIGNAGE


A. Room and door signs.1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 22 0553 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.B. Section 26 0553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.C. Section 26 5100 - Interior Lighting: Exit signs required by code.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDSA. 36 CFR 1191 - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and

Facilities; Final Rule; current edition; (ADA Standards for Accessible Design).B. ANSI/ICC A117.1 - American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and

Facilities; International Code Council; 2009.1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign

styles, font, foreground and background colors, locations, overall dimensions of each sign.C. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each sign for fabrication,

including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, andcolors.1. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the drawings, include the

drawing room number on schedule.2. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later, request such information from

Owner through Architect at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request,submit preliminary schedule.

3. Submit for approval by Owner through Architect prior to fabrication.D. Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar to that required for project,

illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.E. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or

chips.F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.G. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified inthis section with minimum three years of documented experience.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLINGA. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.C. Store tape adhesive at normal room temperature.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONSA. Do not install tape adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.


PART 2 PRODUCTS2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Flat Signs:1. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.2. Cosco Industries (ADA signs): www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com.3. Cosco Industries (non-ADA signs): www.coscoarchitecturalsigns.com.4. InPro Corporation : www.inprocorp.com.5. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.6. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.7. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 SIGNAGE APPLICATIONSA. Accessibility Compliance: All signs are required to comply with ADA Standards for Accessible

Design and ANSI/ICC A 117.1 and applicable building codes, unless otherwise indicated; in theevent of conflicting requirements, comply with the most comprehensive and specificrequirements.

B. Room and Door Signs:1. Sign Type: Flat signs with applied character panel media as specified.2. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch and Grade II braille.3. Character Height: 1 inch.4. Sign Height: As indicated on drawings.5. Rest Rooms: Identify with pictograms, the names "MEN" and "WOMEN", and braille and

as indicated on drawings.2.03 SIGN TYPES

A. Flat Signs: Signage media without frame.1. Edges: Bevelled.2. Corners: Radiused.3. Wall Mounting of One-Sided Signs: Tape adhesive.

B. Color and Font: Unless otherwise indicated:1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font.2. Character Case: Upper case only.3. Background Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.4. Character Color: As selected from manufacturer's full range.

2.04 TACTILE SIGNAGE MEDIAA. Engraved Panels: Laminated colored plastic; engraved through face to expose core as

background color:1. Total Thickness: 1/16 inch.

B. Applied Character Panels: Acrylic plastic base, with applied acrylic plastic letters and braille.1. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch.2. Letter Thickness: 1/8 inch.3. Letter Edges: Square.

2.05 ACCESSORIESA. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel.B. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.


A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.C. Locate signs where indicated:

1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of sign at 60inches above finished floor.

2. If no location is indicated obtain Owner's instructions.3. Do not install on doors or glass sidelights.

D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.END OF SECTION

10 2239 - Page 1 of 2 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS

SECTION 10 2239

FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Folding panel partitions.

B. Ceiling track, ceiling guards, and operating hardware.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section __________: Overhead track structural support framing.


A. ASTM E557 - Standard Guide for Architectural Design and Installation Practices for SoundIsolation between Spaces Separated by Operable Partitions; 2012.

B. ASTM E596 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Noise Reduction ofSound-Isolating Enclosures; 1996 (Reapproved 2009).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on partition materials, operation, hardware and accessories, electricoperating components, track switching components, colors and finishes available, and _____.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate opening sizes, track layout, details of track and required supports,static and dynamic loads, location and details of pass door and frame, adjacent constructionand finish trim, stacking depth, and _____.

D. Samples for Selection: Submit two samples of full manufacturer's color range for selection ofcolors.

E. Samples for Review: Submit two samples of surface finish, 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm)size, illustrating quality, colors selected, texture, and weight.

F. Certificates: Certify that partition system meets or exceeds specified acoustic requirements.

G. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special procedures.

H. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, and stainremoval methods. Describe cleaning materials detrimental to finish surfaces and hardwarefinish.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified thissection with minimum three years of documented experience.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Other Acceptable Manufacturers:


2.02 COMPONENTS

A. Operable Panel Partition: Center opening; paired panels; center stacking; manually operated.

1. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): ASTM E596, NRC of 0.65 minimum.

B. Track: Formed steel; 1-1/4 by 1-1/4 inch (32 by 32 mm) size; thickness and profile designed tosupport loads, steel sub-channel and track connectors, and track switches.

C. Carriers: Nylon wheels on trolley carrier at top of every second panel, sized to carry imposedloads, with threaded pendant bolt for vertical adjustment.

3M Second Floor Remodel 10 2239 - Page 2 of 2 FOLDING PANEL PARTITIONS

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install partition in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM E557.

END OF SECTION

10 2800 - Page 1 of 2 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRYACCESSORIES

SECTION 10 2800

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Commercial toilet accessories.

B. Commercial shower and bath accessories.


A. ADA Standards - Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards for Accessible Design; 2010.

B. ASTM A269/A269M - Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic StainlessSteel Tubing for General Service; 2015a.

C. ASTM A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless SteelSheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2015.

1.03 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceilingsupports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit data on accessories describing size, finish, details of function, andattachment methods.

C. Samples: Submit two samples of each accessory, illustrating color and finish.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiringspecial attention.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Commercial Toilet, Shower, and Bath Accessories:

1. Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged completewith anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation.

1. Grind welded joints smooth.

2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.

C. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269/A269M, Grade TP304 or TP316.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: Satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

2.04 COMMERCIAL TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Paper Dispenser: Single roll, surface mounted bracket type, stainless steel, spindlelesstype for tension spring delivery designed to prevent theft of tissue roll.

B. Paper Towel Dispenser: Folded paper type, stainless steel, semi-recessed, with viewing slotson sides as refill indicator and tumbler lock.

1. Capacity: 300 C-fold minimum.

C. Soap Dispenser: Liquid soap dispenser, wall-mounted, surface, with stainless steel cover andhorizontal stainless steel tank and working parts; push type soap valve, check valve, andwindow gage refill indicator, tumbler lock.

D. Grab Bars: Stainless steel, nonslip grasping surface finish.

3M Second Floor Remodel 10 2800 - Page 2 of 2 TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRYACCESSORIES

1. Standard Duty Grab Bars:

a. Push/Pull Point Load: 250 pound-force (1112 N), minimum.

b. Dimensions: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) outside diameter, minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) wallthickness, exposed flange mounting, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) clearance between wall andinside of grab bar.

c. Length and Configuration: As indicated on drawings.

d. Products:

1) Anti-Ligature Grab Bars.

2) Substitutions: Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

C. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on drawings.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturers' instructions in locations indicated on thedrawings.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mounting Heights: As required by accessibility regulations, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Grab Bars: As indicated on the drawings.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed accessories from damage due to subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS Page 1 of 5

SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats to be provided for all exterior windows.



B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches (300 mm) long.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated.

1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long. 2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long. 3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches (400 mm) wide by 24

inches (600 mm) long.

E. Window-Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of quantity installed for each size, color, texture, pattern, and gloss indicated, but no fewer than two units.


A. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.


1. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer, product name, and location of installation using same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operating hardware of operable glazed units through entire operating range. Notify Architect of installation conditions that vary from Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Lifetime Limited Warranty. Specific product warranties available from manufacturer or its authorized agent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds from single source from single manufacturer.

2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hunter

Douglas CE81 1 Mini Aluminum Blind.

B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with crowned profile and radius corners. 1. Thickness: Not less than 0.008 inch. 2. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard. 3. Finish: Ionized antistatic, dust-repellent, baked polyester finish. 4. Features:


a. Lift-Cord Rout Holes: Minimum size required for lift cord and located near back (outside) edge of slat to maximize slat overlap and minimize light gaps between slats.

b. Perforated Slats: Openness factor of 6 to 7 percent.

C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled. Headrails fully enclose operating mechanisms on three sides.

1. Capacity: One blind per headrail unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ends: Capped or plugged. 3. Manual Lift Mechanism:

a. Lift-Cord Lock: Variable; stops lift cord at user-selected position within blind full operating range.

b. Operator: Extension of lift cord(s) through lift-cord lock mechanism to form cord pull.

4. Manual Tilt Mechanism: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism and linkage rod that adjusts ladders.

a. Tilt: Full. b. Operator: Clear-plastic wand. c. Over-Rotation Protection: Manufacturer's detachable operator or slip clutch to

prevent over rotation of gear.

5. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Lengths: Manufacturer's standard. 6. Manual Lift-Operator and Tilt-Operator Locations: Manufacturer's standard. 7. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face.

D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube that secures and protects ends of ladders and lift cords and has plastic- or metal-capped ends.

1. Type: Top contoured to match crowned shape of slat. Bottom contoured to minimize light gaps.

E. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard braided cord.

F. Ladders: Evenly spaced across headrail at spacing that prevents long-term slat sag.

1. Type: Braided cord.

G. Valance: One slat.

H. Mounting Brackets: With spacers and shims required for blind placement and alignment indicated.

1. Type: Overhead. 2. Intermediate Support: Provide intermediate support brackets to produce support spacing

recommended by blind manufacturer for weight and size of blind.

I. Hold-Down Brackets and Hooks or Pins: Manufacturer's standard.

J. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss:

1. Slats: TBD by Architect.


2. Components: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and materials exposed to view matching or coordinating with slat color unless otherwise indicated.

2.3 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION

A. Product Safety Standard: Fabricate horizontal louver blinds to comply with WCMA A 100.1 including requirements for corded, flexible, looped devices; lead content of components; and warning labels.

B. Unit Sizes: Fabricate units in sizes to cover each individual window.

1. Between (Inside) Jamb Installation: Width equal to individual glazing unit less 1/8 inch per side or 1/4 inch total. Length equal to head-to-sill dimension of glass in which blind is installed less 1/4 inch (6 mm), plus or minus 1/8 inch (3.1 mm).

C. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.

1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.

D. Mounting and Intermediate Brackets: Designed for removal and reinstallation of blind without damaging blind and adjacent surfaces, for supporting blind components, and for bracket positions and blind placement indicated.

E. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to brackets and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.

F. Color-Coated Finish:

1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb, aligned and centered on openings, and aligned with adjacent units according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Locate so exterior slat edges are not closer than 1 inch (25 mm from interior faces of glass and not closer than 1/2 inch from interior faces of glazing frames through full operating ranges of blinds.


2. Install mounting and intermediate brackets to prevent deflection of headrails. 3. Install with clearances that prevent interference with adjacent blinds, adjacent

construction, and operating hardware of glazed openings, other window treatments, and similar building components and furnishings.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate free of binding or malfunction through full operating ranges.


A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer and that ensures that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired in a manner approved by Architect before time of Substantial Completion.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems.


CAL RAMPTON MAY 2017 2ND FLOOR REMODEL

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPPRESSION

211313 FIRE SPRINKLERS PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION


FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 211313 - 1

SECTION 211313 - FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEM - PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. Fire sprinkler contractor shall provide modifications to the existing fire sprinkler system per the requirements of this performance specification, including design, submittals, and shop drawings by a NICET level 4 certified designer.

B. Remodeled areas of existing building shall have the existing fire sprinkler system

extended and modified to provide protection as necessary. See Architectural drawings for definition of these areas. Work includes, but is not limited to:

1. Design, drawings, and, if necessary, hydraulic calculations. 2. Materials, equipment, and devices.

a. Pipe, fittings, hangers, seismic braces. b. Sprinklers, escutcheons, signs. c. All other materials required for complete installation.

3. Fabrication, installation, and testing. 4. Permits, fees, and documentation. 5. Health care facilities shall be provided with quick response type sprinkler heads.

1.2 RELATED WORK

A. Painting.

B. Electrical Material and Methods.

1.3 WORK NOT INCLUDED

A. Fire extinguishers and cabinets.

B. Painting.

C. Wiring of electrical and alarm devices.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Interior - Remodeled Areas: Relocate and/or add heads as required to the existing system in order to provide coverage in the areas included in this project.

1. When modifying existing systems, relocate sprinklers as required within the

parameters set forth in NFPA 13. Pipe sizing shall match the existing piping.



a. An existing 1" outlet may be utilized to supply (1) sprinklers maximum. b. Mechanical tees may be utilized to run additional lines, as necessary.

1) A flexible grooved coupling shall be installed on the new branch within 1 ft

of the mechanical tee.

c. Hangers and bracing shall be installed as required by NFPA 13 on new systems.


A. Materials, devices, and equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed or Factory Mutual approved for use in fire protection systems.

B. Designer shall be a State of Utah Registered Fire Protection Engineer or a NICET

Certified Engineering Technician (Level IV).

C. Submittals and Shop Drawings shall be stamped by licensed designer.

D. Installer shall be a licensed contractor regularly engaged in the installation of fire sprinkler systems in commercial type buildings.

E. Fire sprinkler work shall comply with NFPA 13, NFPA 72, as well as the State of Utah, IFC

and ADA standards.

1.6 REFERENCES

A. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems," current edition.

B. NFPA 24, AStandard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their

Appurtenances,@ current edition.

C. IBC (International Building Code), 2015

D. IFC (International Fire Code), 2015.

E. Underwriters Laboratories "Fire Protection Equipment Directory," latest edition.

F. Factory Mutual Systems "Approval Guide," latest edition.

1.7 SYSTEM DESIGN

A. System shall be wet pipe.

B. Design density and area of application.

1. Mechanical, Electrical, and Janitorial: Ordinary Hazard Group 1, 0.15 GPM/SQ FT over 1,500 SQ FT.



2. Storage: Ordinary Hazard Group 2, 0.20 GPM/SQ FT over 1,500 SQ FT. 3. All other areas: Light Hazard, 0.10 GPM/SQ FT over 1,500 SQ FT. 4. Adjustments shall be made in the remote area for sloped ceilings and/or roof decks

and for the use of quick response sprinkler heads throughout.

C. Maximum coverage per sprinkler head:

1. Ordinary Hazard areas: 130 SQ FT. 2. Light Hazard areas: 225 SQ FT. 3. Extended coverage sprinklers shall be allowed when installed conforming to the

individual listing of the sprinkler head.

D. Vestibules: Provide dry barrel sprinklers to protect areas subject to temperatures less than 40 F.

E. The design area shall be the hydraulically most remote rectangular area having a

dimension parallel to the branch line equal to, or greater than, 1.2 times the square root of the area of sprinkler operation.

F. Maximum velocity of water flow within piping: 20 FPS.

G. Flow available:

1. Contractor shall perform all necessary flow tests and calculations. 2. The contractor shall design the sprinkler system to the water supply indicated in the

Engineer’s Water Supply Analysis performed for the project, including all recommendations contained within the Analysis.

H. Provide head guards on any sprinklers installed below 7 ft. above the floor and in areas

where the heads are subject to physical damage.

I. Sprinkler heads in areas with folding partitions, curtains, dividers, etc shall be located such that the spacing and clearance shall be maintained whether the partitions are open or closed.

1.8 SUBMITTAL

A. All shop drawings and calculations shall bear the Nicet number and signature of the responsible Nicet Certified Technician or the stamp and signature of the responsible Registered Professional Engineer. Submittals without the proper signature will be returned without review.

B. Submit to local and state Authorities Having Jurisdiction and obtain AHJ's approval,

three copies each:

1. Shop drawings. 2. Hydraulic calculations. 3. Copy of contract specification. 4. Equipment catalog sheets for all major equipment.



C. Submit to the Utah State Fire Marshal, three copies each:

1. Shop drawings. 2. Hydraulic calculations. 3. Copy of contract specification. 4. Equipment catalog sheets for all major equipment. 5. One copy of the Water Supply Analysis with date, time and temperature noted.

D. Submit to Architect for review and Architect's acceptance prior to fabrication and

installation, five copies each:

1. Shop drawings. 2. Hydraulic calculations. 3. Equipment catalog sheets for all major equipment. 4. One copy of the water flow test with date, time and temperature noted.

E. Upon completion of installation submit to Architect two copies each:

1. NFPA 13, "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." 2. NFPA 13, "Contractor's Material & Test Certificate for Underground Piping." 3. As-built shop drawings with designer's signature and certification number.

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Materials, equipment, and workmanship shall be free from defects for 12 months from

the "Date Left in Service with All Control Valves Open," shown on "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate." If any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner, and in accordance with Owner's instructions, either correct such defective Work, or if Owner has rejected it, remove if from the site and replace it with non-defective work. Submit two copies of Warranty Certificates to Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Sprinkler equipment, heads and devices:

1. Central, Grinnell, Reliable, Star, Victaulic and Viking.

B. Backflow preventer:

1. Ames, Watts

2 .2 PIPE AND TUBE

A. Interior:



1. Ferrous piping, ASTM A795, ANSI/ASTM A53, ASTM A135, ANSI B36-10M, UL CRR

(Corrosion Resistance Ratio) minimum 1.0, and copper tube, ASTM B251, Type L or M.

2 .3 FITTINGS

A. Interior.

1. Cast iron threaded, ANSI B16.4. 2. Cast iron flanged, ANSI B16.1. 3. Malleable iron threaded, ANSI B16.3. 4. Forged steel fittings, socket welded and threaded, ANSI B16.11. 5. Copper, ANSI B16.22, B16.18. Joints for connection of copper tube shall be brazed

or soldered. 6. Other types of fittings may be used, but only those investigated and listed for fire

sprinkler service. 7. Plain end couplings, saddle couplings, and clamp type couplings are not acceptable.

2 .4 HANGERS

A. Hangers shall conform to the minimum requirement of NFPA 13. A detail of each type of hanger shall be shown on the shop drawings and calculations for trapeze type hangers shall be provided with the hydraulic calculations.

2 .5 SEISMIC FITTINGS AND BRACES

A. Seismic bracing shall be installed per the requirements of NFPA 13. Calculations for the

seismic bracing shall be provided including all piping within the Aarea of influence@ as

described in NFPA 13.

B. Flexible connections shall be provided at the top and bottom of the system riser and at other locations as described in NFPA 13.

2 .6 SPRINKLER HEADS

A. Areas without ceilings: standard upright or pendent, quick response, factory bronze, ordinary temperature.

B. Areas subject to freezing: dry pendent or sidewall, chrome finish, intermediate

temperature, with recessed chrome canopy.

C. Sprinklers of intermediate and high temperature ratings in specific locations as required by NFPA 13.



D. Provide detention grade heads in secure and holding areas. Coordinate with architectural plans, at a minimum include rooms 116, 117, 118, and 120.

E. Spare heads in representative proportion to types installed and one head wrench for

each type sprinkler.

1. Total quantity of spare heads shall be per the requirements of NFPA 13. 2. Spare heads to be contained in a wall mounted cabinet mounted adjacent to the

riser.

2 .7 VALVES

A. Drain valves as required by the design and as indicated in NFPA 13.

B. OS&Y Gate Valve with supervisory switch.

C. Butterfly Valve with integral supervisory switch.

D. Four inch swing check valve for FDC.

E. One half-inch ball drip for FDC.

2 .8 ALARM DEVICES

A. Vane Type Water Flow Switch with retard (DPDT).

B. Valve supervisory switch (SPDT).

C. 10" Weatherproof Electric Bell.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3 .1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect job site prior to fabricating materials. Coordinate and sequence installation with

the progress of other mechanical and structural systems and components.

3 .2 INSTALLATION

A. Install systems in compliance with methods detailed in NFPA 13 and NFPA 24, including seismic requirements for Area 1, maximum potential for earthquake damage.



B. Sprinkler heads shall be centered in 2' x 2' ceiling tiles and shall be centered in the 2' dimension and at the quarter, half, or three-quarter point in 2' x 4' ceiling tiles.

C. Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings and floors, maintain the

fire-rated integrity with listed sealers and materials.

D. Provide chrome-plated escutcheons where exposed pipe passes through walls, ceilings, or other building components.

3 .3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Obtain permits and post bonds as required by state and local AHJ's (Authorities Having Jurisdiction).

B. Inform AHJ's of job progress. Request presence of AHJ's, perform tests and document

results using Contractor's Material and Test Certificates.

1. Existing piping may be Ablanked-off@ when testing new piping. This contract does

not require the testing of work installed by others.

3 .4 DISINFECTION

A. Introduce dosage of 50-ppm chlorine in underground and overhead piping. During the

contact period open and close all system valves several times. At end of 24-hour retention period at least 10 ppm shall remain throughout the piping.

B. At end of retention period, flush system until residual chlorine is reduced to less than

1.0 ppm.

3 .5 CLEANING

A. Remove oil, scale, debris, and foreign substances from interior and exterior of devices, equipment, and materials prior to installation.

B. Upon job completion, remove tools, surplus materials and equipment. Leave all areas

broom clean.

3 .6 ACCEPTANCE

A. Acceptance of installation is subject to final inspection and approval by: 1. Architect or his designated representative. 2. Local Building Department and Fire Marshal. 3. Utah State Fire Marshal’s Office.



DIVISION 22 PLUMBING

220100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 220500 BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220523 VALVES 220548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT 220700 HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES


GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 220100 - 1

SECTION 220100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Division.

1.2 SCOPE

A. Includes -

1. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the completion of the mechanical and plumbing scope of work.

2. Furnish and install all motors specified in this Division and be responsible for the proper operation of electrical powered equipment furnished by this Division.

3. Furnish exact location of electrical connections and information on motor controls to Division 26.

4. Mechanical Contractor shall obtain the services of independent Test and Balance Agency.

5. Placing the air conditioning, heating, ventilating, and exhaust systems into full operation and continuing their operation during each working day of testing and balancing.

6. Making changes in pulleys, belts, and dampers, or adding dampers, as required for the correct balance as recommended by Balancing Contractor at no additional cost to Owner.

7. Air balance, final adjustment and test run. 8. The satisfactory performance of the completed systems is a requirement of this

specification.

B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere

1. Conduit, line voltage wiring, outlets, and disconnect switches specified in Division 26.

2. Magnetic starters and thermal protective devices (heaters) not a factory mounted integral part of packaged equipment are specified in Division 26.

1.3 SITE OBSERVATION

A. The Contractor shall examine the site and understand the conditions which may affect the performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work.

B. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine existing site conditions.



1.4 DRAWINGS

A. Mechanical drawings show general arrangement of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc; however, locations are to be regarded as shown diagrammatically only. Follow as closely as actual building construction and work of other trades will permit.

B. Because of the small scale of mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets, fittings, and accessories which may be required. Investigate existing structural and finished conditions affecting this work and arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, valves, and accessories required to meet conditions.

If changes in location of piping, equipment, ducts, etc. are required due to lack of coordination of work under this division, such changes shall be made without charge. Contractor shall review drawings with local and state agencies having jurisdiction and any changes required by them shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer prior to bidding or commencement of work. It is understood that while Drawings are to be followed as closely as circumstances permit, this Division will be held responsible for the installation of systems according to the true intent and meaning of the Contract Documents. Anything not clear or in conflict will be explained by making application to the Engineer in writing. Should conditions arise where certain changes would be advisable, secure Owner's and Engineer approval for these changes before proceeding with work.

1.5 COORDINATION OF WORK:

A. Coordinate work of various trades in installing interrelated work. Before installation of mechanical items, make proper provision to avoid interferences in a manner approved by Engineer. Changes required in work specified in Division 22 and 23 caused by neglect to secure approval shall be made at no cost to Owner.

B. Arrange piping, ductwork, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, unions, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels. Contractor shall provide all necessary access doors and/or panels to provide complete access to all mechanical equipment, dampers, or accessories. Doors for dampers, etc. shall be minimum 12" x 12" and doors for mechanical equipment shall be minimum 24" x 24".

C. Furnish and install inserts and supports required by Division 22 and 23 unless otherwise noted. Furnish sleeves, inserts, supports, and equipment that are an integral part of other Divisions involved in sufficient time to be built into the construction as the Work proceeds. Locate these items and see that they are properly installed. Expense resulting from improper location or installation of items above shall be borne by Contractor.

D. Be responsible for required digging, cutting, and patching incident to work of this Division and make required repairs afterwards to satisfaction of Owner and Architect. Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or trusses.



1. Patch and repair walls, floors and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown. Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.

2. This Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Divisions because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it.

3. Provide the necessary cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, etc. to permit installation of work of this Division.

E. Adjust locations of piping, ductwork, equipment, etc, to accommodate work from interferences anticipated and encountered. Determine exact route and location of each pipe and cut prior to fabrication.

1. Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction of piping, ductwork, and electrical raceways as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings.

F. Slots and openings through floors, walls and roofs shall be provided by this Division.

G. This Contractor shall schedule his work, store his equipment and materials, and work in harmony with other Contractors so as to not delay or jeopardize the construction.

H. This Division shall coordinate with electrical contractor to ensure that all required components of control work are included and fully understood. Any discrepancies shall be called to the attention of the Engineer before completion of bids. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner as a result of lack of such coordination.

1.6 EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS:

A. Requests for substitution shall be received in writing a minimum of seven days prior to bidding. Prior acceptance shall be by Manufacturer's name only. Items not listed in this specification or subsequent addendums shall not be considered. No oral approvals will be acceptable. Manufacturers listed in this specification are acceptable only for items listed. All other items manufacturer wishes to bid must be prior approved. All equipment shall be subject to final review in accordance with "Project Submittals".

B. Product Approvals -

1. If approval is received to use other than specified items, responsibility for specified capacities and insuring that items to be furnished will fit space available lies with this Division.

2. In the event other than specified equipment is used and will not fit job site conditions, this Division assumes responsibility for replacement with items named in Specification.

C. Use domestic made pipe, pipe fittings, and motors on Project.



D. Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner.

E. Insure that items to be furnished fit spaces available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. Do not scale off drawings.

F. All materials shall be of the best commercial quality obtainable, consistent with specified materials and for the purpose or function intended. Materials shall be new unless specifically excepted.

G. Equipment catalog or model numbers shown define the basic equipment types and quality standard only. Catalog numbers shall not be considered as all inclusive and shall be verified to include all devices, controls, operators, and appurtenances necessary for the satisfactory and complete operation of the equipment.

H. Follow manufacturer's directions in delivery, storage, protection, and installation of equipment and materials.

1. Promptly notify Engineer in writing of conflicts between requirements of Contract Documents and Manufacturer's directions and obtain Engineer’s written instructions before proceeding with work. Contractor shall bear all expenses arising from correcting deficiencies of work that does not comply with Manufacturer's directions or such written instructions.

I. Deliver equipment and material to site and tightly cover and protect against dirt, water, and chemical or mechanical injury but have readily accessible for inspection. Store items subject to moisture damage (such as controls) in a dry, heated space.

1.7 PROJECT SUBMITTALS:

A. Furnish complete catalog data for manufactured items of equipment to be used in the Work to for review within 15 days after award of Contract.

B. Submittal shall include, but not be limited to the following:

1. equipment scheduled 2. balancing contractor 3. insulation 4. grilles, and diffusers 5. automatic temperature controls 6. certificates of guarantee 7. valves 8. plumbing fixtures, accessories, and specialties 9. any item for which more than one manufacturer is mentioned

C. Submit a minimum of five copies of data in binders and index in same order and name as they appear in Specification. - Optional: Provide electronic submittals. Electronic



submittals shall be in .pdf format, and shall be compiled into a single file, with bookmarks for each piece of equipment.

1. State sizes, capacities, brand names, motor HP, electrical requirements,

accessories, materials, gauges, dimensions, and other pertinent information. 2. List on catalog covers page numbers of submitted items. 3. Underline or highlight applicable data.

D. If material or equipment is not as specified or submittal is not complete, it will be rejected.

E. Catalog data or shop drawings for equipment which are noted as approved shall not supersede Contract Documents.

F. Review comments shall not relieve this Division from responsibility for deviations from Contract Documents unless attention has been called to such deviations in writing at time of submission, nor shall they relieve this Division from responsibility for errors in items submitted.

G. Check work described by catalog data with Contract Documents for deviations and errors.

H. All items other than first named specified equipment shall show and state all exceptions and deviations taken and shall include design calculations and drawing layouts.

I. The Contractor shall review the submittals prior to submission to make sure that the submittals are complete in all details. No submittal will be reviewed which does not bear the contractor's notation that such checking has been made.

J. No partial submittals will be considered unless approved by the Engineer.

K. Manufacturers' names shall be mentioned as acceptable prior to bidding.

L. Contractor shall verify equipment dimensions to fit the spaces provided with sufficient clearance for servicing the equipment.

M. Contractor shall review equipment submittals for compliance with schedules, specifications, and drawing plans and details. Equipment submittal shall show the proper arrangements to suit installation and maintenance such as motor location, access doors, filter removal, piping connections, etc.

N. Equipment submittal sheets shall be clearly marked indicating equipment symbol and exact selection of proposed equipment. Submittals shall clearly indicate name of manufacturer of each item.

O. For unacceptable items, the right shall be reserved to require the first named specified items.



P. Where submittals are sent with any of the above listed information missing or are incomplete they will be returned to the contractor unchecked to be completed and resubmitted. No additional time or money shall be allowed for failure to provide complete submittals on the first review.

Q. If an item requiring submittal review is ordered, purchased, shipped, or installed prior to the submittal review the item shall be removed from the job site and replaced with an approved item at contractors expense.

1.8 CLEANING & FINISHING:

A. Contractor shall, at all times, keep the premises free from waste material and rubbish. Upon completion of this Section of the work, Contractor shall remove all surplus materials and rubbish; clean all spots resulting from the mechanical work from hardware, floors, glass, walls, etc.; do all required patching up and repair all work of other trades damaged by Contractor under this Section of the work, and leave the premises in a clean orderly condition. Clean heating and cooling coils, internally and externally, and replace all air filters prior to final mechanical inspection. Remove rust, plaster, dirt, grease and oil before painting, insulating, or exposing to view the equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. in completed structure. Refinish any damaged surfaces and leave in proper working order at final completion.

1.9 EQUIPMENT SERVICING:

A. Prior to starting mechanical equipment, all motors, bearings and moving parts shall be properly oiled, greased and lubricated as required. Full and adequate maintenance service shall be given and upon completion all equipment shall be cleaned and checked and placed in perfect condition for the Owner.

B. Amount and type of lubricant shall be per manufacturer's specification.

1.10 SUPERVISION:

A. The Contractor shall supervise and direct the work with his best skill and attention. He will be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. The Contractor will be responsible to see that the finished work complies accurately with the Contract Documents.

1.11 SAFETY REGULATIONS:

A. Contractor shall provide equipment, supervision, construction, procedures, and everything necessary to assure safety of life or property.



B. Refer also to General Condition and Special Conditions for protection clauses.

1.12 LEAK DAMAGE:

A. Contractor shall be responsible for damages to the work of other Contractors or to the building, or to its contents, people, etc., caused by leaks in any of the equipment or piping installed by him through equipment or material failures, leaking joints or disconnected pipes, fittings, or by overflows and shall make at his own expense all repairs to fixtures, building interior, contents, paint, rugs, furniture, ceiling tile, and equipment so damaged.

1.13 TOOLS AND STORAGE OF EQUIPMENT:

A. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary tools, staging and whatever may be necessary for the installation of this work and shall at all times protect this work and others, and the materials to be used therein from damage by the weather, accident and other causes, and shall repair and make good any damage thus occurring.

1.14 WORKMANSHIP:

A. Workmanship shall be the best quality of its kind for respective industries, trades, crafts and practices and shall be acceptable in every respect to the Owner and Engineer. Nothing contained herein shall relieve the Contractor from performing good work, perfect in all details of construction.

1.15 PAINTING BY CONTRACTOR:

A. Painting shall be by persons experienced in painting.

1.16 ELECTRICAL WORK:

A. Power wiring to all electrically driven apparatus shall be done under the electrical contract. See Electrical Specifications.

B. Unless specifically noted otherwise on documents, Electrical Contractor shall furnish and install all magnetic starters including properly sized heaters, and disconnect switches as indicated on drawings or required by code.



C. The Contractor shall verify the proper operation of equipment furnished by him. Costs for repair, replacing, re-wiring and retesting shall be borne by the Contractor without additional costs to the Owner.

D. Motors shall be as specified.

1.17 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF BUILDING EQUIPMENT:

A. The Contractor may use equipment such as electric motors, fans, filters, etc. when permanently installed as part of the project and with the written permission of the Owner. As each piece of equipment is used, maintenance procedures approved by the manufacturer shall be followed, a careful record shall be kept of the time used, maintenance procedure following and of any difficulty experienced with equipment. The Contractor's records on the equipment shall be submitted to the Owner upon acceptance of project. All fan belts and filter media shall be new at the beginning of the Mechanical System Operating Test Run and System Balancing. Wearing surfaces (such as bearings) shall be carefully inspected just prior to acceptance. Any excessive wear noted shall require replacement.

1.18 INSPECTION NOTICE:

A. The following is a basic list of guideline items so that the Architect, district building inspector/Owner’s representative can be at job site for these inspections as the building progresses. Mechanical Contractor shall inform these people one week in advance of test time.

1. Water tests on all sewer, waste, and rainwater piping prior to piping being concealed.

2. Pressure tests on all water service piping. 3. Pressure tests on hot, chilled, and condenser water supply and return piping. 4. All duct work prior to installation of finished ceilings, including ductwork pressure

testing. 5. The initial start-up of mechanical equipment, etc. 6. Any changes or problems occurring at job site. 7. Inspect all vent flashings on roof prior to roofing. 8. Periodic inspection at their discretion will be made to insure compliance to

Contract Documents and codes. Contractor shall provide ladders, access and other assistance as requested during inspections.

9. Control piping pressure tests. 10. Final inspection before giving approval for final payment.

1.19 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING:

A. Trench for the underground gas pipe line shall be excavated to the required depth. Rocks, trash, or other debris will not be allowed in trench or backfill and shall be removed before pipe is laid in place. After piping has been tested, inspected and



approved, piping shall be backfilled. All landscaping, concrete, etc., damaged by this Contractor shall be replaced by him to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative.

1.20 WARRANTY GUARANTEE:

A. The Contractor shall warrant all materials and equipment to be of quality consistent with specifications as represented by manufacturer's published data.

B. The Contractor shall guarantee that the installation and operation of the equipment shall be free from defects for a period of one year beginning at date of substantial completion and acceptance. The Contractor shall replace or repair any part of the installation that is found to be defective or incomplete within the guarantee period.

C. The one year guarantee on equipment and systems shall commence when equipment has been demonstrated to work and has been accepted. (Example: If an equipment item fails to perform and it takes 9 months after substantial completion to correct, then the guarantee shall commence after the item has been demonstrated to perform and has been accepted.)

D. Substantial completion and acceptance in no way relieves the Contractor from providing the systems and equipment as specified.

1.21 COMPLETION SCHEDULE:

A. Start-up and verification of basic equipment items shall be done prior to the date of substantial completion with sufficient time to allow balancing and adjusting to be performed.

B. At the time of the final inspection a date shall be agreed upon for completion of any remaining items. At least double the estimated cost of the work will be withheld from the Contractor's payment.

1.22 CODE REQUIREMENTS, FEES, AND PERMITS

A. The work shall be installed in accordance with the following applicable codes, ordinances and standards unless otherwise specified. The codes and standards shall include but not be limited to and be of the latest and current editions.

1. American Boiler and Affiliated Industries (AB and AI) 2. American Gas Association (AGA) 3. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA) 4. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 5. Air Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (ARI) 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE) - ASHRAE 90.1-2013



7. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) 8. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 9. American Standards Association (ASA) 10. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 11. American Welding Society (AWS) 12. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) 13. Heat Exchange Institute (HEI) 14. Hydraulic Institute (HI) 15. BR 16. National Electrical Code (NEC) 17. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 18. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning contractors National Association (SMACNA) 19. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 20. International Building Code (IBC) 2015 Ed 21. International Mechanical Code (IMC) 2012 Ed 22. International Plumbing Code (IPC) with Utah Amendments 2015 Ed 23. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) 2015 Ed 24. Utah State Safety Orders (OSHA/UOSH) 25. Utah Fire Rating Bureau 26. Utah Boiler and Pressure Vessel Law 27. Utah Air Conservation Regulations/Waste Disposal regulations. 28. ASHRAE Ventilation STD.62-2013

B. Should drawings conflict with any code, the code shall govern. If drawings and specifications establish a quality exceeding the code, the drawings and specifications shall govern. If conflicts do exist among the drawings, specifications and codes, the same shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer in writing prior to bidding, otherwise Contractor shall comply with applicable codes.

C. The latest edition of all codes shall be used.

D. Contractor shall give all notices, obtain all necessary permits, file necessary plans, prepare documents and obtain approvals, and pay all fees required for completion of the mechanical and plumbing work outlined in this Division of the specifications and shown on the Mechanical Drawings.

1.23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A. Upon completion of work and before final payment, Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the Owner, through the Engineer, installation, operation and maintenance manuals with instructions for all new materials and equipment used in the building. The contractor shall provide three (3) hard copies of the manuals, and three (3) CD’s with electronic copies of the manuals. Electronic information shall be .PDF format. The CD’s shall include the same information as the hard copies, and shall be organized in the same manner with electronic bookmarks for each section. CD case and the CD itself shall be labeled the same as the hard copies of the manuals.

B. Bind Operation and Maintenance Manual for Mechanical Systems in a hard-backed piano hinge loose-leaf binder with strong sturdy cover. The project name shall be on



the spine and the front of the binder. The front of the binder shall include the following information:

OPERATION

AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL for MECHANICAL SYSTEMS of

(Name of Project) (Location of Project)

(Date of Project Award) (Name of Architect)

C. Introduction

1. Title page including name of project, project number, date awarded and date of substantial completion.

2. Second page shall contain the names, phone numbers and addresses of Architect, Consulting Engineers, Mechanical Contractor, and General Contractor.

3. Third page shall include a Table of Contents for the entire manual.

D. First Section - Summary information including:

1. First page shall contain the contractor’s warranties. 2. Second page shall contain a list of names, addresses and phone numbers of

contractors and all sub-contractors and work to which each was assigned. 3. Final page or pages shall contain an equipment list. The list shall contain each

item of equipment or material for which a submittal was required giving ID or tag no as contained on the drawings make and model No. Serial No. Identification No. Location in building, function along with the name, address, and phone number of the supplier.

E. Second Section - Mechanical Equipment O&M data including:

1. Mechanical maintenance schedule, including a lubrication list when necessary. 2. Mechanical Equipment Operation and Maintenance Data including:

a. Equipment descriptions b. Detailed installation instruction, operating and maintenance instructions.

Instructions include in a step by step manner identifying start-up, operating, shutdown and emergency action sequence sufficiently clear so a person unfamiliar with the equipment could perform its operations.

c. Equipment drawings, performance curves, operating characteristics, etc. d. Name addresses and phone number of manufacturer, fabricator and local

vender clearly printed or stamped on cover.



e. Complete parts listing which include catalog number, serial number, contract number or other accurate provision for ordering replacement and spare parts.

f. Certified drawings, where applicable, showing assembly of parts and general dimensions.

3. Approved Mechanical submittals

F. Third Section - Plumbing Equipment O&M data including:

1. Section shall contain general product catalog cuts, as well as exploded view drawings with parts lists for all valves and other items with multiple parts.

2. Approved Plumbing submittals

G. Fourth Section - Controls O&M data including:

1. Sequence of Operation 2. Description of each operating system included location of switches, breakers,

thermostats, and control devices. Provide a single line diagram, showing set points, normal operating parameters for all loads, pressures, temperatures and flow check points; Describe all alarms and cautions for operation.

3. Provide schematic control diagrams, panel diagrams, wiring diagrams, etc. for each separate fan system, chilled water system, hot water system, exhaust air system, pumps, etc. Each control diagram shall show a schematic representation of mechanical equipment and location of start-stop switches, insertion thermostats, thermometers, pressure gauges, automatic valves, etc. The correct reading for each control instrument shall be marked on the diagram.

H. The Fifth Section shall contain a complete air and water test and balance report. The report shall contain the name, address and phone number of the agency. It shall also include:

1. Floor plans showing all air openings and thermometer locations clearly marked and cross referenced with data sheets. Format may be 8 1/2 x 11 or 11x14 if legible.

2. Data sheets showing amount of air and water at each setting. See sections 230593.

3. List of equipment with date of last calibration.

I. Drawings and reproducible masters of drawings as required in individual specification sections, are not to be bound in volumes but are to be delivered separate with the maintenance manuals.

J. See the following checklist for assistance in assembling manual:

Item #

Description Y, N, or NA



1. 3 ring heavy duty binder with Project name, number and date on cover and project name on spine.

2. O&M manual on CD (with label on CD matching label on manual). Electronic copy shall be a PDF file with bookmarks that match the tabs in the hard copy.

3. Title Page [including project name, number, address, date awarded, date of substantial completion]

4. Second Page Contact List [including architect (if applicable), mechanical engineer, mechanical contractor, and general contractor (if applicable)]

5. Table of Contents

6. Section 1 - Summary

A. Warranty

B. Mechanical’s Sub-contractor List

C. Vendor List

D. Equipment List

7. Section 2 – Mechanical Equipment

A. Maintenance Schedule (including lubrication list)

B. Mechanical Equipment O&M Data (for each piece of equipment submitted) per specifications

C. Approved mechanical submittals

8. Section 3 – Plumbing Equipment

A. Plumbing equipment O&M data

B. Approved plumbing submittals

9. Section 4 - Controls

A.

Sequence of Operation

B.

Controls diagrams

C.

Controls Equipment

10. Section 5 – Test and Balance Report

A. Complete Test and Balance Report per specifications

1.24 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Contractor shall instruct building maintenance personnel in the operation and maintenance of the installed mechanical systems utilizing the Operation and Maintenance Manual when so doing.

B. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows -

1. Mechanical - Two hours. 2. Plumbing - Two hours.



3. Temperature Control - Two hours.

C. Instruction periods shall occur before final site observation when systems are properly working and before final payment is made.

D. None of these instructional periods shall overlap each other.

E. An additional four hours of instruction will be provided by each contractor, after 60 days of system operation by owner to insure proper system operation and answer questions.

1.25 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Contractor shall keep an up-to-date set of mechanical and plumbing drawings in his custody showing all changes in red, clearly defined and neatly drafted by him. At the end of construction, he shall turn these drawings over to the Engineer. Record drawings must be completed and submitted prior to final site observation

.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 220100


BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 220500 - 1

SECTION 220500 – BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. 2. Dielectric fittings. 3. Mechanical sleeve seals. 4. Sleeves. 5. Escutcheons. 6. Mechanical demolition. 7. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.

B. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.

C. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.

D. Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.

E. Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations within unheated shelters.

F. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic. 2. CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic. 3. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Dielectric fittings. 2. Mechanical sleeve seals.

B. Welding certificates.


A. Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

1. Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping." 2. Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding

processes involved and that certification is current.

B. All materials, piping, etc. shall be new, and domestically made of the best commercial quality obtainable, consistent with specified materials and for the purpose or function intended unless specifically approved in writing prior to bid.


A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

B. Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations.

B. Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

C. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that are concealed behind finished surfaces.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 and 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining methods.

B. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.

2.2 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Refer to individual Division 22 and 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.

B. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system contents.

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless thickness or specific material is indicated.

a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.

b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.

2. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.

H. Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:

1. ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235. 2. CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493. 3. PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656. 4. PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.



2.3 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS

A. Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solder-joint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.

B. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.

C. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working pressure at 180 deg F.

1. Available Manufacturers:

a. Capitol Manufacturing Co. b. Central Plastics Company. c. Eclipse, Inc. d. Epco Sales, Inc. e. Hart Industries, International, Inc. f. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. g. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div. h. Prior Approved Equal.

2.4 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS

A. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.


a. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. b. Calpico, Inc. c. Metraflex Co. d. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. e. Linkseal. f. Prior Approved Equal.

2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion-resistant coating of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.



C. Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

2.6 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers opening.

B. One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.

2.7 GROUT

A. Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.

1. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

A. Disconnect, demolish, and remove mechanical systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

1. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

2. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

3. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

4. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

5. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.

6. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

7. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.



B. If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable, remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and quality.

C. Coordinate with controls contractor prior to removal of any control devices.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 and 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Drawings do not show every offset, or bend that may be required. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

C. Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

G. Install piping at indicated slopes.

H. Install piping free of sags and bends.

I. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

J. Install piping to allow application of insulation.

K. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

L. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors where indicated on drawings and where penetrating will be visible to public.

M. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions, and concrete floor and roof slabs.

1. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.

a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-



iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.

2. Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed. 3. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:

4. Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

N. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

O. Underground, Exterior-Wall Pipe Penetrations: Install cast-iron "wall pipes" for sleeves. Seal pipe penetrations using mechanical sleeve seals. Select sleeve size to allow for 1-inch annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installing mechanical sleeve seals.

1. Mechanical Sleeve Seal Installation: Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

P. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.

Q. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.

R. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in requirements.

3.3 PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 and 23 Sections specifying piping systems.

B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

D. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.



E. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.

F. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal threading is specified.

2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.

G. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.

H. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.

I. Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following:

1. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements.

2. ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes. 3. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. 4. PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC

socket fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.

5. PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855. 6. PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138

Appendix.

J. Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

2. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.

3. Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.

4. Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals.



3.5 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS

A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are not indicated.

B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.

D. Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.



VALVES 220523 - 1

SECTION 220523 – VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following general-duty valves:

1. Bronze ball valves. 2. Ferrous-alloy ball valves. 3. Ferrous-alloy butterfly valves. 4. Bronze check valves.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 22 and 23 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and charts. 2. Division 22 and 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for control

valves and actuators. 3. Division 22 and 23 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those

Sections only.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. The following are standard abbreviations for valves:

1. CWP: Cold working pressure. 2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber. 3. NRS: Nonrising stem. 4. OS&Y: Outside screw and yoke. 5. PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene plastic. 6. SWP: Steam working pressure. 7. TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials; valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement; dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and accessories.


VALVES 220523 - 2


A. ASME Compliance: ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.

1. Exceptions: Domestic hot- and cold-water piping valves unless referenced.

B. ASME Compliance for Ferrous Valves: ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for dimension and design criteria.

C. NSF Compliance: NSF 61 for valve materials for potable-water service.


A. Prepare valves for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends. 3. Set angle, gate, and globe valves closed to prevent rattling. 4. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 5. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 6. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Maintain valve end protection. 2. Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature.

If outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the manufacturers specified.

2.2 VALVES, GENERAL

A. Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.


VALVES 220523 - 3

B. Bronze valves shall be made with dezincification-resistant materials. Bronze valves made with copper alloy (brass) containing more than 15 percent zinc are not permitted.

C. Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Ferrous Valves: NPS 2-1/2 and larger with flanged ends, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system pressures and temperatures.

F. Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Valve Actuators: 1. Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller, except plug valves.

H. Valves in Insulated Piping: Valves shall have 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:

1. Ball Valves: Shall have extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or disturbing insulation, and memory stops that are fully adjustable after insulation is applied.

a. Manufactures: NIBCO Nib-seal handle extension or a comparable product by one of the following:

1) Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. 2) American. 3) Crane. 4) Grinnel. 5) Kitz. 6) Watts. 7) Prior approved equal.

2. Butterfly Valves: Shall have extended necks.

I. Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.

J. Valve Grooved Ends: AWWA C606.

K. Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.

1. Caution: Use solder with melting point below 840 deg F for angle, check, gate, and globe valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

L. Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.

M. Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.


VALVES 220523 - 4

2.3 BRONZE BALL VALVES

A. Bronze Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110 and have bronze body complying with ASTM B 584, except for Class 250 which shall comply with ASTM B 61, full-depth ASME B1.20.1 threaded or solder ends, and blowout-proof stems.

B. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim: Chrome-plated bronze ball and bronze stem and; reinforced TFE seats; threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem designs allowed) with adjustable stem packing, solder or threaded ends; and 150 psig SWP 600-psigCWP rating.

1. Manufacturers: NIBCO Model S-585-70 or T-585-70, or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. NIBCO Model S-585-70 or T-585-70 b. American Valve, Inc. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. NIBCO INC. i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

C. Two-Piece, Full-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Stainless-Steel Trim: Type 316 stainless-steel vented ball and stem, reinforced TFE seats, threaded body packnut design (no threaded stem designs allowed) with adjustable stem packing, soldered or threaded ends; 150 psig SWP and 600-psig CWP ratings.

1. Manufacturers: NIBCO Model S-585-70-66 or T-585-70-66, or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. Grinnell Corporation. g. Kitz Corporation of America. h. NIBCO INC. i. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

2.4 FERROUS-ALLOY BALL VALVES

A. Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-72, with ASTM A-216 Type WCB, carbon-steel body; ASTM A-351, Type CF8M vented stainless-steel ball; and ASTM A-276, Type 316 stainless-steel stem; fire rated according to API 607 (4th edition); and having flanged ends and blowout-proof stem.


VALVES 220523 - 5

B. Class 150, Full-Port, Ferrous-Alloy Ball Valves: Split-body construction, carbon-filled TFE seats; 285 psig CWP rating.

1. Manufacturers:

a. NIBCO Model F-515-CS-F-66-FS. b. American Valve, Inc. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div. d. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. Foster Valve Co. g. Hammond Valve. h. Jomar International, LTD. i. Kitz Corporation of America. j. Milwaukee Valve Company. k. Watts.

2.5 FERROUS-ALLOY BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves, General: MSS SP-67, for bubble-tight shutoff, extended-neck for insulation, disc and lining suitable for potable water, unless otherwise indicated, and with the following features:

1. Full lug, grooved and flanged valves shall be suitable for bi-directional dead end service at full rated pressure without the use or need of a downstream flange. Valves NPS 12 and smaller shall not have exposed stem to disc fasteners and no exterior mounted fasteners to hold the liner.

2. Valve sizes NPS 2 through NPS 6 shall have lever lock operator; valve sizes NPS 8 and larger shall have weatherproof gear operator.

B. Single-Flange, 150-psig CWP Rating, Aluminum-Bronze Disc, EPDM Seat, Ferrous-Alloy Butterfly Valves: Full-lug type with ductile-iron body, one- or two-piece Type 416 stainless-steel stem, bronze bushing, aluminum-bronze disc, and phenolic-backed EPDM seat (liner) attached to the body.

1. Manufacturers: NIBCO Model LD-1000-5, or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. Bray International, Inc. b. Cooper Cameron Corp.; Cooper Cameron Valves Div. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Center Line. d. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. e. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. f. Dover Corp.; Dover Resources Company; Norriseal Div. g. General Signal; DeZurik Unit. h. Grinnell Corporation. i. Hammond Valve. j. Kitz Corporation of America. k. Legend Valve & Fitting, Inc.


VALVES 220523 - 6

l. Metraflex Co. m. Milwaukee Valve Company. n. Mueller Steam Specialty. o. Process Development & Control. p. Red-White Valve Corp. q. Techno Corp. r. Tyco International, Ltd.; Tyco Valves & Controls. s. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.


B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operations.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:

1. Shutoff Service: Ball or butterfly valves. 2. Throttling Service: Angle, ball, butterfly, or globe valves. 3. Pump Discharge: Spring-loaded, lift-disc or dual-plate check valves; lever and

weight swing check valves; or lever and spring swing check valves.

B. If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher SWP class or CWP ratings may be substituted.

C. Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:


VALVES 220523 - 7

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two -piece, full port, stainless-steel trim, bronze.

2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, full -port, ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 to NPS 12 Single-flange, full lug, 200-psig CWP rating,

bronze disc, EPDM liner, ferrous alloy. 4. Lift Check Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Class 125 , bronze with TFE disc.

D. Heating Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:

1. Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two -piece, full port, stainless-steel trim, copper alloy.

2. Ball Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Class 150, full -port, ferrous alloy. 3. Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 to NPS 12 Single-flange, full lug, 200-psig CWP rating,

bronze disc, EPDM liner, ferrous alloy. 4. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 2 to NPS 8: 300-psig CWP

rating, EPDM- encapsulated ductile-iron disc. 5. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Butterfly Valves, NPS 10 to NPS 12: 200-psig CWP

rating, EPDM- encapsulated ductile-iron disc. 6. Dual-Plate Check Valves, NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Wafer, iron.

E. Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:

1. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide valves with threaded ends for heating hot water.

2. For Copper Tubing, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged soldered or threaded ends. 3. For Copper Tubing, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends. 4. For Steel Piping, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends. 5. For Steel Piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Flanged ends. 6. For Steel Piping, NPS 5 and Larger: Flanged ends.

3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

C. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

D. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe. Butterfly valves may be installed with stem horizontal to allow support for the disc and the cleaning action of the disc.

E. Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.

F. Install check valves for proper direction of flow and as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: In horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Dual-Plate Check Valves: In horizontal or vertical position, between flanges.


VALVES 220523 - 8

3. Lift Check Valves: With stem upright and plumb.

G. Butterfly valves shall be installed with stems horizontal.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Refer to Division 22 and 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for basic piping joint construction.

B. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with keyed coupling housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-free-alloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.



VIBRATION & SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING & EQUIPMENT 220548 - 1

SECTION 220548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Isolation pads. 2. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 3. Seismic snubbers. 4. Restraining braces and cables.

1.3 SCOPE

A. Provide letter of design intent.

B. Provide full set of seismic submittals.

C. Provide final letter of compliance completion.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.


A. Wind-Restraint Loading:

1. Basic Wind Speed: Per owner’s design standards. 2. Building Classification Category: As defined in the IBC. 3. Minimum 10 lb/sq. ft. multiplied by the maximum area of the HVAC component

projected on a vertical plane that is normal to the wind direction, and 45 degrees either side of normal.

B. Seismic-Restraint Loading:

1. Site Class: As defined in the IBC.



2. Assigned Seismic Use Group or Building Category: As defined in the IBC.

a. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration isolation device.

2. Illustrate and indicate style, material, strength, fastening provision, and finish for each type and size of seismic-restraint component used.

a. Tabulate types and sizes of seismic restraints, complete with report numbers and rated strength in tension and shear as evaluated by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Annotate to indicate application of each product submitted and compliance with requirements.

3. Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal, vertical, and combined loads.

B. Letter of Design intent, stating company, design criteria, compliance with specifications and only exceptions that will apply. Letter shall be stamped and signed by a licensed and qualified professional engineer in this jurisdiction.

C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For vibration isolation and seismic-restraint details indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

1. Design Calculations: Calculate static and dynamic loading due to equipment weight and operation, seismic and wind forces required to select vibration isolators, seismic and wind restraints, and for designing vibration isolation bases.

a. Coordinate design calculations with wind load calculations required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 22 and 23 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

2. Riser Supports: Include riser diagrams and calculations showing anticipated expansion and contraction at each support point, initial and final loads on building structure, spring deflection changes, and seismic loads. Include certification that riser system has been examined for excessive stress and that none will exist.

3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail overall dimensions, including anchorages and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads, power transmission, component misalignment, and cantilever loads.

4. Seismic- and Wind-Restraint Details:



a. Design Analysis: To support selection and arrangement of seismic and wind restraints. Include calculations of combined tensile and shear loads.

b. Details: Indicate fabrication and arrangement. Detail attachments of restraints to the restrained items and to the structure. Show attachment locations, methods, and spacing’s. Identify components, list their strengths, and indicate directions and values of forces transmitted to the structure during seismic events. Indicate association with vibration isolation devices.

c. Coordinate seismic-restraint and vibration isolation details with wind-restraint details required for equipment mounted outdoors. Comply with requirements in other Division 22 and 23 Sections for equipment mounted outdoors.

d. Preapproval and Evaluation Documentation: By an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum ratings of restraint items and the basis for approval (tests or calculations).

D. Coordination Drawings: Show coordination of seismic bracing for HVAC piping and equipment with other systems and equipment in the vicinity, including other supports and seismic restraints.

E. Welding certificates.

F. Qualification Data: For professional engineer and testing agency.

G. Field quality-control test reports.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated, that is a nationally recognized testing laboratory (NRTL) as defined by OSHA in 29 CFR 1910.7, and that is acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Comply with seismic-restraint requirements in the IBC unless requirements in this Section are more stringent.

C. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

D. Seismic-restraint devices shall have horizontal and vertical load testing and analysis and shall bear anchorage preapproval OPA number from OSHPD, preapproval by ICC-ES, or preapproval by another agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, showing maximum seismic-restraint ratings. Ratings based on independent testing are preferred to ratings based on calculations. If preapproved ratings are not available, submittals based on independent testing are preferred. Calculations (including combining shear and tensile loads) to support seismic-restraint designs must be signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer.



E. Upon project completion provide a final letter of acceptance for seismic restraints system and installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS


1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Vibro-acoustics. 3. ISAT 4. Mason Industries. 5. Gripple. 6. Prior approved equal.

B. Pads: Arranged in single or multiple layers of sufficient stiffness for uniform loading over pad area, molded with a nonslip pattern and galvanized-steel baseplates, and factory cut to sizes that match requirements of supported equipment.

1. Resilient Material: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene or rubber.

C. Restrained Spring Isolators: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint.

1. Housing: Steel with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch- thick, neoprene or rubber isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation.

2. Restraint: Seismic or limit stop as required for equipment and authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Outside Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load.

4. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 5. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 6. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without

deformation or failure.

2.2 SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICES


1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. ISAT 4. Kinetics Noise Control.



5. Mason Industries. 6. Vibro-acoustics. 7. Gripple. 8. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 9. Prior approved equal.

B. General Requirements for Restraint Components: Rated strengths, features, and applications shall be as defined in reports by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Structural Safety Factor: Allowable strength in tension, shear, and pullout force of components shall be at least four times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be subjected.

C. Snubbers: Factory fabricated using welded structural-steel shapes and plates, anchor bolts, and replaceable resilient isolation washers and bushings.

1. Anchor bolts for attaching to concrete shall be seismic-rated, drill-in, and stud-wedge or female-wedge type.

2. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: Oil- and water-resistant neoprene. 3. Maximum 1/4-inch air gap, and minimum 1/4-inch- thick resilient cushion.

D. Channel Support System: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated support assembly made of slotted steel channels with accessories for attachment to braced component at one end and to building structure at the other end and other matching components and with corrosion-resistant coating; and rated in tension, compression, and torsion forces.

E. Restraint Cables: -steel cables with end connections made of steel assemblies with thimbles, brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for restraining cable service; and with a minimum of two clamping bolts for cable engagement.

F. Hanger Rod Stiffener: Steel tube or steel slotted-support-system sleeve with internally bolted connections or Reinforcing steel angle clamped to hanger rod.

G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchor Bolts: Neoprene bushings designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of anchor bolts and studs.

H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene elements and steel sleeves designed for rigid equipment mountings, and matched to type and size of attachment devices used.

I. Resilient Isolation Washers and Bushings: One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face.

J. Mechanical Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and stud-wedge or female-wedge type in zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488. Minimum length of eight times diameter.

K. Adhesive Anchor Bolts: Drilled-in and capsule anchor system containing polyvinyl or urethane methacrylate-based resin and accelerator, or injected polymer or hybrid



mortar adhesive. Provide anchor bolts and hardware with zinc-coated steel for interior applications and stainless steel for exterior applications. Select anchor bolts with strength required for anchor and as tested according to ASTM E 488.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested equipment before shipping.

1. Powder coating on springs and housings. 2. All hardware shall be galvanized. Hot-dip galvanize metal components for

exterior use. 3. Baked enamel or powder coat for metal components on isolators for interior use. 4. Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control

devices to indicate capacity range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic- and wind-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.


3.2 APPLICATIONS

A. Multiple Pipe Supports: Secure pipes to trapeze member with clamps approved for application by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Install hanger rod stiffeners where indicated or scheduled on Drawings to receive them and where required to prevent buckling of hanger rods due to seismic forces.

C. Strength of Support and Seismic-Restraint Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static and seismic loads within specified loading limits.

3.3 VIBRATION-CONTROL AND SEISMIC-RESTRAINT DEVICE INSTALLATION

A. Equipment Restraints:



1. Install seismic snubbers on HVAC equipment mounted on vibration isolators. Locate snubbers as close as possible to vibration isolators and bolt to equipment base and supporting structure.

2. Install resilient bolt isolation washers on equipment anchor bolts where clearance between anchor and adjacent surface exceeds 0.125 inch.

3. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

B. Piping Restraints:

1. Comply with requirements in MSS SP-127. 2. Space lateral supports a maximum of 40 feet o.c., and longitudinal supports a

maximum of 80 feet o.c. 3. Brace a change of direction longer than 12 feet.

C. Install cables so they do not bend across edges of adjacent equipment or building structure.

D. Install seismic-restraint devices using methods approved by an evaluation service member of ICC-ES or an agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction providing required submittals for component.

E. Install bushing assemblies for anchor bolts for floor-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media between anchor bolt and mounting hole in concrete base.

F. Install bushing assemblies for mounting bolts for wall-mounted equipment, arranged to provide resilient media where equipment or equipment-mounting channels are attached to wall.

G. Attachment to Structure: If specific attachment is not indicated, anchor bracing to structure at flanges of beams, at upper truss chords of bar joists, or at concrete members.

H. Drilled-in Anchors:

1. Identify position of reinforcing steel and other embedded items prior to drilling holes for anchors. Do not damage existing reinforcing or embedded items during coring or drilling. Notify the structural engineer if reinforcing steel or other embedded items are encountered during drilling. Locate and avoid prestressed tendons, electrical and telecommunications conduit, and gas lines.

2. Do not drill holes in concrete or masonry until concrete, mortar, or grout has achieved full design strength.

3. Wedge Anchors: Protect threads from damage during anchor installation. Heavy-duty sleeve anchors shall be installed with sleeve fully engaged in the structural element to which anchor is to be fastened.

4. Adhesive Anchors: Clean holes to remove loose material and drilling dust prior to installation of adhesive. Place adhesive in holes proceeding from the bottom of the hole and progressing toward the surface in such a manner as to avoid introduction of air pockets in the adhesive.

5. Set anchors to manufacturer's recommended torque, using a torque wrench.



6. Install zinc-coated steel anchors for interior and stainless-steel anchors for exterior applications.

3.4 ACCOMMODATION OF DIFFERENTIAL SEISMIC MOTION

A. Install flexible connections in piping where they cross seismic joints, where adjacent sections or branches are supported by different structural elements, and where the connections terminate with connection to equipment that is anchored to a different structural element from the one supporting the connections as they approach equipment. Comply with requirements in Division 23 Section "Hydronic Piping" for piping flexible connections.


A. Testing Agency: Leave a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Provide evidence of recent calibration of test equipment by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Schedule test with Owner, through Architect, before connecting anchorage device to restrained component (unless postconnection testing has been approved), and with at least seven days' advance notice.

3. Obtain Architect's approval before transmitting test loads to structure. Provide temporary load-spreading members.

4. Test at least four of each type and size of installed anchors and fasteners selected by Architect.

5. Test to 90 percent of rated proof load of device. 6. Measure isolator restraint clearance. 7. Measure isolator deflection. 8. Verify snubber minimum clearances. 9. If a device fails test, modify all installations of same type and retest until

satisfactory results are achieved.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust isolators after piping system is at operating weight.

B. Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they are out of contact during normal operation.

C. Adjust air-spring leveling mechanism.



D. Adjust active height of spring isolators.

E. Adjust restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode of operation.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air-mounting systems. Refer to Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training."



IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 220553 - 1

SECTION 220553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following mechanical identification materials and their installation:

1. Equipment nameplates. 2. Equipment signs. 3. Access panel and door markers. 4. Pipe markers. 5. Warning tags.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For color, letter style, and graphic representation required for each identification material and device.

C. Valve numbering scheme.

D. Valve Schedules: For each piping system. Furnish extra copies (in addition to mounted copies) to include in maintenance manuals.


A. ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors, and viewing angles of identification devices for piping.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied.

B. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.



C. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Equipment Nameplates: Metal, with data engraved or stamped, for permanent attachment on equipment.

1. Data:

a. Manufacturer, product name, model number, and serial number. b. Capacity, operating and power characteristics, and essential data. c. Labels of tested compliances.

2. Location: Accessible and visible. 3. Fasteners: As required to mount on equipment.

B. Equipment Signs: ASTM D 709, Type I, cellulose, paper-base, phenolic-resin-laminate engraving stock; Grade ES-2, black surface, black phenolic core, with white melamine subcore, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate in sizes required for message. Provide holes for mechanical fastening.

1. Data: Instructions for operation of equipment and for safety procedures. 2. Engraving: Manufacturer's standard letter style, 1/4” or larger with terms to

match equipment identification. 3. Thickness: 1/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent

adhesive.

C. Access Panel and Door Markers: 1/16” thick, engraved laminated plastic, with abbreviated terms and numbers corresponding to identification. Provide 1/8” center hole for attachment.

1. Fasteners: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or contact-type, permanent adhesive.

2.2 PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service, and showing direction of flow.


a. Bradley. b. Kolbi. c. Prior approved.

2. Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.



3. Lettering: Use piping system terms indicated and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

4. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.

5. Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.

6. Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.

B. Self-Adhesive Pipe Markers: Plastic with pressure-sensitive, permanent-type, self-adhesive back.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATIONS, GENERAL

A. Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 22 and 23 Sections. If more than single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's option.

3.2 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Install and permanently fasten equipment nameplates on each major item of mechanical equipment that does not have nameplate or has nameplate that is damaged or located where not easily visible. Locate nameplates where accessible and visible. Include nameplates for the following general categories of equipment:

1. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, etc. 2. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. 3. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units, and

similar equipment. 4. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. 5. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units.

B. Install equipment signs with screws or permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. Locate signs where accessible and visible.

1. Identify mechanical equipment with black equipment markers with white lettering. 2. Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than

24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering.

3. Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify units.

4. Include signs for the following general categories of equipment:



a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units such as gas outlets.

b. Fuel-burning units, including boilers, furnaces, heaters, etc. c. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers, and similar motor-driven units. d. Heat exchangers, coils, evaporators, cooling towers, heat recovery units,

and similar equipment. e. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers, and mixing boxes. f. Packaged HVAC central-station and zone-type units. g. Tanks and pressure vessels. h. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water-treatment systems, and similar

equipment.

C. Install access panel markers with screws on equipment access panels.

3.3 PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow indication arrows showing direction of flow.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior nonconcealed locations as follows:

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal

units. Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch. 3. Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of

concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25

feet in areas of congested piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced

markers.

C. Locate markers near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Relocate mechanical identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean faces of mechanical identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.


HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION 220700 - 1

SECTION 220700 - HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Insulation Materials:

a. Mineral fiber.

2. Insulating cements. 3. Adhesives. 4. Lagging adhesives. 5. Factory-applied jackets. 6. Field-applied jackets. 7. Tapes. 8. Securements. 9. Corner angles.


1. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied, if any).

B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed.

D. Field quality-control reports.




A. Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Insulation and related materials shall have fire-test-response characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less.

2. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.


A. Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."

B. Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application, duct Installer for duct insulation application, and equipment Installer for equipment insulation application. Before preparing piping and ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.

1.7 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results.

B. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in Part 3 schedule articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.

B. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.

C. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871.

D. Insulation materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable according to ASTM C 795.

E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process.

F. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type I. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.

1. Duct insulation shall have a minimum R value = 5 for installation in an unconditioned space, and a minimum R value = 8 for installation outdoors. Provide a weather protective sheet metal jacket for outdoor installation.


a. CertainTeed Corp.; Duct Wrap. b. Johns Manville; Microlite. c. Knauf Insulation; Duct Wrap. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley Wrap. e. Owens Corning; All-Service Duct Wrap. f. Prior approved equal.

G. Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:


a. Fibrex Insulations Inc.; Coreplus 1200. b. Johns Manville; Micro-Lok. c. Knauf Insulation; 1000 Pipe Insulation. d. Manson Insulation Inc.; Alley-K. e. Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation. f. Prior approved equal.

2. Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A.



2.2 INSULATING CEMENTS

A. Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.


a. Insulco, Division of MFS, Inc.; Triple I. b. P. K. Insulation Mfg. Co., Inc.; Super-Stik. c. Prior approved equal.

2.3 ADHESIVES

A. Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.


a. Childers Products, Division of ITW; CP-127. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 85-60/ 85-70. c. Marathon Industries, Inc.; 225. d. Mon-Eco Industries, Inc.; 22-25. e. Prior approved equal.

2.4 LAGGING ADHESIVES

A. Description: Comply with MIL-A-3316C Class I, Grade A and shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.


a. Childers Products, Division of H.B. Fuller; CR 50 AHV2. b. Foster Products Corporation, H. B. Fuller Company; 30-36. c. Vimasco Corporation; 713 and 714. d. Prior approved equal.

2. Service Temperature Range: Minus 50 to plus 180 deg F. 3. Color: White.

2.5 FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS

A. Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:

1. ASJ: White, kraft-paper, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with aluminum-foil backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.

2. ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.



3. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.

2.6 TAPES

A. ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive, complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0836. b. Compac Corp.; 104 and 105. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 428 AWF ASJ. d. Venture Tape; 1540 CW Plus, 1542 CW Plus, and 1542 CW Plus/SQ. e. Prior approved equal.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 11.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.

B. FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive; complying with ASTM C 1136.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0827. b. Compac Corp.; 110 and 111. c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 491 AWF FSK. d. Venture Tape; 1525 CW, 1528 CW, and 1528 CW/SQ. e. Prior approved equal.

2. Width: 3 inches. 3. Thickness: 6.5 mils. 4. Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 2 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width. 7. FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape. 8. Adhesion: 64 ounces force/inch in width. 9. Elongation: 500 percent. 10. Tensile Strength: 18 lbf/inch in width.

C. Aluminum-Foil Tape: Vapor-retarder tape with acrylic adhesive.


a. Avery Dennison Corporation, Specialty Tapes Division; Fasson 0800. b. Compac Corp.; 120.



c. Ideal Tape Co., Inc., an American Biltrite Company; 488 AWF. d. Venture Tape; 3520 CW. e. Prior approved equal.

2. Width: 2 inches. 3. Thickness: 3.7 mils. 4. Adhesion: 100 ounces force/inch in width. 5. Elongation: 5 percent. 6. Tensile Strength: 34 lbf/inch in width.

2.7 SECUREMENTS

A. Bands:


a. Childers Products; Bands. b. PABCO Metals Corporation; Bands. c. RPR Products, Inc.; Bands. d. Prior approved equal.

2. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide.

3. Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch thick, 1/2 inch wide.

4. Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.

2.8 CORNER ANGLES

A. PVC Corner Angles: 30 mils thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, PVC according to ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C. White or color-coded to match adjacent surface.

B. Aluminum Corner Angles: 0.040 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, aluminum according to ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105 or 5005; Temper H-14.

C. Stainless-Steel Corner Angles: 0.024 inch thick, minimum 1 by 1 inch, stainless steel according to ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or 316.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.

1. Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.



2. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry. 3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be insulated.

C. Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water.

3.3 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of equipment, ducts and fittings, and piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.

B. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of equipment, duct system, and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.

C. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state.

D. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.

E. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.

F. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.

G. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.

H. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

I. Install insulation with least number of joints practical.

J. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.

1. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. 2. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on

anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.



3. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.

4. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.

K. Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses.

L. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:

1. Draw jacket tight and smooth. 2. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- wide strips, of same material as

insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.

3. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.

a. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.

4. Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to maintain vapor seal.

5. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct and pipe flanges and fittings.

M. Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness.

N. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement.

O. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints.

P. For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:

1. Vibration-control devices. 2. Testing agency labels and stamps. 3. Nameplates and data plates. 4. Manholes. 5. Handholes. 6. Cleanouts.



3.4 GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.

B. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:

1. Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive.

4. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement.

5. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier.

6. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.

7. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below ambient services and a breather mastic for above ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.

8. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape.

9. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "UNION." Match size and color of pipe labels.

C. Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes, vessels, and equipment. Shape insulation at these connections by



tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.

D. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. Installation shall conform to the following:

1. Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation.

2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainless-steel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket.

3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body.

4. When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish.

5. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.

3.5 MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:

1. Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten bands without deforming insulation materials.

2. Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.

3. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above ambient surfaces, secure laps with outward clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.

4. For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below ambient surfaces, do not staple longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.

B. Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:

1. Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange. 2. Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus

twice the thickness of pipe insulation. 3. Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer

circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.



4. Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.

C. Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire or bands.

D. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:

1. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when available.

2. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to valve body.

3. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing insulation.

4. Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.

E. Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins.

1. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.

2. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions.

3. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows:

a. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches o.c.

b. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.

c. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.

d. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. e. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. f. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend

parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.

4. For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches from 1 edge and 1 end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory-



or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.

a. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vapor-barrier seal.

b. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to 2 times the insulation thickness but not less than 3 inches.

5. Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.

6. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.

7. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.

3.6 FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION

A. Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.

1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.


A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

2. Inspect field-insulated equipment, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each type of equipment defined in the "Equipment Insulation Schedule" Article. For large equipment, remove only a portion adequate to determine compliance.

3. Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers, two locations of welded strainers, three locations



of threaded valves, and three locations of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule, General" Article.

B. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements.

3.8 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:

1. Indoor, concealed supply and outdoor air. 2. Indoor, exposed supply and outdoor air. 3. Indoor, concealed return, Air. 4. Indoor, exposed return, Air. 5. Indoor, concealed, Type I, commercial, kitchen hood exhaust. 6. Indoor, concealed exhaust. 7. Indoor, exposed exhaust.

B. Items Not Insulated:

1. Fibrous-glass ducts. 2. Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and

ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. 3. Factory-insulated flexible ducts. 4. Factory-insulated plenums and casings. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Vibration-control devices. 7. Factory-insulated access panels and doors.

3.9 INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Concealed, round and flat-oval duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

B. Concealed, low pressure, round rectangular, and flat-oval exhaust-air duct insulation shall be the following:

1. Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 1.5-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.

C. Rectangular, low pressure, supply-air duct insulation shall be lined per Section “Metal Ducts”.

D. Rectangular, return-air duct insulation shall be lined per Section “Metal Ducts”.

E. Concealed, Type I, Commercial, Kitchen Hood Exhaust Duct and Plenum Insulation: Fire-rated blanket or board; thickness as required to achieve 2-hour fire rating.

F. Exposed or medium pressure, round and flat-oval, supply-air, and return air duct insulation shall be a perforated linear. See Section “Metal Ducts”.



3.10 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for each piping system and pipe size range. If more than one material is listed for a piping system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

B. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:

1. Drainage piping located in crawl spaces. 2. Underground piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury. 4. Vertical roof drain piping.

C. Piping System insulation:

1. Hydronic Piping - Mineral Fiber, per chart. 2. Domestic Cold Water Piping -Mineral Fiber, ½” 3. Domestic Hot Water Piping -Mineral Fiber, per chart 4. Horizontal Roof Drain Piping - Mineral Fiber, 1/2”. 5. Refrigerant Piping - Flexible elastomeric, 1”.

3.11 INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness from ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010, with modifications per 2012 IECC

Fluid Operating Temperature

Range and usage (F°)

Insulation Conductivity Nominal Pipe or Tube Size (inches)

Conductivity Btu-in./(h-ft

2-F°)

Mean Rating

Temp. F° <1 1 to <1-1/2 1-1/2 to <4 4 to <8 ≥8

Heating Systems (Steam, Steam Condensate, and Hot Water)

>350 0.32-0.34 250 4.5 5.0 5.0 5.0 5.0

251-350 0.29-0.32 200 3.0 4.0 4.5 4.5 4.5

201-250 0.27-0.30 150 2.5 2.5 2.5 3.0 3.0

141-200 0.25-0.29 125 1.5 1.5 2.0 2.0 2.0

105-140 0.21-0.28 100 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 1.5

Cooling Systems (Chilled Water, Brine, and Refrigerant)

40-60 0.21-0.27 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0

<40 0.20-0.26 50 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5



3.12 INDOOR, FIELD-APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Piping, Exposed:

1. PVC: 20 mils thick.

D. Minimum Pipe Insulation Thickness from ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA Standard 90.1-2010, with modifications per 2012 IECC

3.13 DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE

A. Minimum Duct Insulation R-Value, Cooling and Heating Supply Ducts and Return Ducts ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1-2010.

Duct Location

Climate Zone Exterior Ventilated

Attic

Unvented Attic Above

Insulated Ceiling

Unvented Attic with

Roof Insulation

Unconditioned Space

Indirectly Conditioned

Space Buried

Heating- Only Ducts

5 R-6 R-3.5 none none none none R-3.5

Cooling-Only Ducts

5,6 R-3.5 R-1.9 R-3.5 R-1.9 R-1.9 none none

Return Ducts

1 to 8 R-3.5 R-3.5 R-3.5 none none none none

Combine Heating and Cooling

Supply Ducts

5 R-6 R-6 R-6 R-1.9 R-3.5 none R-3.5

Return Ducts

1 to 8 R-3.5 R-3.5 R-3.5 none none none none



3.14 OUTDOOR, FIELD APPLIED JACKET SCHEDULE

A. Install jacket over insulation material. For insulation with factory-applied jacket, install the field-applied jacket over the factory-applied jacket.

B. If more than one material is listed, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.

C. Exterior piping, Exposed:

1. Aluminum jacket.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING 221116 - 1

SECTION 221116 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Under-building slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, fittings, and specialties inside the building.

2. Flexible connectors. 3. Escutcheons. 4. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 5. Wall penetration systems.


A. Seismic Performance: Domestic water piping and support and installation shall withstand effects of earthquake motions determined according to 2012 IBC.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following products:

1. Specialty valves. 2. Transition fittings. 3. Dielectric fittings. 4. Escutcheons. 5. Sleeves and sleeve seals.

B. Water Samples: Specified in "Cleaning" Article.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 61 for potable domestic water piping and components.




A. Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service.

2. Do not proceed with interruption of water service without Owner's written permission.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L water tube, drawn temper.

1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. 2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure

fittings. 3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. 4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with

ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.

2.3 PIPING JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to ASTM B 813.

B. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty brazing unless otherwise indicated.



2.4 ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates.

B. One Piece, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with setscrews.

C. One Piece, Deep Pattern: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with chrome-plated finish.

D. One Piece, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with setscrew or spring clips.

E. Split Casting, Cast Brass: Polished, chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge and setscrew.

F. Split Plate, Stamped Steel: Chrome-plated finish with concealed hinge, setscrew or spring clips.

G. One-Piece Floor Plates: Cast-iron flange with holes for fasteners.

H. Split-Casting Floor Plates: Cast brass with concealed hinge.

2.5 SLEEVES

A. Cast-Iron Wall Pipes: Fabricated of cast iron, and equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain ends and integral waterstop unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized-Steel-Sheet Sleeves: 0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded longitudinal joint.

C. Molded-PE Sleeves: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth outer surface with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

D. Molded-PVC Sleeves: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.

E. PVC-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.

F. Galvanized-Steel-Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, zinc-coated, with plain ends.

G. Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.

1. Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with setscrews.

2.6 SLEEVE SEALS


1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc.



3. Metraflex, Inc. 4. Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc. 5. Prior approved equal.

B. Description: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve.

1. Sealing Elements: EPDM-rubber interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Include type and number required for pipe material and size of pipe.

2. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. 3. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel, with corrosion-resistant coating, of

length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements.

2.7 GROUT

A. Standard: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, post-hardening and volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout.

B. Characteristics: Nonshrink; recommended for interior and exterior applications.

C. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.

D. Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Comply with requirements in Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.

B. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

C. Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

D. Install underground copper tube and ductile-iron pipe in PE encasement according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

E. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve, inside the building at each domestic water service entrance. Comply with



requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for drain valves and strainers.

F. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.

G. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for pressure-reducing valves.

H. Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.

I. Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's requirements.

J. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

K. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

L. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

M. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space.

N. Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.

O. Install piping to permit valve servicing.

P. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

Q. Install piping free of sags and bends.

R. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

S. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty.

T. Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Pumps" for thermostats.

U. Install thermometers on outlet piping from each water heater. Comply with requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for thermometers.




A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly.

C. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are

corroded or damaged.

D. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.

E. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."

F. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.

G. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems.

3.4 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for valve installations.

B. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

C. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are specified in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."

1. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches. 2. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where

indicated.

D. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping



NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.

3.5 TRANSITION FITTING INSTALLATION

A. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.

B. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling. 2. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.

3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for seismic-restraint devices.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe hanger and support products and installation.

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. 2. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet If Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

D. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.

E. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.

F. Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.



G. Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/4 and Smaller: 84 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 1-1/2: 108 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 3. NPS 2: 10 feet with 3/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 2-1/2: 11 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 5. NPS 3 and NPS 3-1/2: 12 feet with 1/2-inch rod. 6. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 12 feet with 5/8-inch rod. 7. NPS 6: 12 feet with 3/4-inch rod. 8. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 12 feet with 7/8-inch rod.

H. Install supports for vertical steel piping every 15 feet.

I. Support piping and tubing not listed in this article according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.

C. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

D. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following:

1. Domestic Water Booster Pumps: Cold-water suction and discharge piping. 2. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated,

but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 3. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not

smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in Division 15 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

4. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3.8 ESCUTCHEON INSTALLATION

A. Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.

B. Escutcheons for New Piping:

1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern. 2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast

brass with polished chrome-plated finish.



3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish.

4. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One piece, stamped steel with set screw or spring clips.

5. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, stamped steel with set screw or spring clips.

6. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

C. Escutcheons for Existing Piping:

1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Split casting, cast brass with chrome-plated finish. 2. Insulated Piping: Split plate, stamped steel with concealed or exposed-rivet

hinge and spring clips. 3. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting,

cast brass with chrome-plated finish. 4. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split casting, cast brass

with chrome-plated finish. 5. Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split plate, stamped steel with

exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips. 6. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split plate, stamped steel with set screw or

spring clips. 7. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting floor plate.

3.9 SLEEVE INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors, partitions, roofs, and walls.

B. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.

C. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.

D. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

E. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.

F. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

G. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.

H. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.

I. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.

J. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.



K. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:

1. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe. 2. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical

Equipment Areas or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe.

a. Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level. b. For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend cast-iron

sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.

3. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:

a. PVC pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. c. Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste

pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover openings.

4. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe Insert type. 5. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:

a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger. c. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear space

between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals are used. d. Do not use sleeves when wall penetration systems are used.

6. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Interior Concrete Walls:

a. Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6. b. Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.

L. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Comply with requirements in Division 7 Section "Through-Penetration Firestop Systems" for firestop materials and installations.

3.10 SLEEVE SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water-service piping entries into building.

B. Select type and number of sealing elements required for pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.



3.11 WALL PENETRATION SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install wall penetration systems in new, exterior concrete walls.

B. Assemble wall penetration system components with sleeve pipe. Install so that end of sleeve pipe and face of housing are flush with wall. Adjust locking devices to secure sleeve pipe in housing.

3.12 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components. Comply with requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for identification materials and installation.

B. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure.


A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Piping Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction:

a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Piping Tests:

1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water.

2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.



4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 100 psig, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.

D. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.14 ADJUSTING

A. Perform the following adjustments before operation:

1. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate

flow.

a. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide flow of hot water in each branch.

b. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.

5. Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation.

6. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. 7. Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified

for application where used and are clean and ready for use. 8. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and

operation.

3.15 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect potable and non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:



1) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.

2) Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.

c. Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

B. Clean non-potable domestic water piping as follows:

1. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using.

2. Use purging procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or; if methods are not prescribed, follow procedures described below:

a. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets.

b. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination.

C. Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.

D. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

3.16 PIPING SCHEDULE

A. Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; cast- or wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

D. Aboveground domestic water piping, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following:

1. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; wrought- copper solder-joint fittings; and soldered joints.

2. Hard copper tube, ASTM B 88, Type L; grooved-joint copper-tube appurtenances; and grooved joints.



3.17 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shutoff Duty: Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly, ball, or gate valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

2. Throttling Duty: Use ball or globe valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or ball valves with flanged ends for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.

3. Hot-Water Circulation Piping, Balancing Duty: Memory-stop balancing valves. 4. Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.

B. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment.



DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES 221119 - 1

SECTION 221119 - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:

1. Vacuum breakers. 2. Temperature-actuated water mixing valves. 3. Strainers.


A. Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Diagram power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. NSF Compliance:

1. Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; Sections 1 through 9."



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Pipe-Applied, Atmospheric-Type Vacuum Breakers:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Ames Co. b. Cash Acme. c. Conbraco Industries, Inc. d. FEBCO; SPX Valves & Controls. e. Rain Bird Corporation. f. Toro Company (The); Irrigation Div. g. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Wilkins Div. i. Prior approved equal.

2. Standard: ASSE 1001. 3. Size: NPS 1/4 to NPS 3, as required to match connected piping. 4. Body: Bronze. 5. Inlet and Outlet Connections: Threaded. 6. Finish: Rough bronze.

2.2 TEMPERATURE-ACTUATED WATER MIXING VALVES

A. Individual-Fixture, Water Tempering Valves:


a. Sloan. b. Watts. c. Prior approved equal.

2. Standard: ASSE 1016, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve. 3. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Body: Bronze body with corrosion-resistant interior components. 5. Temperature Control: Adjustable. 6. Inlets and Outlet: Threaded. 7. Finish: Rough or chrome-plated bronze.

8. Tempered-Water Setting: 110 F. 9. Tempered-Water Design Flow Rate:

2.3 STRAINERS FOR DOMESTIC WATER PIPING

A. Y-Pattern Strainers:



1. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Body: Bronze for NPS 2 and smaller; cast iron with interior lining complying with

AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating and for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 3. End Connections: Threaded for NPS 2 and smaller; flanged for NPS 2-1/2 and

larger. 4. Screen: Stainless steel with round perforations, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Drain: Factory-installed, hose-end drain valve.

2.4 DRAIN VALVES

A. Ball-Valve-Type, Hose-End Drain Valves:

1. Standard: MSS SP-110 for standard-port, two-piece ball valves. 2. Pressure Rating: 400-psig minimum CWP. 3. Size: NPS 3/4. 4. Body: Copper alloy. 5. Ball: Chrome-plated brass. 6. Seats and Seals: Replaceable. 7. Handle: Vinyl-covered steel. 8. Inlet: Threaded or solder joint. 9. Outlet: Threaded, short nipple with garden-hose thread complying with

ASME B1.20.7 and cap with brass chain.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 and 23 Section "Common work results" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install backflow preventers in each water supply to mechanical equipment and systems and to other equipment and water systems that may be sources of contamination. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Locate backflow preventers in same room as connected equipment or system. 2. Install drain for backflow preventers with atmospheric-vent drain connection with

air-gap fitting, fixed air-gap fitting, or equivalent positive pipe separation of at least two pipe diameters in drain piping and pipe to floor drain. Locate air-gap device attached to or under backflow preventer. Simple air breaks are not acceptable for this application.

3. Do not install bypass piping around backflow preventers.

C. Install water regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and bypass with memory-stop balancing valve. Install pressure gages on inlet and outlet.

D. Install balancing valves in locations where they can easily be adjusted. Install on hot water recirculating lines where they connect to hot water lines.



E. Install temperature-actuated water mixing valves with check stops or shutoff valves on inlets and with shutoff valve on outlet.

1. Install thermometers. 2. Install cabinet-type units recessed in or surface mounted on wall as specified.

F. Install Y-pattern strainers for water on supply side of each water pressure-reducing valve.

G. Install water hammer arresters in water piping according to PDI-WH 201.

H. Install air vents at high points of water piping. Install drain piping and discharge onto floor drain.

I. Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

J. Install drainage-type, trap-seal primer valves as lavatory trap with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting.

K. Install trap-seal primer systems with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust system for proper flow.

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 and 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping and specialties.

B. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

C. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."

3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or sign on or near each of the following:

1. Pressure vacuum breakers. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventers. 3. Water pressure-reducing valves. 4. Calibrated balancing valves. 5. Primary, thermostatic, water mixing valves. 6. Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves. 7. Trap-seal primer systems.



B. Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to identifying unit.


A. Perform the following tests and prepare test reports:

1. Test each reduced-pressure-principle backflow preventer according to authorities having jurisdiction and the device's reference standard.

B. Remove and replace malfunctioning domestic water piping specialties and retest as specified above.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Set field-adjustable pressure set points of water pressure-reducing valves.

B. Set field-adjustable flow set points of balancing valves.

C. Set field-adjustable temperature set points of temperature-actuated water mixing valves.



SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING 221316 - 1

SECTION 221316 - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building:

1. Pipe, tube, and fittings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.

B. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.

C. LLDPE: Linear, low-density polyethylene plastic.

D. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.

E. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

F. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

G. TPE: Thermoplastic elastomer.


A. Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water Insert pressure. 2. Sanitary Sewer, Force-Main Piping: 100 psig.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For pipe, tube, fittings, and couplings.

B. Field quality-control inspection and test reports.




A. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.

B. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping; "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping; "NSF-tubular" for plastic continuous waste piping; and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining materials.

2.3 HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service and Extra-Heavy class(es).

B. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.

C. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber.

2.4 HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.

B. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and deaerator drainage fittings.

C. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.



1. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO. 2) Fernco, Inc. 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 6) Prior approved equal.

2. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield, stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) ANACO. 2) Clamp-All Corp. 3) Ideal Div.; Stant Corp. 4) Mission Rubber Co. 5) Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div. 6) Prior approved equal.

3. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Cast-Iron Couplings: ASTM A 48/A 48M, two-piece, cast-iron housing; stainless-steel bolts and nuts; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.

a. Manufacturers:

1) MG Piping Products Co. 2) Prior approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXCAVATION

A. Refer to Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aboveground, soil and waste piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard,

shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.



C. Aboveground, vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and gasketed joints. 2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel

couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.

D. Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping shall be any of the following:

1. Extra-Heavy class, cast-iron soil piping; gaskets; and gasketed calking materials; joints.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Sanitary sewer piping outside the building is specified in Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewerage."

B. Plastic piping is not allowed in ceiling return plenums. Where piping is exposed to ceiling plenums, cast iron shall only be allowed.

C. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Common Work Results."

D. Install seismic restraints on piping. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

E. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers.

F. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary force-main piping.

G. Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to make installation watertight. Sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Common Work Results."

H. Install wall-penetration fitting at each service pipe penetration through foundation wall. Make installation watertight.

I. Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."

1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105.

J. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of



different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

K. Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

L. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:

1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.

2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. 3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.

M. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:

1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Sovent Drainage System: Comply with ASSE 1043 and sovent fitting manufacturer's written installation instructions.

3. Reduced-Size Venting: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.

N. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab is without membrane waterproofing.

O. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.


A. Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Common Work Results."

B. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with gasket joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for compression joints.

C. Join hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil piping with calked joints according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for lead and oakum calked joints.

D. Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.


A. Seismic-restraint devices are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration Controls and Seismic Restraints."



B. Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Hangers and Supports." Install the following:

1. Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps. 2. Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:

a. 100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. b. Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. c. Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.

3. Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze.

4. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.

C. Install supports according to Division 22 and 23 Section "Hangers and Supports."

D. Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.

E. Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.

F. Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum rod diameters:

1. NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod. 2. NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod. 3. NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod. 4. NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod. 5. NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.

G. Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.

H. Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written instructions.

3.6 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials.

C. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:

1. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.

2. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction.

3. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code.




A. During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.

2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.

B. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

C. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested.

3. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.

6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.



C. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.



SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES 221319 - 1

SECTION 221319 - SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Trap Guards. 4. Roof flashing assemblies. 5. Miscellaneous sanitary drainage piping specialties. 6. Flashing materials.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

C. HDPE: High-density polyethylene plastic.

D. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

E. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer, rated capacities, operating characteristics, and accessories for the following:

1. Cleanouts. 2. Floor drains. 3. Air admittance valves.


A. Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.



B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Comply with NSF 14, "Plastics Piping Components and Related Materials," for plastic sanitary piping specialty components.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof penetrations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANOUTS

A. Exposed Metal Cleanouts:


a. Josam Company; Josam Div. b. MIFAB, Inc. c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc. d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. e. Watts Drainage Products Inc. f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. g. Prior approved equal.

2. Standard: ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for cleanout test tee. 3. Size: Same as connected drainage piping 4. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch or Hubless, cast-iron

soil pipe test tee as required to match connected piping. 5. Closure: Countersunk or raised-head, cast-iron plug. 6. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout

size.

2.2 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Cast-Iron Floor Drains:


a. Commercial Enameling Co. b. Josam Company; Josam Div. c. MIFAB, Inc. d. Prier Products, Inc. e. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.



f. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. g. Watts Drainage Products Inc. h. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Light Commercial Operation. i. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. j. Prior approved equal.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3. 3. Pattern: Floor drain. 4. Body Material: Gray iron. 5. Clamping Device: Required. 6. Outlet: Bottom. 7. Top or Strainer Material: Stainless steel. 8. Top Shape: Round. 9. Top Loading Classification: Medium Duty. 10. Inlet Fitting: Gray iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and

trap-seal primer valve connection. 11. Trap Pattern: Deep-seal P-trap. 12. Trap Features: Trap-seal primer valve drain connection.

2.3 ROOF FLASHING ASSEMBLIES

A. Roof Flashing Assemblies:

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Acorn Engineering Company; Elmdor/Stoneman Div. b. Thaler Metal Industries Ltd. c. Prior approved equal.

B. Description: Manufactured assembly made of 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch- thick, lead flashing collar and skirt extending at least 8 inches from pipe, with galvanized-steel boot reinforcement and counterflashing fitting.

1. Open-Top Vent Cap: Without cap. 2. Low-Silhouette Vent Cap: With vandal-proof vent cap. 3. Extended Vent Cap: With field-installed, vandal-proof vent cap.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Deep-Seal Traps:

1. Description: Cast-iron or bronze casting, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping and cleanout trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as connected waste piping.

a. NPS 2: 4-inch- minimum water seal. b. NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: 5-inch- minimum water seal.



B. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings:

1. Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection.

2. Size: Same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.

C. Trap Guard

1. Description: Trap guard shall have flexible elastomeric material open on top, with curl closure on bottom as needed to allow water to flow, but not allow sewer gases to escape.

2. Trap guards by Proset or prior approved equal.

2.5 FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Copper Sheet: ASTM B 152/B 152M, of the following minimum weights and thicknesses, unless otherwise indicated:

1. General Applications: 12 oz./sq. ft. thickness. 2. Vent Pipe Flashing: 8 oz./sq. ft. thickness.

B. Zinc-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with 0.20 percent copper content and 0.04-inch minimum thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Include G90 hot-dip galvanized, mill-phosphatized finish for painting if indicated.

C. Elastic Membrane Sheet: ASTM D 4068, flexible, chlorinated polyethylene, 40-mil minimum thickness.

D. Fasteners: Metal compatible with material and substrate being fastened.

E. Metal Accessories: Sheet metal strips, clamps, anchoring devices, and similar accessory units required for installation; matching or compatible with material being installed.

F. Solder: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloy.

G. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Refer to Division 22 and 23 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint construction, and basic installation requirements.

B. Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:



1. Size same as drainage piping up to NPS 4. Use NPS 4 for larger drainage piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.

2. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. 3. Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping NPS 4 and smaller and 100 feet

for larger piping. 4. Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.

C. For floor cleanouts for piping below floors, install cleanout deck plates with top flush with finished floor.

D. For cleanouts located in concealed piping, install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall.

E. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished floor, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance. 2. Set floor drains below elevation of surrounding finished floor to allow floor

drainage. Set with grates depressed according to the following drainage area radii:

a. Radius, 30 Inches or Less: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not less than 1/4-inch total depression.

b. Radius, 30 to 60 Inches: Equivalent to 1 percent slope. c. Radius, 60 Inches or Larger: Equivalent to 1 percent slope, but not greater

than 1-inch total depression.

3. Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.

4. Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Install trench drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with finished surface, unless otherwise indicated.

G. Install air-admittance-valve wall boxes recessed in wall where indicated on drawings.

H. Install roof flashing assemblies on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

I. Install flashing fittings on sanitary stack vents and vent stacks that extend through roof.

J. Install deep-seal traps on all floor drains.

K. Install floor-drain, trap guards to floor drains that require trap-seal primer connection.

1. Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection. 2. Size: Same as floor drain inlet.



L. Install air-gap fittings on draining-type backflow preventers and on indirect-waste piping discharge into sanitary drainage system.

M. Install sleeve flashing device with each riser and stack passing through floors with waterproof membrane.

N. Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

3.2 CONNECTIONS


B. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.

3.3 FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Fabricate flashing from single piece unless large pans, sumps, or other drainage shapes are required. Join flashing according to the following if required:

1. Lead Sheets: Burn joints of lead sheets 6.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0938-inch thickness or thicker. Solder joints of lead sheets 4.0-lb/sq. ft., 0.0625-inch thickness or thinner.

2. Copper Sheets: Solder joints of copper sheets.

B. Install sheet flashing on pipes, sleeves, and specialties passing through or embedded in floors and roofs with waterproof membrane.

1. Pipe Flashing: Sleeve type, matching pipe size, with minimum length of 10 inches, and skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around pipe.

2. Sleeve Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around sleeve.

3. Embedded Specialty Flashing: Flat sheet, with skirt or flange extending at least 8 inches around specialty.

C. Set flashing on floors and roofs in solid coating of bituminous cement.

D. Secure flashing into sleeve and specialty clamping ring or device.

E. Install flashing for piping passing through roofs with counterflashing or commercially made flashing fittings, according to Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

F. Extend flashing up vent pipe passing through roofs and turn down into pipe, or secure flashing into cast-iron sleeve having calking recess.

G. Fabricate and install flashing and pans, sumps, and other drainage shapes.




A. Tests and Inspections:

1. Leak Test: After installation, charge system and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.5 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt or debris and to prevent damage from traffic or construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.



PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000- 1

SECTION 224000 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components: 1. Fixture supports. 2. Protective shielding guards. 3. Commercial sinks. 4. Sink Faucets.


1. Division 22 Section "Plumbing Specialties" for backflow preventers, floor drains, and specialty fixtures not included in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS


B. Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with disabilities.

C. Cast Polymer: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material. This material includes cultured-marble and solid-surface materials.

D. Cultured Marble: Cast-filled-polymer-plastic material with surface coating.

E. Fitting: Device that controls the flow of water into or out of the plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, shower heads and tub spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.

F. FRP: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic.

G. PMMA: Polymethyl methacrylate (acrylic) plastic.

H. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

I. Solid Surface: Nonporous, homogeneous, cast-polymer-plastic material with heat-, impact-, scratch-, and stain-resistance qualities.



1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of plumbing fixture indicated. Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details, and flow-control rates.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in operation, and maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.


A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category through one source from a single manufacturer.

1. Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that category.

B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities"; and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; for plumbing fixtures for people with disabilities.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.

E. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components--Health Effects," for fixture materials that will be in contact with potable water.

F. Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are compatible.

G. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing fixtures:

1. Enameled, Cast-Iron Fixtures: ASME A112.19.1M. 2. Porcelain-Enameled, Formed-Steel Fixtures: ASME A112.19.4M. 3. Solid-Surface-Material Lavatories and Sinks: ANSI/ICPA SS-1. 4. Stainless-Steel Commercial, Handwash Sinks: NSF 2 construction. 5. Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M. 6. Water-Closet, Flush Valve, Tank Trim: ASME A112.19.5. 7. Water-Closet, Flushometer Tank Trim: ASSE 1037.

H. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory and sink faucets:



1. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Side Spray: ASME A112.18.3M. 2. Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet:

ASME A112.18.3M. 3. Diverter Valves for Faucets with Hose Spray: ASSE 1025. 4. Faucets: ASME A112.18.1. 5. Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011. 6. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 7. Integral, Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 8. NSF Potable-Water Materials: NSF 61. 9. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 10. Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951. 11. Supply Fittings: ASME A112.18.1. 12. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2.

I. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous fittings:

1. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001. 2. Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1. 3. Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037. 4. Plastic Tubular Fittings: ASTM F 409. 5. Brass Waste Fittings: ASME A112.18.2. 6. Sensor-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037 and UL 1951.

J. Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components:

1. Disposers: ASSE 1008 and UL 430. 2. Flexible Water Connectors: ASME A112.18.6. 3. Floor Drains: ASME A112.6.3. 4. Grab Bars: ASTM F 446. 5. Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7. 6. Hot-Water Dispensers: ASSE 1023 and UL 499. 7. Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M. 8. Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1. 9. Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5. 10. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of whirlpools that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures of unit shell. b. Faulty operation of controls, blowers, pumps, heaters, and timers. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

use.



2. Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-Rings: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

2. Faucet Cartridges and O-Rings: Equal to 5 percent of amount of each type and size installed.

3. Flushometer Valve, Repair Kits: Equal to 10 percent of amount of each type installed, but no fewer than 2 of each type.

4. Provide hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, with separate compartments for each type and size of extra materials listed above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIXTURE SUPPORTS


1. Josam Company. 2. MIFAB Manufacturing Inc. 3. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co. 4. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div. 5. Watts Drainage Products Inc.; a div. of Watts Industries, Inc. 6. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation. 7. Prior approved equal.

B. Sink Supports:

1. Description: Type II, sink carrier with hanger plate, bearing studs, and tie rod for sink-type fixture. Include steel uprights with feet.

2.2 PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS

A. Protective Shielding Piping Enclosures:


a. TRUEBRO, Inc. b. Plumberex. c. McGuire. d. Proflo.



e. Prior approved equal.

2. Description: Manufactured plastic enclosure for covering plumbing fixture hot- and cold-water supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with ADA requirements.

2.3 COMMERCIAL SINKS

A. Commercial Sinks, Single Compartment Break Room Sink:


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Just Manufacturing Company. c. Prior approved equal.

2. Description: One-compartment, counter-mounting, stainless-steel commercial sink with backsplash.

a. Overall Dimensions: See drawings. b. Metal Thickness: 18 Gauge. c. Compartment:

1) Drain: NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper.

a) Location: Centered in compartment.

B. Commercial Sinks, Two Compartment:


a. Elkay Manufacturing Co. b. Just Manufacturing Company. c. Prior approved equal.

2. Description: Two-compartment, freestanding, stainless-steel commercial sink with backsplash.

a. Overall Dimensions: See drawings. b. Metal Thickness: 18 Gauge. c. Compartment:

1) Dimensions: See drawings. 2) Drain: NPS 1-1/2 tailpiece with stopper.

a) Location: Centered in compartment.



2.4 SINK FAUCETS

A. Sink Faucets:


a. American Standard Companies, Inc. b. Bradley Corporation. c. Chicago Faucets. d. Delta Faucet Company. e. Eljer. f. Elkay Manufacturing Co. g. Fisher Manufacturing Co. h. Just Manufacturing Company. i. Kohler Co. j. Moen, Inc. k. Sayco; a Briggs Plumbing Products, Inc. Company. l. Speakman Company. m. T & S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc. n. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.

2. Description: Kitchen faucet without spray. Include hot- and cold-water indicators; coordinate faucet inlets with supplies and fixture holes; coordinate outlet with spout and fixture receptor.

a. Body Material: Commercial, solid brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate. c. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm, unless otherwise indicated. d. Mixing Valve: Single control. e. Mounting: Deck. f. Handle(s): Lever. g. Spout Type: Swing, solid brass. h. Spout Outlet: Aerator.

Drain: basket strainer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before plumbing fixture installation.

B. Examine cabinets, counters, floors, and walls for suitable conditions where fixtures will be installed.




3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Assemble plumbing fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Install off-floor supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounting fixtures.

1. Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures. 2. Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping. 3. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible

fixtures.

C. Install back-outlet, wall-mounting fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.

D. Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building substrate.

E. Install wall-mounting fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.

F. Install floor-mounting, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate and wall bracket and onto waste fitting seals.

G. Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.

H. Install fixtures level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings.

I. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.

1. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with fixture. Valves are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Valves."

J. Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to sanitary drainage system.

K. Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage system.

L. Install flushometer valves for accessible water closets and urinals with handle mounted on wide side of compartment. Install other actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach.

M. Install tanks for accessible, tank-type water closets with lever handle mounted on wide side of compartment.

N. Install toilet seats on water closets.

O. Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.



P. Install water-supply flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves.

Q. Install faucet flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.

R. Install traps on fixture outlets.

1. Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps. 2. Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.

S. Install disposer in outlet of each sink indicated to have disposer. Install switch where indicated or in wall adjacent to sink if location is not indicated.

T. Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Escutcheons are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods."

U. Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and countertops using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

3.3 CONNECTIONS


B. Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures.

C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Verify that installed plumbing fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.

B. Check that plumbing fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.

C. Inspect installed plumbing fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.

D. Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate properly.



E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings, and controls.

B. Operate and adjust all fixtures. Replace damaged and malfunctioning units and controls.

C. Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.

D. Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

E. Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Do the following:

1. Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers and spouts.

2. Remove sediment and debris from drains.

B. After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished fixtures, faucets, and fittings, inspect exposed finishes and repair damaged finishes.

3.7 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of plumbing fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.



DIVISION 23 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230100 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230500 BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS 230523 VALVES 230529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING

AND EQUIPMENT 230553 IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING AND

EQUIPMENT 230593 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230700 HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION 230900 CONTROLS 233113 METAL DUCTS 233300 DUCT ACCESSORIES 233423 EXHAUST FANS 233600 AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233713 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES


GENERAL REQUIREMENTSFOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230100 - 1

SECTION 230100 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PLUMBING AND HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. General Conditions and Division 01 apply to this Division.

B. See Section 220100, “General Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC.”

1.2 SCOPE

A. All requirements and information contained in Division 22 Section 220100, “General Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC” shall apply to both Divisions 22 and 23.

1.3 SITE OBSERVATION

A. The Contractor shall examine the site and understand the conditions which may affect the performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work.

B. No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine existing site conditions.

1.4 DRAWINGS

A. See Section 220100, “General Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC.”

1.5 COORDINATION OF WORK:


1.6 EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS:


1.7 PROJECT SUBMITTALS:



GENERAL REQUIREMENTSFOR PLUMBING AND HVAC 230100 - 2

1.8 WARRANTY GUARANTEE:


B. The Contractor shall warrant all materials and equipment to be of quality consistent with specifications as represented by manufacturer's published data.

C. The Contractor shall guarantee that the installation and operation of the equipment shall be free from defects for a period of one year beginning at date of substantial completion and acceptance. The Contractor shall replace or repair any part of the installation that is found to be defective or incomplete within the guarantee period.

D. The one year guarantee on equipment and systems shall commence when equipment has been demonstrated to work and has been accepted. (Example: If an equipment item fails to perform and it takes 9 months after substantial completion to correct, then the guarantee shall commence after the item has been demonstrated to perform and has been accepted.)

E. Substantial completion and acceptance in no way relieves the Contractor from providing the systems and equipment as specified.

1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS

A. See Section 220100, “General Requirements for Plumbing and HVAC.” .


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 230100



SECTION 230500 - BASIC PLUMBING AND HVAC MATERIALS AND METHODS

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Division 22, Section 220500, “Basic Plumbing and HVAC Materials and Methods.”

1.2 SUMMARY

A. All requirements in Division 22, Section 220500, “Basic Plumbing and HVAC Materials and Methods” shall apply to both Divisions 22 and 23.

1. Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 See Division 22, Section 220500, “Basic Plumbing and HVAC Materials and Methods.”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 See Division 22, Section 220500, “Basic Plumbing and HVAC Materials and Methods”



VALVES 230523 - 1

SECTION 230523 - VALVES

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 220523 Valves

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section 220523 “Valves” shall apply to both Divisions 22 and 23.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEE SECTION 220523 “Valves”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SEE SECTION 220523 “Valves”



HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230529- 1

SECTION 230529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section 22 “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing” shall apply to both divisions 22 and 23.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SEE SECTION “Hangers and supports for plumbing”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SEE SECTION “Hangers and supports for plumbing”



VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230548 - 1

SECTION 230548 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Section 220548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC and Plumbing Piping and Equipment” shall apply to both divisions 22 and 23.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See section 220548:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 See section 220548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC and Plumbing Piping and Equipment”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 See section 220548 “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC and Plumbing Piping and Equipment”



IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 230553 -1

SECTION 230553 – IDENTIFICATION FOR MECHANICAL AND PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Section 22 “Identification for Mechanical and Plumbing Piping and Equipment”

SUMMARY

C. Section 22 ““Identification for Mechanical and Plumbing Piping and Equipment” shall apply to both divisions 22 and 23.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

SEE SECTION 22 “Identification for Mechanical and Plumbing Piping and Equipment”

PART 3 - EXECUTION

SEE SECTION 22 “Identification for Mechanical and Plumbing Piping and Equipment”



TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 230593- 1

SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:

1. Air Systems:

a. Constant-volume air systems. b. Variable-air-volume systems.

2. HVAC equipment quantitative-performance settings. 3. Existing systems TAB. 4. Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly. 5. Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce fan speed or adjust a damper.

B. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and terminals, according to indicated quantities.

C. Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors, and other pollutants.

D. Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.

E. NC: Noise criteria.

F. Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable results.

G. RC: Room criteria.

H. Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.



I. Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.

J. Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.

K. System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system.

L. System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was performance tested.

M. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.

N. Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the distribution system.

O. Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.

P. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and reporting TAB procedures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: Within 15 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

B. Contract Documents Examination Report: Within 30 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of the Contract Documents review report as specified in Part 3.

C. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days from Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit 4 copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms intended for use on this Project.

D. Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on approved forms certified by TAB firm.

E. Sample Report Forms: Submit two sets of sample TAB report forms.

F. Warranties specified in this Section.


A. TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by AABC or NEBB.



B. TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.

1. Agenda Items: Include at least the following:

a. Submittal distribution requirements. b. The Contract Documents examination report. c. TAB plan. d. Work schedule and Project-site access requirements. e. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. f. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.

C. Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the following:

1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports.

2. Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.

D. TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems” or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."

E. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems," Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."

F. Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently if required by instrument manufacturer.

1. Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the name of party performing instrument calibration.

G. Approved TAB agencies:

1. Bonneville Test and Balance. 2. BTC Services. 3. Certified Test and Balance. 4. Danis Test and Balance. 5. Intermountain Test and Balance. 6. RS Analysis. 7. Testing and Balancing, Inc.




A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

B. Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment, HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to support and assist TAB activities.

B. Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times.

C. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been satisfactorily completed.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. National Project Performance Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" forms stating that AABC will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee includes the following provisions:

1. The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract Documents.

2. Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation limits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.



1. Contract Documents are defined in the General and Supplementary Conditions of Contract.

2. Verify that balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are required by the Contract Documents. Verify that quantities and locations of these balancing devices are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

B. Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.

C. Examine Project Record Documents described in Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents."

D. Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.

E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design," Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.

F. Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing, cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.

G. Examine system and equipment test reports.

H. Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment operation.

I. Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and balancing.

J. Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.

K. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning.

L. Examine plenum ceilings used for supply air to verify that they are airtight. Verify that pipe penetrations and other holes are sealed.



M. Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.

N. Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or mixing fluid flows.

O. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.

P. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.

Q. Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.

R. Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:

1. Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.

2. Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller. 3. Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of

fully closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes, and variable-air-volume terminals.

4. Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.

5. Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and cold walls.

6. Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions. 7. Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract

Documents. 8. Controller set points are set at indicated values. 9. Interlocked systems are operating. 10. Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.

S. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.

B. Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:

1. Permanent electrical power wiring is complete. 2. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 3. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 4. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 5. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 6. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.



7. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided.

8. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met.

3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and this Section.

B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed. Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.

C. Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.

D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.

3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS

A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes.

B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.

C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.

D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.

E. Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.

F. Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.

G. Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.

H. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.

I. Check for airflow blockages.

J. Check condensate drains for proper connections and functioning.



K. Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.

L. Check for proper sealing of air duct system.

3.5 PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS

A. Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by fan manufacturer.

1. Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:

a. Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.

b. Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.

c. Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct restrictions.

d. Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum that houses the fan.

2. Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit, rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.

a. Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel must change filters.

3. Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.

4. Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend corrective action to align design and actual conditions.

5. Obtain approval from Architect for adjustment of fan speed higher or lower than indicated speed. Make required adjustments to pulley sizes, motor sizes, and electrical connections to accommodate fan-speed changes.

6. Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required brake horsepower.

B. Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

1. Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.



a. Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate the total airflow for that zone.

2. Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.

C. Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.

1. Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written instructions and calculating factors.

D. Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors and the dampers at air terminals.

1. Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the Contract Documents.

2. Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.

3.6 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS

A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts.

B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:

1. Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load.

2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses.

3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver

the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.

5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as described for constant-volume air systems.



a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow.

6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as described for constant-volume air systems.

7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit.

8. Record the final fan performance data.

3.7 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS

A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:

1. Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating.

B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass for the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations, including controller manufacturer, model and serial numbers, and nameplate data.

3.8 PROCEDURES FOR CONDENSING UNITS

A. Verify proper rotation of fans.

B. Measure entering- and leaving-air temperatures.

C. Record compressor data.

3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS

A. Refrigerant Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:

1. Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 2. Wet-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air. 3. Airflow. 4. Air pressure drop. 5. Refrigerant suction pressure and temperature.



3.10 PROCEDURES FOR TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENTS

A. During TAB, report the need for adjustment in temperature regulation within the automatic temperature-control system.

B. Measure indoor wet- and dry-bulb temperatures every other hour for a period of two successive eight-hour days, in each separately controlled zone, to prove correctness of final temperature settings. Measure when the building or zone is occupied.

C. Measure outside-air, wet- and dry-bulb temperatures.

3.11 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS

A. Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.

1. Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.

2. Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate information.

3. Check the refrigerant charge. 4. Check the condition of filters. 5. Check the condition of coils. 6. Check the operation of the drain pan and condensate drain trap. 7. Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication. 8. Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the

measurements taken. Report deficiencies.

B. Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.

1. New filters are installed. 2. Coils are clean and fins combed. 3. Drain pans are clean. 4. Fans are clean. 5. Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated. 6. Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.

C. Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are affected by the renovation work.

1. Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity.

2. Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment manufacturer.



3. If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5 percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.

4. Air balance each air outlet.

3.12 PROCEDURES FOR TESTING DUCT SYSTEMS

A. Perform duct leakage tests and duct cleanliness tests.

B. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass initial tests and inspections. The sheet metal contractor shall be responsible to make corrections and repairs as necessary to pass the tests. TAB contractor shall include initial test and 1 follow up test. Any additional follow up tests required due to system not passing shall be performed by the TAB contractor at the Division 22 and 23 contractor’s expense.

3.13 TEMPERATURE-CONTROL VERIFICATION

A. Verify that controllers are calibrated and commissioned.

B. Check transmitter and controller locations and note conditions that would adversely affect control functions.

C. Record controller settings and note variances between set points and actual measurements.

D. Check the operation of limiting controllers (i.e., high- and low-temperature controllers).

E. Check free travel and proper operation of control devices such as damper and valve operators.

F. Check the sequence of operation of control devices. Note air pressures and device positions and correlate with airflow and water flow measurements. Note the speed of response to input changes.

G. Check the interaction of electrically operated switch transducers.

H. Check the interaction of interlock and lockout systems.

I. Check main control supply-air pressure and observe compressor and dryer operations.

J. Record voltages of power supply and controller output. Determine whether the system operates on a grounded or nongrounded power supply.

K. Note operation of electric actuators using spring return for proper fail-safe operations.

3.14 TOLERANCES

A. Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:



1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus 5 to plus 10 percent.

2. Air Outlets and Inlets: 0 to minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: 0 to minus 5 percent.

3.15 REPORTING

A. Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems' balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and balancing devices.

B. Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures, procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each building floor for systems serving multiple floors.

3.16 FINAL REPORT

A. General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.

B. Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer.

1. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.

C. Provide final report on standard AABC or NEBB forms.

3.17 INSPECTIONS

A. Initial Inspection:

1. After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance readings documented in the Final Report.

2. Randomly check the following for each system:

a. Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets. b. Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals. c. Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor.

Compare the reading to the set point. d. Measure sound levels at two locations.



e. Measure space pressure of at least 10 percent of locations. f. Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position. g. Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.

B. Final Inspection:

1. After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a final inspection be made by Architect.

2. TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Architect.

3. Architect shall randomly select measurements documented in the final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in a normal 8-hour business day.

4. If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as "FAILED."

5. If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be considered incomplete and shall be rejected.

6. TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.

7. Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the final payment.

3.18 ADDITIONAL TESTS

A. Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.

B. Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak summer and winter conditions.




SECTION 230700 - HVAC AND PLUMBING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. See section 220700 for HVAC and plumbing insulation.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section 220700 HVAC and Plumbing insulation shall apply to insulation requirements for both division 22 and 23.

B. Division 23 Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See section 220700.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 See section 220700.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 See section 220700



CONTROLS 230900 - 1

SECTION 230900 - CONTROLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Building Management System (BMS), utilizing direct digital controls.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This building was previously upgraded to the previous version of the Honeywell WEBS controls system. The intent of this project is to tie the new renovated area back into the existing updated controls system.

1.3 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Automatic control dampers, where not supplied with equipment. 2. Terminal unit controllers and actuators, when installed by terminal unit

manufacturer.

B. Products Not Furnished or Installed But Integrated with the Work of This Section: 1. Smoke detectors (through alarm relay contacts).

C. Work Required Under Other Divisions Related to This Section: 1. Provision and wiring of smoke detectors and other devices relating to fire

alarm system. 2. Campus LAN (Ethernet) connection adjacent to JACE network management

controller.

1.4 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 23 05 00 - Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods: Performance and reference standards for products and materials required for the Project.


A. Scope: Furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for a complete and operating Building Management System (BMS), utilizing Direct Digital Controls as shown on the drawings and as described herein. Drawings are diagrammatic only. All controllers furnished in this section shall communicate on a peer-to-peer bus over an open protocol bus (Examples: LonTalk, BACnet, MODBUS). 1. The intent of this specification is to provide a system that is consistent with

BMS systems throughout the owner's facilities running the Niagara 4 Framework.

2. System architecture shall be capable of fully supporting a multi-vendor environment and be able to integrate third party systems via existing vendor protocols including, as a minimum, LonTalk, BACnet and MODBUS. Field verify protocols in use at this facility for current licensing requirements.

3. System architecture shall provide secure Web access using any of the current versions of Microsoft Internet Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, or Google Chrome


CONTROLS 230900 - 2

browsers from any computer on the owner's LAN. 4. All control devices furnished with this Section shall be programmable directly

from the Niagara 4 Workbench embedded toolset upon completion of this project. The use of configurable or programmable controllers that require additional software tools for post-installation maintenance shall not be acceptable.

5. Any control vendor that shall provide additional BMS server software shall be unacceptable. Only systems that utilize the Niagara 4 Framework shall satisfy the requirements of this section.

6. The BMS server shall host all graphic files for the control system. All graphics and navigation schemes for this project shall match those that are on the existing campus NiagaraAX or Niagara 4 Framework server.

7. Owner shall receive all Administrator level login and passwords for engineering toolset at first training session. The Owner shall have full licensing and full access rights for all network management, operating system server, engineering and programming software required for the ongoing maintenance and operation of the BMS.

8. OPEN NIC STATEMENTS - All Niagara 4 software licenses shall have the following NiCS: "accept.station.in=*"; "accept.station.out=*"and "accept.wb.in=*"and "accept.wb.out=*". All open NIC statements shall follow Niagara Open NIC specifications.

9. All JACE hardware licenses and certificates shall be stored on local MicroSD memory card employing encrypted “safe boot” technology.

10. To ensure quality, any JACE hardware products used on this project shall come through the Tridium Richmond, VA shipping facility. JACE hardware products not meeting this requirement will not be allowed.

B. All products of the BMS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided on request, with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable. 1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), Rules and Regulations, Volume

II -July 1986 Part 15 Class A Radio Frequency Devices. 2. FCC, Part 15, Subpart B, Class B 3. FCC, Part 15, Subpart C 4. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices. 5. UL 504 - Industrial Control Equipment. 6. UL 506 - Specialty Transformers. 7. UL 910 - Test Method for Fire and Smoke Characteristics of Electrical and

Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Air-Handling Spaces. 8. UL 916 - Energy Management Systems All. 9. UL 1449 - Transient Voltage Suppression. 10. Standard Test for Flame Propagation Height of Electrical and Optical - Fiber

Cables Installed Vertically in Shafts. 11. EIA/ANSI 232-E - Interface Between Data Technical Equipment and Data

Circuit Terminal Equipment Employing Serial Binary Data Interchange. 12. EIA 455 - Standard Test Procedures for Fiber Optic Fibers, Cables,

Transducers, Connecting and Terminating Devices. 13. IEEE C62.41- Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. 14. IEEE 142 - Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and

Commercial Power Systems.


CONTROLS 230900 - 3

a. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 15. NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Controls and Systems. 16. NEMA ST 1 - Specialty Transformers. 17. NCSBC Compliance, Energy: Performance of control system shall meet or

surpass the requirements of ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-1999. 18. CE 61326 19. C-Tick 20. cUL

1.6 SPECIFICATION NOMENCLATURE

A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows: 1. Actuator: Control device that opens or closes valve or damper in response to

control signal. 2. AI: Analog Input. 3. AO: Analog Output. 4. Analog: Continuously variable state over stated range of values. 5. BMS: Building Management System. 6. DDC: Direct Digital Control. 7. Discrete: Binary or digital state. 8. DI: Discrete Input. 9. DO: Discrete Output. 10. FC: Fail Closed position of control device or actuator. Device moves to closed

position on loss of control signal or energy source. 11. FO: Fail open (position of control device or actuator). Device moves to open

position on loss of control signal or energy source. 12. GUI: Graphical User Interface. 13. HVAC: Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 14. IDC: Interoperable Digital Controller. 15. ILC: Interoperable Lon Controller. 16. LAN: Local Area Network. 17. Modulating: Movement of a control device through an entire range of values,

proportional to an infinitely variable input value. 18. Motorized: Control device with actuator. 19. NAC: Network Area Controller. 20. NC: Normally closed position of switch after control signal is removed or

normally closed position of manually operated valves or dampers. 21. NO: Normally open position of switch after control signal is removed; or the

open position of a controlled valve or damper after the control signal is removed; or the usual position of a manually operated valve.

22. OSS: Operating System Server, host for system graphics, alarms, trends, etc. 23. Operator: Same as actuator. 24. PC: Personal Computer. 25. Peer-to-Peer: Mode of communication between controllers in which each

device connected to network has equal status and each shares its database values with all other devices connected to network.

26. P: Proportional control; control mode with continuous linear relationship between observed input signal and final controlled output element.

27. PI: Proportional-Integral control, control mode with continuous proportional output plus additional change in output based on both amount and duration of change in controller variable (reset control).


CONTROLS 230900 - 4

28. PICS: BACnet Product Interoperability Compliance Statement. 29. PID: Proportional-Integral-Derivative control, control mode with continuous

correction of final controller output element versus input signal based on proportional error, its time history (reset) and rate at which it's changing (derivative).

30. Point: Analog or discrete instrument with addressable database value. 31. WAN: Wide Area Network.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit under provisions of Section 15010.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

C. Submit documentation of contractor qualifications, including those indicated in "Quality Assurance" if requested by the A-E.

D. Shop drawings of the entire control system shall be submitted and shall consist of a complete list of equipment and materials, including manufacturers' catalog data sheets and installation instructions. Submit in printed electronic format. Samples of written Controller Checkout Sheets and Performance Verification Procedures for applications similar in scope shall be included for approval.

E. Shop drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, sequences of operation, control system bus layout and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown on the shop drawings.

F. Upon completion of the work, provide x complete sets of ' as-built' drawings and other project-specific documentation in 3-ring hard-backed binders and on Flash media.

G. Any deviations from these specifications or the work indicated on the drawings shall be clearly identified in the Submittals.


A. The Control System Contractor shall have a full service DDC office within 50 miles of the job site. This office shall be staffed with applications engineers, software engineers and field technicians. This office shall maintain parts inventory and shall have all testing and diagnostic equipment necessary to support this work, as well as staff trained in the use of this equipment.

B. Single Source Responsibility of Supplier: The Control System Contractor shall be responsible for the complete installation and proper operation of the control system. The Control System Contractor shall exclusively be in the regular and customary business of design, installation and service of computerized building management systems similar in size and complexity to the system specified. The Control System Contractor shall be the manufacturer of the primary DDC system components or


CONTROLS 230900 - 5

shall have been the authorized representative for the primary DDC components manufacturer for at least 5 years. All control panels shall be assembled by the Control System Contractor in a UL-Certified 508A panel shop.

C. Equipment and Materials: Equipment and materials shall be cataloged products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production and installation of HVAC control systems. Products shall be manufacturer's latest standard design and have been tested and proven in actual use.

1.9 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to starting work of this section.

1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Maintain integrity of shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

1.11 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to insure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers and structural and architectural features.

1.12 SEQUENCING

A. Ensure that products of this section are supplied to affected trades in time to prevent interruption of construction progress.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Honeywell;

B. Approved Installers shall be Honeywell Certified ACI / BCS contractors. 1. Wasatch Controls 2. Atkinson Electronics 3. Prior approved equal

C. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 15010.

2.2 GENERAL

A. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a network area controller, graphics and programming and other control devices for a complete system as specified herein.

B. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions


CONTROLS 230900 - 6

and data contained in the overall BMS.

2.3 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURE

A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system utilizing Open protocols in one open, interoperable system.

B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. Physical connection of any BACnet control equipment, such as chillers, shall be via Ethernet or IP.

C. All components and controllers supplied under this contract shall be true "peer-to-peer" communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring "polling" by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.

D. The supplied system shall incorporate the ability to access all data using HTML5 enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs or browser plug-ins. An Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on the Operating System Server located in the Facilities Office on the LAN. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.

E. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer's internal Intranet network. Systems employing a "flat" single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable. 1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point

of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.

2. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.

2.4 BAS SERVER HARDWARE

A. Minimum Computer Configuration (Hardware Independent). 1. Central Server. Owner shall provide a dedicated BAS server with configuration

that includes the following components as a minimum: 2. Processor: Intel Xeon CPU E5-2640 x64 (or better), compatible with dual- and

quad-core processors. 3. Memory: 2 GB or more recommended for large systems, 8 GB or more

recommended for the Windows 64-bit version. 4. Hard Drive: 4 GB minimum, more recommended depending on archiving

requirements. 5. Display: Video card and monitor capable of displaying 1024 x 768 pixel

resolution or greater. 6. Network Support: Ethernet adapter (10/100 Mb with RJ-45 connector). 7. Connectivity: Full-time high-speed ISP connection recommended for remote

site access (i.e. T1, ADSL, cable modem).

B. Standard Client: The thin-client Web Browser BAS GUI shall be Microsoft Internet


CONTROLS 230900 - 7

Explorer (10.0 or later) running on Microsoft 7+. No special software shall be required to be installed on the PCs used to access the BAS via a web browser.

2.5 SYSTEM NETWORK CONTROLLER (SNC)

A. These controllers are designed to manage communications between the programmable equipment controllers (PEC), application specific controllers (ASC) and advanced unitary controllers (AUC) which are connected to its communications trunks, manage communications between itself and other system network controllers (SNC) and with any operator workstations (OWS) that are part of the BAS, and perform control and operating strategies for the system based on information from any controller connected to the BAS.

B. The controllers shall be fully programmable to meet the unique requirements of the facility it shall control.

C. The controllers shall be capable of peer-to-peer communications with other SNC's and with any OWS connected to the BAS, whether the OWS is directly connected, connected via cellular modem or connected via the Internet.

D. The communication protocols utilized for peer-to-peer communications between SNC's will be Niagara 4 Fox, BACnet TCP/IP and SNMP or Lonworks, field verify. Use of a proprietary communication protocol for peer-to-peer communications between SNC's is not allowed.

E. The SNC shall employ a device count capacity license model that supports expansion capabilities.

F. The SNC shall be enabled to support and shall be licensed with the following Open protocol drivers (client and server) by default: 1. BACnet 2. Lon 3. MODBUS 4. SNMP 5. KNX

G. The SNC shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions. 2. Scheduling. 3. Trending. 4. Alarm monitoring and routing. 5. Time synchronization. 6. Integration of LonWorks, BACnet, and MODBUS controller data. 7. Network management functions for all SNC, PEC and ASC based devices.

H. The SNC shall provide the following hardware features as a minimum: 1. Two 10/100 Mbps Ethernet ports. 2. Two Isolated RS-485 ports with biasing switches. 3. 1 GB RAM 4. 4 GB Flash Total Storage / 2 GB User Storage 5. USB Flash Drive 6. High Speed Field Bus Expansion 7. -20-60°C Ambient Operating Temperature


CONTROLS 230900 - 8

8. Integrated 24 VAC/DC Global Power Supply 9. MicroSD Memory Card Employing Encrypted Safe Boot Technology

I. The SNC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 16 simultaneous users.

J. The SNC shall provide alarm recognition, storage, routing, management and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.

K. The SNC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via cellular modem, or wide-area network. 1. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and

acknowledgement requirements including but not limited to: a. Alarm. b. Return to normal. c. To default.

2. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: a. Screen message text. b. Email of complete alarm message to multiple recipients. c. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email

message. d. Graphics with flashing alarm object(s).

3. The following shall be recorded by the SNC for each alarm (at a minimum): a. Time and date. b. Equipment (air handler #, access way, etc.). c. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement.

L. Programming software and all controller "Setup Wizards" shall be embedded into the SNC.

M. The SNC shall support the following security functions. 1. Module code signing to verify the author of programming tool and confirm that

the code has not been altered or corrupted. 2. Role-Based Access Control (RBAC) for managing user roles and permissions. 3. Require users to use strong credentials. 4. Data in Motion and Sensitive Data at Rest be encrypted. 5. LDAP and Kerberos integration of access management.

N. The SNC shall support the following data modeling structures to utilize Search; Hierarchy; Template; and Permission functionality: 1. Metadata: Descriptive tags to define the structure of properties. 2. Tagging: Process to apply metadata to components 3. Tag Dictionary

O. The SNC shall employ template functionality. Templates are a containerized set of configured data tags, graphics, histories, alarms... that are set to be deployed as a unit based upon manufacturer’s controller and relationships. All lower level communicating controllers (PEC, AUC, AVAV, VFD…) shall have an associated template file for reuse on future project additions.


CONTROLS 230900 - 9

P. The SNC shall be provided with a 5 Year Software Maintenance license. Labor to implement not included.

2.6 PROGRAMMABLE EQUIPMENT CONTROLLER (PEC)

A. HVAC control shall be accomplished using LonMark or BACnet based devices where the application has a LonMark profile or BTL Listed PICS defined. Where LonMark devices are not available for a particular application, devices based on LonWorks shall be acceptable. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier shall provide an XIF file for the device. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara 4 Framework, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the "Sequence of Operation".

B. All PECs shall be application programmable and shall at all times maintain their certification. All control sequences within or programmed into the PEC shall be stored in non-volatile memory, which is not dependent upon the presence of a battery to be retained.

C. The PEC shall provide LED indication of communication and controller performance to the technician, without cover removal.

D. The PEC shall not require any external configuration tool or programming tool. All configuration and programming tasks shall be accomplished and accessible from within the Niagara 4 environment.

E. The following integral and remote Inputs/Outputs shall be supported per each PEC: 1. Eight integral dry contact digital inputs. 2. Any two digital inputs may be configured as pulse counters with a maximum

pulse read rate of 15 Hz. 3. Eight integral analog inputs (configurable as 0-10V, 0-10,000 ohm or, 20K

NTC). 4. Six integral 4-20 ma analog outputs. 5. Eight integral 24 Vac Triac digital outputs, configurable as maintained or

floating motor control outputs. 6. One integral 20 Vdc, 65-mA power supply for auxiliary devices. 7. If a 20 Vdc 65-mA power supply terminal is not integral to the PEC, provide at

each PEC a separate, fully isolated, enclosed, current limited and regulated UL listed auxiliary power supply for power to auxiliary devices.

F. Each PEC shall have expansion ability to support additional I/O requirements through the use of remote input/output modules.

G. PEC Controllers shall support at minimum the following control techniques: 1. General-purpose control loops that can incorporate Demand Limit Control

strategies, Set point reset, adaptive intelligent recovery, and time of day bypass.

2. General-purpose, non-linear control loops. 3. Start/stop Loops. 4. If/Then/Else logic loops. 5. Math Function loops (MIN, MAX, AVG, SUM, SUB, SQRT, MUL, DIV,


CONTROLS 230900 - 10

ENTHALPY).

2.7 ADVANCED UNITARY CONTROLLER (AUC)

A. The advanced unitary controller (AUC) platform shall be designed specifically to control HVAC - ventilation, filtration, heating, cooling, humidification, and distribution. Equipment includes: constant volume air handlers, VAV air handlers, packaged RTU, heat pumps, unit vents, fan coils, natural convection units and radiant panels. The control shall use LonMark or BACnet based devices where the application has a LonMark profile or BTL Listed PICS defined. Where LonMark devices are not available for a particular application, devices based on LonWorks shall be acceptable. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier shall provide an XIF file for the device. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara 4 Framework, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the "Sequence of Operation".

B. Minimum Requirements: 1. The controller shall be fully programmable with full functionality on any

Niagara 4 brand platform. a. Support downloads to the controller from any brand of Niagara 4

platform. b. Support uploads from the controller to any brand of Niagara 4 platform. c. Support simulation/debug mode of the controller. d. Maintain native GUI. e. Native function-block programming software and all controller “Setup

Wizards” shall be embedded within the Niagara 4 environment. 2. The controller shall be capable of either integrating with other devices or

stand-alone operation. 3. The controller shall have two microprocessors. The Host processor contains

on-chip FLASH program memory, FLASH information memory, and RAM to run the main HVAC application. The second processor for network communications. Controller memory minimum requirements include: a. FLASH Memory Capacity: 60 Kilobytes with 8 Kilobytes for application

program. b. FLASH Memory settings retained for ten years. c. RAM: 2 Kilobytes.

4. The controller shall have an internal time clock with the ability to automatically revert from a master time clock on failure. a. Operating Range: 24 hour, 365 day, multi-year calendar including day of

week and configuration for automatic day-light savings time adjustment to occur on configured start and stop dates.

b. Accuracy: ±1 minute per month at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C). c. Power Failure Backup: 24 hours at 32 degrees to 122 degrees F (0

degrees to 50 degrees C). 5. The controller shall have Significant Event Notification, Periodic Update

capability, and Failure Detect when network inputs fail to be detected within their configurable time frame.

6. The controller shall have an internal DC power supply to power external sensors.



a. Power Output: 20 VDC ±10% at 75 mA. 7. The controller shall have a visual indication (LED) of the status of the devise:

a. Controller operating normally. b. Controller in process of download. c. Controller in manual mode under control of software tool. d. Controller lost its configuration. e. No power to controller, low voltage, or controller damage. f. Processor and/or controller are not operating.

8. The minimum controller Environmental ratings. a. Operating Temperature Ambient Rating: -40 degrees to 150 degrees F

(-40 degrees to 65.5 degrees C). b. Storage Temperature Ambient Rating: -40 degrees to 150 degrees F (-

40 degrees to 65.5 degrees C). c. Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing.

9. The controller shall have the additional approval requirements, listings, and approvals: a. UL/cUL (E87741) listed under UL916 (Standard for Open Energy

Management Equipment) with plenum rating. b. CSA (LR95329-3) Listed. c. Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (radiated emissions)

requirements. d. Meets Canadian standard C108.8 (radiated emissions). e. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-1;

2001 (EU Immunity). f. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-3;

2001 (EU Emission). 10. The controller housing shall be UL plenum rated mounting to either a panel or

DIN rail (standard EN50022; 7.5mm x 35mm). 11. The controller shall have a mix of digital inputs (DI), digital Triac outputs (DO),

analog outputs (AO), and universal inputs (UI). a. Analog outputs (AO) shall be capable of being configured as digital

outputs (DO). b. Input and Output wiring terminal strips shall be removable from the

controller without disconnecting wiring. c. Input and Output wiring terminals shall be designated with color coded

labels. d. Universal inputs shall be capable of being configured as binary inputs,

resistive inputs, voltage inputs (0-10 VDC), or current inputs (4-20 mA). 12. The controller shall provide "continuous" automated loop tuning with an

Adaptive Integral Algorithm Control Loop. 13. The controller platform shall have standard HVAC application programs that

are modifiable to support both the traditional and specialized "sequence of operations" as outlined in Section 4. a. Discharge air control and low limit. b. Pressure-dependent dual duct without flow mixing. c. Variable air volume with return flow tracking. d. Economizer with differential enthalpy. e. Minimum airflow coordinated with CO2. f. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 2-pipe. g. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 2-pipe with face/bypass. h. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 4-pipe.



i. Unit ventilator cycle (1, 2, 3) 4-pipe with EOC valve.

2.8 ADVANCED VARIABLE AIR VOLUME CONTROLLER (AVAV)

A. The advanced VAV controller platform shall be designed specifically for room-level VAV control - pressure-independent air flow control, pressure dependent damper control, supply and exhaust pressurization/de-pressurization control; temperature, humidity, complex CO2, occupancy, and emergency control. Equipment includes: VAV terminal unit, VAV terminal unit with reheat, Series fan powered terminal unit, Parallel fan powered terminal unit, Supply and Exhaust air volume terminals and Constant volume dual-duct terminal unit. Control shall be accomplished using LonMark or BACnet based devices where the application has a LonMark profile or BTL Listed PICS defined. Where LonMark devices are not available for a particular application, devices based on LonWorks shall be acceptable. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier shall provide an XIF file for the device. The controller platform shall provide options and advanced system functions, programmable and configurable using Niagara 4 Framework, that allow standard and customizable control solutions required in executing the "Sequence of Operation".

B. Minimum Requirements: 1. The controller shall be fully programmable with full functionality on any

Niagara 4 brand platform. a. Support downloads to the controller from any brand of Niagara 4

platform. b. Support uploads from the controller to any brand of Niagara 4 platform. c. Support simulation/debug mode of the controller. d. Maintain native GUI. e. Native function-block programming embedded software and all

controller “Setup Wizards” shall be embedded within the Niagara 4 environment.

2. The controller shall be capable of either integrating with other devices or stand-alone room-level control operation.

3. The controller shall have an internal velocity pressure sensor. a. Sensor Type: Microbridge air flow sensor with dual integral restrictors. b. Operating Range: 0 to 1.5 inch H2O (0 to 374 Pa). c. Accuracy: ±2% of full scale at 32 degrees to 122 degrees F (0 degrees

to 50 degrees C); ±1% of full scale at null pressure. 4. The controller shall have two microprocessors. The Host processor contains

on-chip FLASH program memory, FLASH information memory, and RAM to run the main HVAC application. The second processor for network communications. a. FLASH Memory Capacity: 60 Kilobytes with 8 Kilobytes for application

program. b. FLASH Memory settings retained for ten years. c. RAM: 2 Kilobytes.

5. The controller shall have an internal time clock with the ability to automatically revert from a master time clock on failure. a. Operating Range: 24 hour, 365 day, multi-year calendar including day of

week and configuration for automatic day-light savings time adjustment to occur on configured start and stop dates.



b. Accuracy: ±1 minute per month at 77 degrees F (25 degrees C). c. Power Failure Backup: 24 hours at 32 degrees to 122 degrees F (0

degrees to 50 degrees C). 6. The controller shall have Significant Event Notification, Periodic Update

capability and Failure Detect when network inputs fail to be detected within their configurable time frame.

7. The controller shall have an internal DC power supply to power external sensors. a. Power Output: 20 VDC ±10% at 75 mA.

8. The controller shall have a visual indication (LED) of the status of the devise: a. Controller operating normally. b. Controller in process of download. c. Controller in manual mode under control of software tool. d. Controller lost its configuration. e. No power to controller, low voltage, or controller damage. f. Processor and/or controller are not operating.

9. The minimum controller Environmental ratings: a. Operating Temperature Ambient Rating: 32 degrees to 122 degrees F

(0 degrees to 50 degrees C). b. Storage Temperature Ambient Rating: 32 degrees to 122 degrees F (0

degrees to 50 degrees C). c. Relative Humidity: 5% to 95% non-condensing.

10. The controller shall have the additional approval requirements, listings, and approvals: a. UL/cUL (E87741) listed under UL916 (Standard for Open Energy

Management Equipment) with plenum rating. b. CSA (LR95329-3) Listed. c. Meets FCC Part 15, Subpart B, Class B (radiated emissions)

requirements. d. Meets Canadian standard C108.8 (radiated emissions). e. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-1;

2001 (EU Immunity). f. Conforms requirements European Consortium standard EN 61000-6-3;

2001 (EU Emission). 11. The controller housing shall be UL plenum rated mounting to either a panel or

DIN rail (standard EN50022; 7.5mm x 35mm). 12. The controller shall provide an integrated actuator option.

a. Actuator type: Series Floating. b. Rotation stroke: 95 degrees ±3 degrees for CW or CCW opening

dampers. c. Torque rating: 44 lb-inch (5 Nm). d. Run time for 90 degrees rotation: 90 seconds at 60 Hz.

13. The controller shall have digital inputs (DI), digital Triac outputs (DO), three analog outputs (AO), and universal inputs (UI). a. Analog outputs (AO) shall be capable of being configured as digital

outputs (DO). b. Input and Output wiring terminal strips shall be removable from the

controller without disconnecting wiring. c. Input and Output wiring terminals shall be designated with color coded

labels. 14. The controller shall provide "continuous" automated loop tuning with an



Adaptive Integral Algorithm Control Loop. 15. The controller shall have a loop execution response time of 1 second. 16. The controller platform shall have standard HVAC application programs that

are modifiable to support both the traditional and specialized "sequence of operations" as outlined in Section 4. a. VAV terminal unit. b. VAV terminal unit fan speed control. c. Series fan. d. Parallel fan. e. Regulated air volume (room pressurization/de-pressurization). f. CV dual-duct. g. Room CO2 control. h. Room Humidity. i. TOD occupancy sensor stand-by set points.

2.9 OTHER CONTROL SYSTEM HARDWARE

A. Motorized control dampers that will not be integral to the equipment shall be furnished by the Control System Contractor. Control damper frames shall be constructed of galvanized steel, formed into changes and welded or riveted. Dampers shall be galvanized, with nylon bearings. Blade edge seals shall be vinyl. Blade edge and tip seals shall be included for all dampers. Blades shall be 16-gauge minimum and 6 inches wide maximum and frame shall be of welded channel iron. Damper leakage shall not exceed 10 CFM per square foot, at 1.5 inches water gauge static pressure. Honeywell is basis of design.

B. Control damper actuators shall be furnished by the Control System Contractor. Two-position or proportional electric actuators shall be direct-mount type sized to provide a minimum of 5 in-lb torque per square foot of damper area. Damper actuators shall be spring return type. Operators shall be heavy-duty electronic type for positioning automatic dampers in response to a control signal. Motor shall be of sufficient size to operate damper positively and smoothly to obtain correct sequence as indicated. All applications requiring proportional operation shall utilize truly proportional electric actuators. Honeywell is basis of design.

C. Control Valves: Control valves shall be 2-way or 3-way pattern as shown and constructed for tight shutoff at the pump shut-off head or steam relief valve pressure. Control valves shall operate satisfactorily against system pressures and differentials. Two-position valves shall be ' line' size. Proportional control valves shall be sized for a maximum pressure drop of 5.0 psi at rated flow (unless otherwise noted or scheduled on the drawings). Valves with sizes up to and including 2 inches (51 mm) shall be "screwed" configuration and 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) and larger valves shall be "flanged" configuration. All control valves, including terminal unit valves, less than 2 inches (51 mm) shall be globe valves. Electrically-actuated control valves shall include spring return type actuators sized for tight shut-off against system pressures (as specified above) and, when specified, shall be furnished with integral switches for indication of valve position (open-closed). Pneumatic actuators for valves, when utilized, shall be sized for tight shut-off against system pressures (as specified above). Honeywell is basis of design.

D. Control Valve Actuators: Actuators for VAV terminal unit heating coils shall be "drive-open; drive-closed" type. All actuators shall have inherent current limiting



motor protection. Valve actuators shall be 24-volt, electronic type, modulating or two-position as required for the correct operating sequence. Actuators on valves needing ' fail-safe' operation shall have spring return to Normal position. Modulating valves shall be positive positioning in response to the signal. All valve actuators shall be UL listed. Honeywell is basis of design.

E. All control valves 2-1/2 inches (63.5 mm) or larger shall have position indication. All hot water control valves shall be Normally-Open arrangement; all chilled water control valves shall be Normally-Closed arrangement. Honeywell is basis of design.

F. Wall Mount Room Temperature sensors: Each room temperature sensor shall provide temperature indication to the digital controller, provide the capability for a software-limited occupant set point adjustment (warmer-cooler slider bar or switch) and limited operation override capability. Room Temperature Sensors shall be 20,000-ohm thermistor type with a temperature range of -40 to 140 degrees F (-38 to 60 degrees C). The sensor shall be complete with a decorative cover and suitable for mounting over a standard electrical utility box. These devices shall have an accuracy of 0.5 degrees F (.024 degrees C) over the entire range. Honeywell is basis of design.

G. Duct-mounted and Outside Air Temperature Sensors: 20,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors with an accuracy of ±; 0.2 degrees C. Outside air sensors shall include an integral sun shield. Duct-mounted sensors shall have an insertion measuring probe of a length appropriate for the duct size, with a temperature range of -40 to 160 degrees F(-38 to 71 degrees C) The sensor shall include a utility box and a gasket to prevent air leakage and vibration noise. For all mixed air and preheat air applications, install bendable averaging duct sensors with a minimum 8 feet (2438 mm) long sensor element. These devices shall have accuracy of 0.5 degrees F (.024 degrees C) over the entire range. Honeywell is basis of design.

H. Current Sensitive Switches: Solid state, split core current switch that operates when the current level (sensed by the internal current transformer) exceeds the adjustable trip point. Current switch to include an integral LED for indication of trip condition and a current level below trip set point. Honeywell is basis of design.

I. Differential Analog (duct) Static Pressure Transmitters Provide a pressure transmitter with integral capacitance type sensing and solid-state circuitry. Accuracy shall be plus or minus 1% of full range; range shall be selected for the specific application. Provide zero and span adjustment capability. Device shall have integral static pickup tube. Honeywell is basis of design.

J. Differential Air Pressure Switches: Provide SPDT type, UL-approved, and selected for the appropriate operating range where applied. Switches shall have adjustable set points and barbed pressure tips. Honeywell is basis of design.

K. Water Flow Switches: Provide a SPST type contact switch with bronze paddle blade, sized for the actual pipe size at the location. If installed outdoors, provide a NEMA-4 enclosure. Flow switch shall be UL listed.

L. Temperature Control Panels: Furnish temperature control panels of code gauge steel with locking doors for mounting all devices as shown. All electrical devices within a control panel shall be factory wired. Control panel shall be assembled by



the BMS in a UL-Certified 508A panel shop. A complete set of ' as-built' control drawings (relating to the controls within that panel) shall be furnished within each control panel.

M. Pipe and Duct Temperature sensing elements: 20,000-ohm thermistor temperature sensors with and accuracy of ±1% accuracy. Their range shall be -5 to 250 degrees F (-20 to 121 degrees C). Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they are capable of sensing the range expected for the point at the specified accuracy. Thermal wells with heat conductive gel shall be included. Honeywell is basis of design.

N. Low Air Temperature Sensors: Provide SPST type switch, with 15 to 55 degrees F (-9 to 13 degrees C), range, vapor-charged temperature sensor. Honeywell model L482A, or approved equivalent.

O. Relays: Start/stop relay model shall provide either momentary or maintained switching action as appropriate for the motor being started. All relays shall be plugged in, interchangeable, mounted on a sub base and wired to numbered terminals strips. Relays installed in panels shall all be DPDT with indicating lamp. Relays installed outside of controlled devices shall be enclosed in a NEMA enclosure suitable for the location. Relays shall be labeled with UR symbol. RIB-style relays are acceptable for remote enable/disable.

P. Emergency Stop Switches: Provide toggle-type switch with normally-closed contact. Switch shall be labeled "AIR HANDLER EMERGENCY SHUTOFF, NORMAL - OFF.".

Q. Transducers: Differential pressure transducers shall be electronic with a 4-20 mA output signal compatible to the Direct Digital Controller. Wetted parts shall be stainless steel. Unit shall be designed to operate in the pressure ranges involved.

R. Control Power Transformers: Provide step-down transformers for all DDC controllers and devices as required. Transformers shall be sized for the load, but shall be sized for 50 watts, minimum. Transformers shall be UL listed Class 2 type, for 120 VAC/24 VAC operation. Honeywell is basis of design.

S. Line voltage protection: All DDC system control panels that are powered by 120 VAC circuits shall be provided with surge protection. This protection is in addition to any internal protection provided by the manufacturer. The protection shall meet UL, ULC 1449, IEEE C62.41B. A grounding conductor, (minimum 12 AWG), shall be brought to each control panel.

2.10 BAS SERVER & WEB BROWSER GUI - SYSTEM OVERVIEW

A. The BAS Contractor shall provide system software based on server/thin-client architecture, designed around the open standards of web technology. The BAS server shall communicate using Ethernet and TCP. Server shall be accessed using a web browser over Owner intranet and remotely over the Internet.

B. The intent of the thin-client architecture is to provide the operator(s) complete access to the BAS system via a web browser. The thin-client web browser Graphical User Interface (GUI) shall be browser and operating system agnostic, meaning it will support HTML5 enabled browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface



and configuration programs or browser plug-ins. Microsoft, Firefox, and Chrome browsers (current released versions), and Windows as well as non-Window operating systems.

C. The BAS server software shall support at least the following server platforms (Windows 7, 8.1, Server 12). The BAS server software shall be developed and tested by the manufacturer of the system stand-alone controllers and network controllers/routers.

D. The web browser GUI shall provide a completely interactive user interface and shall provide a HTML5 experience that supports the following features as a minimum: 1. Trending. 2. Scheduling. 3. Electrical demand limiting. 4. Duty Cycling. 5. Downloading Memory to field devices. 6. Real time 'live' Graphic Programs. 7. Tree Navigation. 8. Parameter change of properties. 9. Set point adjustments. 10. Alarm / event information. 11. Configuration of operators. 12. Execution of global commands. 13. Add, delete, and modify graphics and displayed data.

E. Software Components: All software shall be the most current version. All software components of the BAS system software shall be provided and installed as part of this project. BAS software components shall include: 1. Server Software, Database and Web Browser Graphical User Interface. 2. 5 Year Software Maintenance license. Labor to implement not included. 3. Embedded System Configuration Utilities for future modifications to the

system and controllers. 4. Embedded Graphical Programming Tools. 5. Embedded Direct Digital Control software. 6. Embedded Application Software.

F. BAS Server Database: The BAS server software shall utilize a Java Database Connectivity (JDBC) compatible database such as: MS SQL 8.0, Oracle 8i or IBM DB2. BAS systems written to Non -Standard and/or Proprietary databases are NOT acceptable.

G. Thin Client - Web Browser Based: The GUI shall be thin client or browser based and shall meet the following criteria: 1. Web Browser's for PC's: Only the current released browser

(Explorer/Firefox/Chrome) will be required as the GUI and a valid connection to the server network. No installation of any custom software shall be required on the operator's GUI workstation/client. Connection shall be over an intranet or the Internet.

2. Secure Socket Layers: Communication between the Web Browser GUI and BAS server shall offer encryption using 128-bit encryption technology within Secure Socket Layers (SSL). Communication protocol shall be Hyper-Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP).



2.11 WEB BROWSER GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE

A. Web Browser Navigation: The Thin Client web browser GUI shall provide a comprehensive user interface. Using a collection of web pages, it shall be constructed to "feel" like a single application, and provide a complete and intuitive mouse/menu driven operator interface. It shall be possible to navigate through the system using a web browser to accomplish requirements of this specification. The Web Browser GUI shall (as a minimum) provide for navigation, and for display of animated graphics, schedules, alarms/events, live graphic programs, active graphic set point controls, configuration menus for operator access, reports and reporting actions for events.

B. Login: On launching the web browser and selecting the appropriate domain name or IP address, the operator shall be presented with a login page that will require a login name and strong password. Navigation in the system shall be dependent on the operator's role-based application control privileges.

C. Navigation: Navigation through the GUI shall be accomplished by clicking on the appropriate level of a navigation tree (consisting of an expandable and collapsible tree control like Microsoft's Explorer program) and/or by selecting dynamic links to other system graphics. Both the navigation tree and action pane shall be displayed simultaneously, enabling the operator to select a specific system or equipment and view the corresponding graphic. The navigation tree shall as a minimum provide the following views: Geographic, Network, Groups and Configuration. 1. Geographic View shall display a logical geographic hierarchy of the system

including: cities, sites, buildings, building systems, floors, equipment and objects.

2. Groups View shall display Scheduled Groups and custom reports. 3. Configuration View shall display all the configuration categories (Operators,

Schedule, Event, Reporting and Roles).

D. Action Pane: The Action Pane shall provide several functional views for each subsystem specified. A functional view shall be accessed by clicking on the corresponding button: 1. Graphics: Using graphical format suitable for display in a web browser,

graphics shall include aerial building/campus views, color building floor-plans, equipment drawings, active graphic set point controls, web content and other valid HTML elements. The data on each graphic page shall automatically refresh.

2. Dashboards: User customizable data using drag and drop HTML5 elements. Shall include Web Charts, Gauges, and other custom developed widgets for web browser. User shall have ability to save custom dashboards.

3. Search: User shall have multiple options for searching data based upon Tags. Associated equipment, real time data, Properties, and Trends shall be available in result.

4. Properties: Shall include graphic controls and text for the following: Locking or overriding objects, demand strategies, and any other valid data required for setup. Changes made to the properties pages shall require the operator to depress an 'accept/cancel' button.

5. Schedules: Shall be used to create, modify/edit and view schedules based on the systems hierarchy (using the navigation tree).

6. Alarms: Shall be used to view alarm information geographically (using the



navigation tree), acknowledge alarms, sort alarms by category, actions and verify reporting actions.

7. Charting: Shall be used to display associated trend and historical data, modify colors, date range, axis and scaling. User shall have ability to create HTML charts through web browser without utilizing chart builder. User shall be able to drag and drop single or multiple data points, including schedules, and apply status colors for analysis.

8. Logic - Live Graphic Programs: Shall be used to display' live' graphic programs of the control algorithm, (micro block programming) for the mechanical/electrical system selected in the navigation tree.

9. Other actions such as Print, Help, Command, and Logout shall be available via a drop-down window.

E. Color Graphics: The Web Browser GUI shall make extensive use of color in the graphic pane to communicate information related to set points and comfort. Animated .gifs or .jpg, vector scalable, active set point graphic controls shall be used to enhance usability. Graphics tools used to create Web Browser graphics shall be non-proprietary and conform to the following basic criteria: 1. Display Size: The GUI workstation software shall graphically display in a

minimum of 1024 by 768 pixels 24 bit True Color. 2. General Graphic: General area maps shall show locations of controlled

buildings in relation to local landmarks. 3. Color Floor Plans: Floor plan graphics shall show heating and cooling zones

throughout the buildings in a range of colors, as selected by Owner. Provide a visual display of temperature relative to their respective set points. The colors shall be updated dynamically as a zone's actual comfort condition changes.

4. Mechanical Components: Mechanical system graphics shall show the type of mechanical system components serving any zone through the use of a pictorial representation of components. Selected I/O points being controlled or monitored for each piece of equipment shall be displayed with the appropriate engineering units. Animation shall be used for rotation or moving mechanical components to enhance usability. .

5. Minimum System Color Graphics: Color graphics shall be selected and displayed via a web browser for the following: a. Each piece of equipment monitored or controlled including each terminal

unit. b. Each building. c. Each floor and zone controlled.

F. Hierarchical Schedules: Utilizing the Navigation Tree displayed in the web browser GUI, an operator (with proper access credentials) shall be able to define a Normal, Holiday or Override schedule for an individual piece of equipment or room, or choose to apply a hierarchical schedule to the entire system, site or floor area. For example, Independence Day ' Holiday' for every level in the system would be created by clicking at the top of the geographic hierarchy defined in the Navigation Tree. No further operator intervention would be required and every control module in the system with would be automatically downloaded with the ' Independence Day' Holiday. All schedules that affect the system/area/equipment highlighted in the Navigation Tree shall be shown in a summary schedule table and graph. 1. Schedules: Schedules shall comply with the LonWorks and BACnet

standards, (Schedule Object, Calendar Object, Weekly Schedule property and



Exception Schedule property) and shall allow events to be scheduled based on: a. Types of schedule shall be Normal, Holiday or Override. b. A specific date. c. A range of dates. d. Any combination of Month of Year (1-12, any), Week of Month (1-5, last,

any), Day of Week (M-Sun, Any). e. Wildcard (example, allow combinations like second Tuesday of every

month). 2. Schedule Categories: The system shall allow operators to define and edit

scheduling categories (different types of "things" to be scheduled; for example, lighting, HVAC occupancy, etc.). The categories shall include: name, description, icon (to display in the hierarchy tree when icon option is selected) and type of value to be scheduled.

3. Schedule Groups: In addition to hierarchical scheduling, operators shall be able to define functional Schedule Groups, comprised of an arbitrary group of areas/rooms/equipment scattered throughout the facility and site. For example, the operator shall be able to define an ' individual tenant' group - who may occupy different areas within a building or buildings. Schedules applied to the ' tenant group' shall automatically be downloaded to control modules affecting spaces occupied by the ' tenant group'.

4. Intelligent Scheduling: The control system shall be intelligent enough to automatically turn on any supporting equipment needed to control the environment in an occupied space. If the operator schedules an individual room in a VAV system for occupancy, for example, the control logic shall automatically turn on the VAV air handling unit, chiller, boiler and/or any other equipment required to maintain the specified comfort and environmental conditions within the room.

5. Partial Day Exceptions: Schedule events shall be able to accommodate a time range specified by the operator (ex: board meeting from 6 pm to 9 pm overrides Normal schedule for conference room).

6. Schedule Summary Graph: The schedule summary graph shall clearly show Normal versus Holiday versus Override Schedules and the net operating schedule that results from all contributing schedules. Note: In case of priority conflict between schedules at the different geographic hierarchy, the schedule for the more detailed geographic level shall apply.

G. Alarms: Alarms associated with a specific system, area, or equipment selected in the Navigation Tree, shall be displayed in the Action Pane by selecting an ' Alarms' view. Alarms, and reporting actions shall have the following capabilities: 1. Alarms View: Each Alarm shall display an Alarms Category (using a different

icon for each alarm category), date/time of occurrence, current status, alarm report and a bold URL link to the associated graphic for the selected system, area or equipment. The URL link shall indicate the system location, address and other pertinent information. An operator shall easily be able to sort events, edit event templates and categories, acknowledge or force a return to normal in the Events View as specified in this section.

2. Alarm Categories: The operator shall be able to create, edit or delete alarm categories such as HVAC, Maintenance, Fire, or Generator. An icon shall be associated with each alarm category, enabling the operator to easily sort through multiple events displayed.



3. Alarm Templates: Alarm template shall define different types of alarms and their associated properties. As a minimum, properties shall include a reference name, verbose description, severity of alarm, acknowledgement requirements, and high/low limit and out of range information.

4. Alarm Areas: Alarm Areas enable an operator to assign specific Alarm Categories to specific Alarm Reporting Actions. For example, it shall be possible for an operator to assign all HVAC Maintenance Alarm on the 1st floor of a building to email the technician responsible for maintenance. The Navigation Tree shall be used to setup Alarm Areas in the Graphic Pane.

5. Alarm Time/Date Stamp: All events shall be generated at the DDC control module level and comprise the Time/Date Stamp using the standalone control module time and date.

6. Alarm Configuration: Operators shall be able to define the type of Alarm generated per object. A ' network' view of the Navigation Tree shall expose all objects and their respective Alarm Configuration. Configuration shall include assignment of Alarm, type of Acknowledgement and notification for return to normal or fault status.

7. Alarm Summary Counter: The view of Alarm in the Graphic Pane shall provide a numeric counter, indicating how many Alarms are active (in alarm), require acknowledgement and total number of Alarms in the BAS Server database.

8. Alarm Auto-Deletion: Alarms that are acknowledged and closed shall be auto-deleted from the database and archived to a text file after an operator defined period.

9. Alarm Reporting Actions: Alarm Reporting Actions specified shall be automatically launched (under certain conditions) after an Alarm is received by the BAS server software. Operators shall be able to easily define these Reporting Actions using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane through the web browser GUI. Reporting Actions shall be as follows: a. Print: Alarm information shall be printed to the BAS server's PC or a

networked printer. b. Email: Email shall be sent via any POP3-compatible e-mail server (most

Internet Service Providers use POP3). Email messages may be copied to several email accounts. Note: Email reporting action shall also be used to support alphanumeric paging services, where email servers support pagers.

c. File Write: The ASCII File write reporting action shall enable the operator to append operator defined alarm information to any alarm through a text file. The alarm information that is written to the file shall be completely definable by the operator. The operator may enter text or attach other data point information (such as AHU discharge temperature and fan condition upon a high room temperature alarm).

d. Write Property: The write property reporting action updates a property value in a hardware module.

e. SNMP: The Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) reporting action sends an SNMP trap to a network in response to receiving an alarm.

f. Run External Program: The Run External Program reporting action launches specified program in response to an event.

H. Trends: As system is engineered, all points shall be enabled to trend. Trends shall both be displayed and user configurable through the Web Browser GUI. Trends



shall comprise analog, digital or calculated points simultaneously. A trend log's properties shall be editable using the Navigation Tree and Graphic Pane. 1. Viewing Trends: The operator shall have the ability to view trends by using the

Navigation Tree and selecting a Trends button in the Graphic Pane. The system shall allow y- and x-axis maximum ranges to be specified and shall be able to simultaneously graphically display multiple trends per graph.

2. Local Trends: Trend data shall be collected locally by Multi-Equipment/Single Equipment general-purpose controllers, and periodically uploaded to the BAS server if historical trending is enabled for the object. Trend data, including run time hours and start time date shall be retained in non-volatile module memory. Systems that rely on a gateway/router to run trends are NOT acceptable.

3. Resolution. Sample intervals shall be as small as one second. Each trended point will have the ability to be trended at a different trend interval. When multiple points are selected for displays that have different trend intervals, the system will automatically scale the axis.

4. Dynamic Update. Trends shall be able to dynamically update at operator-defined intervals.

5. Zoom/Pan. It shall be possible to zoom-in on a particular section of a trend for more detailed examination and ' pan through' historical data by simply scrolling the mouse.

6. Numeric Value Display. It shall be possible to pick any sample on a trend and have the numerical value displayed.

7. Copy/Paste. The operator shall have the ability to pan through a historical trend and copy the data viewed to the clipboard using standard keystrokes (i.e. CTRL+C, CTRL+V).

I. Security Access: Systems that Security access from the web browser GUI to BAS server shall require a Login Name and Strong Password. Access to different areas of the BAS system shall be defined in terms of Role-Based Access Control privileges as specified: 1. Roles: Roles shall reflect the actual roles of different types of operators. Each

role shall comprise a set of ' easily understood English language' privileges. Roles shall be defined in terms of View, Edit and Function Privileges. a. View Privileges shall comprise: Navigation, Network, and Configuration

Trees, Operators, Roles and Privileges, Alarm/Event Template and Reporting Action.

b. Edit Privileges shall comprise: Set point, Tuning and Logic, Manual Override, and Point Assignment Parameters.

c. Function Privileges shall comprise: Alarm/Event Acknowledgement, Control Module Memory Download, Upload, Schedules, Schedule Groups, Manual Commands, Print and Alarm/Event Maintenance.

2. Geographic Assignment of Roles: Roles shall be geographically assigned using a similar expandable/collapsible navigation tree. For example, it shall be possible to assign two HVAC Technicians with similar competencies (and the same operator defined HVAC Role) to different areas of the system.

2.12 GRAPHICAL PROGRAMMING

A. The system software shall include a Graphic Programming Language (GPL) for all DDC control algorithms resident in all control modules. Any system that does not



use a drag and drop method of graphical icon programming shall not be accepted. All systems shall use a GPL method used to create a sequence of operations by assembling graphic microblocks that represent each of the commands or functions necessary to complete a control sequence. Microblocks represent common logical control devices used in conventional control systems, such as relays, switches, high signal selectors etc., in addition to the more complex DDC and energy management strategies such as PID loops and optimum start. Each microblock shall be interactive and contain the programming necessary to execute the function of the device it represents.

B. Graphic programming shall be performed while on screen and using a mouse; each microblock shall be selected from a microblock library and assembled with other microblocks necessary to complete the specified sequence. Microblocks are then interconnected on screen using graphic "wires," each forming a logical connection. Once assembled, each logical grouping of microblocks and their interconnecting wires then forms a graphic function block which may be used to control any piece of equipment with a similar point configuration and sequence of operation.

C. Graphic Sequence: The clarity of the graphic sequence shall be such that the operator has the ability to verify that system programming meets the specifications, without having to learn or interpret a manufacturer's unique programming language. The graphic programming shall be self-documenting and provide the operator with an understandable and exact representation of each sequence of operation.

D. GPL Capabilities: The following is a minimum definition of the capabilities of the Graphic Programming software: 1. Function Block (FB): Shall be a collection of points, microblocks and wires

which have been connected together for the specific purpose of controlling a piece of HVAC equipment or a single mechanical system.

2. Logical I/O: Input/Output points shall interface with the control modules in order to read various signals and/or values or to transmit signal or values to controlled devices.

3. Microblocks: Shall be software devices that are represented graphically and may be connected together to perform a specified sequence. A library of microblocks shall be submitted with the control contractors bid.

4. Wires: Shall be Graphical elements used to form logical connections between microblocks and between logical I/O.

5. Reference Labels: Labels shall be similar to wires in that they are used to form logical connections between two points. Labels shall form a connection by reference instead of a visual connection, i.e. two points labeled 'A' on a drawing are logically connected even though there is no wire between them.

6. Parameter: A parameter shall be a value that may be tied to the input of a microblock.

7. Properties: Dialog boxes shall appear after a microblock has been inserted which has editable parameters associated with it. Default parameter dialog boxes shall contain various editable and non-editable fields, and shall contain 'push buttons' for the purpose of selecting default parameter settings.

8. Icon: An icon shall be graphic representation of a software program. Each graphic microblock has an icon associated with it that graphically describes its function.

9. Menu-bar Icon: Shall be an icon that is displayed on the menu bar on the GPL



screen, which represents its associated graphic microblock. 10. Live Graphical Programs: The Graphic Programming software shall support a '

live' mode, where all input/output data, calculated data and set points shall be displayed in a ' live' real-time mode.

2.13 LONWORKS NETWORK MANAGEMENT

A. Systems requiring the use of third-party LonWorks network management tools shall not be accepted.

B. Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding.

C. The Network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to reset devices and to view health and status counters within devices.

D. These tools shall provide the ability to "learn" an existing LonWorks network, regardless of what network management tool(s) were used to install the existing network, so that existing LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a single network management database.

E. The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller (NAC), ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network management database at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at all times and within the control system shall not be accepted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 GENERAL

A. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and as detailed on the project drawing set.

B. Line and low voltage electrical connections to control equipment shown specified or shown on the control diagrams shall be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor in accordance with these specifications.

C. Equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractor that is normally wired before



installation shall be furnished completely wired. Control wiring normally performed in the field will be furnished and installed by the Control System Contractor.

D. All control devices mounted on the face of control panels shall be clearly identified as to function and system served with permanently engraved phenolic labels.

3.4 WIRING

A. All electrical control wiring to the control panels shall be the responsibility of the Control System Contractor.

B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the Project Electrical Specifications (Division 16), the National Electrical Code and any applicable local codes. All control wiring shall be installed in raceways.

C. Excess wire shall not be looped or coiled in the controller cabinet.

D. Incorporate electrical noise suppression techniques in relay control circuits.

E. There shall be no drilling on the controller cabinet after the controls are mounted inside.

F. Careful stripping of wire while inside the cabinet is required to ensure that no wire strand fragments land on circuit boards.

G. Use manufacturer-specified wire for all network connections.

H. Use approved optical isolation and lightning protection when penetrating building envelope.

I. Read installation instructions carefully. Any unavoidable deviations shall be approved by owner's rep prior to installation.

3.5 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the Control System Contractor shall load all system software and start-up the system. The Control System Contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications.

B. The Control System Contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components, routines and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation.

C. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the Control System Contractor has performed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. System acceptance shall be contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies.

3.6 OPERATOR TRAINING



A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the Control System hardware and software has been established, the Control System Contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware, software and accessories.

B. The Control System Contractor shall provide 48 total hours of comprehensive training in multiple sessions for system orientation, product maintenance and troubleshooting, programming and engineering. These classes are to be spread out during the 1st year warranty period. The first class starting after final commissioning and the last class is to be in the last month of 1-year warranty period.

3.7 WARRANTY PERIOD SERVICES

A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance.

B. Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the BMS due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly repaired or replaced by the Control System Contractor at no expense to the Owner.

C. Maintenance of Computer Software Programs: The Control System Contractor shall maintain all software during the standard first year warranty period. In addition, all factory or sub-vendor upgrades to software during the first year warranty period shall be added to the systems, when they become available, at no additional cost. In addition to first year standard warranty, software provided by Control System Contractor shall come with a 5 Year Software Maintenance license. All SNC and BAS Servers are included in this coverage. Labor to implement upgrades in years two through five are not included in standard warranty.

D. Maintenance of Control Hardware: The Control System Contractor shall inspect, repair, replace, adjust, and calibrate, as required, the controllers, control devices and associated peripheral units during the warranty period. The Control System Contractor shall then furnish a report describing the status of the equipment, problem areas (if any) noticed during service work, and description of the corrective actions taken. The report shall clearly certify that all hardware is functioning correctly.

E. Service Period: Calls for service by the Owner shall be honored within 24 hours and are not to be considered as part of routine maintenance.

F. Service Documentation: A copy of the service report associated with each owner-initiated service call shall be provided to the owner.

3.8 WARRANTY ACCESS

A. The Owner shall grant to the Control System Contractor reasonable access to the BMS during the warranty period. Remote access to the BMS (for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period) will be allowed.

3.9 OPERATION & MAINTENANCE MANUALS



A. See Division 1 for requirements. O&M manuals shall include the following elements, as a minimum: 1. As-built control drawings for all equipment. 2. As-built Network Communications Diagram. 3. General description and specifications for all components. 4. Completed Performance Verification sheets. 5. Completed Controller Checkout/Calibration Sheets.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

PART 4 – SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

4.1 Terminal Boxes

A. For each system listed, provide the sequence of operation as stated in this section. 1. Dual Duct variable volume mixing boxes:

a. Modulate heating damper to maintain heating set point, and modulate cooling damper to maintain cooling set point. When heating, the cooling damper shall be shut to minimum cold deck position (0% call shall be 10% minimum adj.). When heating is satisfied, the hot deck shall be shut completely. When satisfied, modulate both dampers as necessary to mix and maintain minimum airflow of 30% adj. See diagram.

2. Single duct cooling only variable volume boxes: a. Modulate between minimum ventilation and maximum cooling position as

necessary to maintain cooling temperature set point. 3. When unoccupied, the control sequence shall be the same, but the temperature set point shall change to an unoccupied / standby temperature set



point. Initial unoccupied temp set points shall be 80 degrees cooling and 64 degrees heating adj.

4.2 Fan Coil Units

A. Cooling only fan coil units shall cycle fan and chilled water valve to maintain space temperature set point.



METAL DUCTS 233113 - 1

SECTION 233113 - METAL DUCTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings. 3. Double-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings. 4. Sheet metal materials. 5. Duct liner. 6. Sealants and gaskets. 7. Hangers and supports.


1. Division 22 and 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct-mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.

2. Division 22 and 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1. Static-Pressure Classes:

a. Supply Ducts (except in Mechanical Rooms): 2-inch wg. b. Supply Ducts (Upstream from Air Terminal Units): 3-inch wg. c. Supply Ducts (Downstream from Air Terminal Units): 1-inch wg. d. Supply Ducts (in Mechanical Equipment Rooms): 2-inch wg. e. Return Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg. f. Exhaust Ducts (Negative Pressure): 1-inch wg.

2. Leakage Class:



a. Round Supply-Air Duct: 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg. b. Flat-Oval Supply-Air Duct: 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg. c. Rectangular Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg. d. Flexible Supply-Air Duct: 6 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports and seismic restraints shall withstand the effects of gravity and seismic loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" SMACNA's "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems."

1. Seismic Hazard Level A: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.48. 2. Seismic Hazard Level B: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.30. 3. Seismic Hazard Level C: Seismic force to weight ratio, 0.15.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products:

1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. 3. Seismic-restraint devices.

B. Welding certificates.

C. Field quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. 2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum

supports. 3. AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-4, "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."



C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 1-5, "Longitudinal Seams - Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 2, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. f. Metco. g. Prior approved equal.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter (diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct).

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.



2. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

E. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 DOUBLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Lindab Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. SEMCO Incorporated. 4. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 5. Metco. 6. Prior approved equal.

B. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter (diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct) of the inner duct.

C. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

1. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Transverse Joints - Round Duct," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

a. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.

2. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Seams - Round Duct and Fittings," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

a. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

b. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams.



3. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch perforated galvanized sheet steel having 3/32-inch- diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent.

E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."

1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation.

3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1.

2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.

1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.5 DUCT LINER

A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."




a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. e. Prior approved equal. f. Maximum Thermal Conductivity:

1) Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2) Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.

2. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems.

3. Solvent-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916.

4. Duct insulation shall have a minimum R value = 5 for installation in an unconditioned space, and a minimum R value = 8 for installation outdoors.

B. Insulation Pins and Washers:

1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.

2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.

C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-19, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."

1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited.

2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing.

3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure

butted-edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners

of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.



6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.

7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.

8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations:

a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher

than 2500 fpm or where indicated.

9. Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation.

a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.

10. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.

2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare),

stainless steel, or aluminum sheets.

C. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS.



4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O.

D. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

E. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for 10-inch wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.

2. EPDM O-ring to seal in concave bead in coupling or fitting spigot. 3. Double-lipped, EPDM O-ring seal, mechanically fastened to factory-fabricated

couplings and fitting spigots.

2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. 3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc

chromate.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.

D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines.

G. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building.

H. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

I. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

J. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

K. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Division 22 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

L. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

3.2 SEAM AND JOINT SEALING

A. Seal duct seams and joints for duct static-pressure and leakage classes specified in "Performance Requirements" Article, according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 1-2, "Standard Duct Sealing Requirements," unless otherwise indicated.



1. For static-pressure classes 1- and 1/2-inch wg, comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Seal Class C, except as follows:

a. Ducts that are located directly in zones they serve.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and

completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate

concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 4-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 4-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Division 22 and 23 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.




A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." 2. Test the following systems:

a. Supply air.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements.

4. Test for leaks before insulation application. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system

or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test entire system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness

according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.


3.6 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Division 22 and 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:



1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling

supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling

plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if

fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris.

3.7 DUCT SCHEDULE

A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel:

B. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel. 2. Stainless-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel.



3. Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized sheet steel coated with zinc chromate.

C. Liner:

1. Supply- and Return-Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I.

D. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation:

1. Supply- and Return-Air Ducts: 1 inch thick.

E. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. 2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two

vanes. 3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 2-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."

2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-3, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow.



2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam.

F. Branch Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-6, "Branch Connections."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-5, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.

G. Duct Schedule

1. Rectangular duct with liner:

a. Low pressure supply and return.

2. Rectangular duct wrapped with insulation:

a. Low pressure exhaust and fresh air.

3. Single wall round with wrapped insulation.

a. Low pressure supply and return.

4. Double wall round and flat oval:

a. Medium pressure supply (upstream of VAV).



DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300 - 1

SECTION 233300 - DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. High Efficiency Take-Offs. 3. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 4. Turning vanes. 5. Duct-mounting access doors. 6. Flexible connectors. 7. Flexible ducts. 8. Duct accessory hardware.


1. Division 22 and 23 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" for electric and pneumatic damper actuators.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Volume dampers. 2. High Efficiency Take-Offs. 3. Combination fire and smoke dampers. 4. Duct silencers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct-mounting access doors. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Flexible ducts.


A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."



1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Fusible Links: Furnish quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers specified.

2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the manufacturers specified.

2.2 SHEET METAL MATERIALS

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality; complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M and having G60 coating designation; ducts shall have mill-phosphatized finish for surfaces exposed to view.

C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts.

D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

2.3 VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. American Warming and Ventilating. 3. Clifco 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Leader 6. McGill AirFlow Corporation.



7. METALAIRE, Inc. 8. Nailor Industries Inc. 9. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 10. Ruskin Company. 11. Vent Products Company, Inc. 12. Air Rite. 13. Greenheck. 14. Prior approved equal.

B. General Description: Factory fabricated, with required hardware and accessories. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Include locking device to hold single-blade dampers in a fixed position without vibration. Close duct penetrations for damper components to seal duct consistent with pressure class.

1. Pressure Classes of 3-Inch wg or Higher: End bearings or other seals for ducts with axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.

C. Standard Volume Dampers: Opposed-blade design, standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream, and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.

1. Steel Frames: Hat-shaped, galvanized sheet steel channels, minimum of 0.064 inch thick, with mitered and welded corners; frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

2. Roll-Formed Steel Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel. 3. Aluminum Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- thick, aluminum sheet channels;

frames with flanges where indicated for attaching to walls; and flangeless frames where indicated for installing in ducts.

4. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- thick aluminum sheet. 5. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- thick extruded aluminum. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. 7. Bearings: Oil-impregnated bronze. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum. 9. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.

D. Damper Hardware: Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch- thick zinc-plated steel, and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut. Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size. Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.

2.4 HIGH EFFICIENCY TAKE-OFF

A. Factory-manufactured rectangular-to-round or round-to-round 45 degree leading tap fabricated of 24 ga zinc-coated lockforming quality steel sheets meeting requirements of ASTM A 653, with G-90 coating.

B. One inch wide mounting flange with die formed corner clips, pre-punched mounting holes, and adhesive coated gasket.

C. Manual Volume Damper:



1. Single blade, 22 ga minimum. 2. 3/8 inch minimum square rod with brass damper bearings at each end. 3. Heavy duty locking quadrant on 1-1/2 inch high stand-off mounting bracket

attached to side of round duct.

D. Approved Manufacturers:

1. HETD-L by Daniel Manufacturing. 2. STO by Flexmaster USA Inc. 3. HET by Sheet Metal Connectors Inc. 4. Hercules. 5. Clifco 6. Air-Rite. 7. Prior approved equal.

2.5 SMOKE AND COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. CESCO Products. 3. Greenheck. 4. Leader 5. Nailor Industries Inc. 6. Penn Ventilation Company, Inc. 7. Ruskin Company. 8. Prior approved equal.

B. General Description: Labeled according to UL 555S. Combination fire and smoke dampers shall be labeled according to UL 555 for 1-1/2-hour rating.

C. Fusible Links: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated.

D. Frame and Blades: 0.064-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel.

E. Mounting Sleeve: Factory-installed, 0.052-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel; length to suit wall or floor application.

F. Damper Motors: Modulating and two-position action.

1. Comply with requirements in Division 22 and 23 Section "Motors." 2. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and

sealed gear trains. 3. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where

indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf.

4. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outside-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40 deg F.



5. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft., size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf.

6. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz.

2.6 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricate to comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for vanes and vane runners. Vane runners shall automatically align vanes.

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Fabricate 1-1/2-inch- wide, single-vane, curved blades of galvanized sheet steel set 3/4 inch o.c.; support with bars perpendicular to blades set 2 inches o.c.; and set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.


a. Ductmate Industries, Inc. b. Duro Dyne Corp. c. METALAIRE, Inc. d. Ward Industries, Inc. e. Prior approved equal.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill.

2.7 DUCT-MOUNTING ACCESS DOORS

A. General Description: Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.

B. Door: Double wall, duct mounting, and rectangular; fabricated of galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Include vision panel where indicated. Include 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Warming and Ventilating. b. CESCO Products. c. Ductmate Industries, Inc. d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck. f. McGill AirFlow Corporation. g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Ventfabrics, Inc. i. Ward Industries, Inc. j. Air Rite. k. Prior approved equal.

2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Provide number of hinges and locks as follows:



a. Less Than 12 Inches Square: Secure with two sash locks. b. Up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges and two compression latches. d. Sizes 24 by 48 Inches and Larger: One additional hinge.

C. Seal around frame attachment to duct and door to frame with neoprene or foam rubber.

D. Insulation: 1-inch- thick, fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board.

2.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ventfabrics, Inc. 4. Ward Industries, Inc. 5. Prior approved equal.

B. General Description: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics, coatings, and adhesives complying with UL 181, Class 1.

C. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 3-1/2 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Select metal compatible with ducts.

D. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.

1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

E. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone.

1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd.. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F.

2.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. Hart & Cooley, Inc. 3. McGill AirFlow Corporation. 4. Themaflex. 5. Quietflex 6. Prior approved equal.



B. Insulated-Duct Connectors: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; polyethylene or aluminized vapor barrier film.

1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.

C. Flexible Duct Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action, in sizes 3 through 18 inches to suit duct size.

2.10 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE

A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct insulation thickness.

B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards--Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.

B. Provide duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts.

C. Install backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

D. Install volume dampers in ducts with liner; avoid damage to and erosion of duct liner.

E. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches lead from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install at a minimum of two duct widths from branch takeoff.

F. Provide test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated.

G. Install fire and smoke dampers, with fusible links, according to manufacturer's UL-approved written instructions.

H. Install duct access doors to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and terminal units as follows:



1. On both sides of duct coils. 2. Adjacent to fire or smoke dampers, providing access to reset or reinstall fusible

links. 3. To interior of ducts for cleaning; before and after each change in direction, at

maximum 50-foot spacing. 4. On sides of ducts where adequate clearance is available.

I. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, rectangular access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body Plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches.

J. Install the following sizes for duct-mounting, round access doors:

1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 inches in diameter. 2. Two-Hand Access: 10 inches in diameter. 3. Head and Hand Access: 12 inches in diameter. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 18 inches in diameter. 5. Body Access: 24 inches in diameter.

K. Label access doors according to Division 22 and 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."

L. Install flexible connectors immediately adjacent to equipment in ducts associated with fans and motorized equipment supported by vibration isolators.

M. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg and higher, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps.

N. Connect terminal units to supply ducts with maximum 12-inch lengths of flexible duct. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.

O. Connect diffusers to low pressure ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place.

P. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.

Q. Install duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings.

B. Adjust fire and smoke dampers for proper action.

C. Final positioning of manual-volume dampers is specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing."


EXHAUST FANS 233423 - 1

SECTION 233423 – EXHAUST FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Centrifugal roof ventilators. 2. Ceiling Mounting Ventilator.


A. Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations.

B. Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of product indicated and include the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound-power ratings. 3. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. 4. Material thickness and finishes, including color charts. 5. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators. 6. Roof curbs. 7. Fan speed controllers.

B. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

1. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration isolators and

seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation bases. 3. Vibration Isolation Base Details: Detail fabrication, including anchorages and

attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides and rails, and base weights.



C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in operation, and maintenance manuals.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

B. AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

C. NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.

D. UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.


A. Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.

B. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3.

C. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories."

1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS


1. Belts: One set for each belt-driven unit.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS


1. Loren Cook Company ACE-B or equal by 2. Acme Engineering & Mfg. Corp. 3. Aerovent; a Twin City Fan Company 4. American Coolair Corp. 5. Carnes Company HVAC. 6. Greenheck. 7. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products. 8. Penn Ventilation. 9. Twin City 10. Prior approved equal.

B. Description: Belt-driven centrifugal fans consisting of housing, wheel, fan shaft, bearings, motor and disconnect switch, drive assembly, curb base, and accessories.

C. Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle; square, one-piece, aluminum base with venturi inlet cone.

D. Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades.

E. Belt-Driven Drive Assembly: Resiliently mounted to housing, with the following features:

1. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. 2. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball

bearings. 3. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. 4. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream.

F. Accessories:

1. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted outside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit.

2. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch mesh, aluminum or brass wire. 3. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb

base; factory set to close when fan stops.

4. Spring loaded, automatic belt tensioning pulley.

G. Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base.

1. Configuration: Built-in cant and mounting flange. 2. Overall Height: 12 inches.



3. Sound Curb: Curb with sound-absorbing insulation matrix. 4. Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. 5. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel. 6. Mounting Pedestal: Galvanized steel with removable access panel. 7. Vented Curb: Unlined with louvered vents in vertical sides.

H. Capacities and Characteristics: See drawings.

2.2 CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS


1. Loren Cook Company. Gemini or equal by. 2. American Coolair Corp. 3. Carnes Company HVAC. 4. Greenheck. 5. JencoFan; Div. of Breidert Air Products. 6. NuTone Inc. 7. Penn Ventilation. 8. Twin City 9. Prior approved equal.

B. Description: Centrifugal fans designed for installing in ceiling or wall or for concealed in-line applications.

C. Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation.

D. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service.

E. Grille: Plastic, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing.

F. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in.

G. Accessories:

1. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light.

2. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate.

3. Motion Sensor: Motion detector with adjustable shutoff timer. 4. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.

H. Capacities and Characteristics: See drawings.



2.3 MOTORS

A. Enclosure Type: Totally enclosed, fan cooled.

2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.

B. Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install power ventilators level and plumb.

B. Support units using restrained spring isolators having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration- and seismic-control devices are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

1. Secure vibration and seismic controls to concrete bases using anchor bolts cast in concrete base.

C. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps.

D. Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and spring hangers with vertical-limit stops Insert device having a static deflection of 1 inch. Vibration-control devices are specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Mechanical Vibration and Seismic Controls."

E. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.

F. Label units according to requirements specified in Division 22 and 23 Section "Mechanical Identification."

3.2 CONNECTIONS

A. Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 22 and 23 Sections. Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Division 22 Section "Duct Accessories."

B. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.



C. Ground equipment according to Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding."

D. Connect wiring according to Division 26 Section "Conductors and Cables."


A. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:

1. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. 2. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that

connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.

3. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify

fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards.

5. Adjust belt tension. 6. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. 7. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 8. Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. 9. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan

to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. 10. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. 11. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.

B. Adjust belt tension.

C. Refer to Division 23 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures.

D. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow.

E. Lubricate bearings.



AIR TERMINAL UNITS 233600 - 1

SECTION 233600 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Dual-duct air terminal units. 2. Shutoff, single-duct air terminal units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of the following products, including rated capacities, furnished specialties, sound-power ratings, and accessories.

1. Air terminal units. 2. Liners and adhesives. 3. Sealants and gaskets.

B. Field quality-control reports.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes. 2. Instructions for adjusting software set points.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up."



1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUAL-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carnes. 2. Krueger. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Price Industries. 5. Titus. 6. Prior approved equal.

B. Configuration: Two control dampers inside unit casing with mixing attenuator section and control components inside a protective metal shroud.

C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel, wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Cover liner with nonporous foil.

2. Air Inlets: Round stub connections or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 3 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

E. Velocity Sensors: Multipoint array with velocity sensors in cold- and hot-deck air inlets and air outlets.

F. Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with controls specified



in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and shall have the following features:

1. Damper Actuators: 24 V, powered closed, spring return open. 2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller

with electronic airflow transducers factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 15

Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."

3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.

4. Unit shall be capable of controlling to sequence listed in specification section 15900 Controls. The following is a diagram of the required sequence of operation.

2.2 COOLING ONLY VAV BOX

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Carnes. 2. Krueger. 3. Nailor Industries Inc. 4. Price Industries. 5. Titus. 6. Prior approved equal.

B. Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.



C. Casing: 0.034-inch steel wall.

1. Casing Lining: Adhesive attached, 1-inch- thick, coated, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with ASTM C 1071, and having a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50, for both insulation and adhesive, when tested according to ASTM E 84.

a. Cover liner with nonporous foil.

2. Air Inlet: Round stub connection or S-slip and drive connections for duct attachment.

3. Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections. 4. Access: Removable panels for access to parts requiring service, adjustment, or

maintenance; with airtight gasket. 5. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with

requirements in ASHRAE 62.1.

D. Regulator Assembly: System-air-powered bellows section incorporating polypropylene bellows for volume regulation and thermostatic control. Bellows shall operate at temperatures from 0 to 140 deg F, shall be impervious to moisture and fungus, shall be suitable for 10-inch wg static pressure, and shall be factory tested for leaks.

E. Volume Damper: Galvanized steel with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating bearings.

1. Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 2 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg inlet static pressure.

2. Damper Position: Normally open.

F. Direct Digital Controls: Bidirectional damper operators and microprocessor-based controller and room sensor. Control devices shall be compatible with temperature controls specified in Division 15 Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls" and shall have the following features:

1. Damper Actuator: 24 V, powered closed, spring return open. 2. Terminal Unit Controller: Pressure-independent, variable-air-volume controller

with electronic airflow transducer with multipoint velocity sensor at air inlet, factory calibrated to minimum and maximum air volumes, and having the following features:

a. Occupied and unoccupied operating mode. b. Remote reset of airflow or temperature set points. c. Adjusting and monitoring with portable terminal. d. Communication with temperature-control system specified in Division 15

Section "HVAC Instrumentation and Controls."

3. Room Sensor: Wall mounted with temperature set-point adjustment and access for connection of portable operator terminal.



2.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

B. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

C. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

D. Air Terminal Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials.

E. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings.


A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880.

1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."

B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance.

C. Install wall-mounted thermostats.


A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and

completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate

concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick.



4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance.

B. Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Division 15 Section "Hydronic Piping," connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange.

C. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Division 15 Section "Metal Ducts."

D. Make connections to air terminal units with flexible connectors complying with requirements in Division 15 Section "Duct Accessories."

3.4 IDENTIFICATION

A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:



1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements.

2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.

3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation.

4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.6 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.

1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit manufacturer to achieve proper performance.

3. Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible. 4. Verify that control connections are complete. 5. Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible. 6. Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units.



DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 233713- 1

SECTION 233713 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes ceiling- and wall-mounted diffusers, registers, and grilles.


1. Division 23 Section "Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers and volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated, include the following:

1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.

2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate Drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified.

2.2 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. Fixed Face Ceiling Return, Exhaust, or Transfer Air Grille:

1. Products:

a. Carnes; RSLA.



b. Krueger; S85H. c. Price Industries; 535. d. Titus; 355RL. e. Tuttle & Bailey; T70D. f. Or equal by:

1) A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2) Anemostat; a Mestek Company. 3) Dayus Register & Grille. 4) Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. 5) Nailor Industries of Texas Inc.

2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white. 4. Face Arrangement: 1/2 inch horizontal blade spacing. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.

2.3 CEILING DIFFUSER OUTLETS

A. Round Ceiling Diffuser Duct Mounted Exposed:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Price RCD or equal by:

1) Anemostat; a Mestek Company. 2) Carnes. 3) Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. 4) METALAIRE, Inc.; Metal Industries Inc. 5) Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. 6) Titus. 7) Tuttle & Bailey. 8) Prior approved equal.

2. Material: Heavy gauge spun steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Style: Three cone. 5. Pattern: Two position horizontal.

B. Rectangular and Square Ceiling Diffusers:

1. Products:

a. Carnes. b. Krueger. c. METALAIRE, Inc., Metal Industries Inc. d. Price Industries; SPD or equal by. e. Titus. f. Tuttle & Bailey. g. A-J Manufacturing Co., Inc. h. Anemostat; a Mestek Company.



i. Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Hart & Cooley Div. j. Nailor Industries of Texas Inc. k. Prior approved equal.

2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, white.


A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.

B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practicable. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, provide lay-in ceiling module. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.

C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing.


ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS 26 0500-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0500

ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Architectural, Structural, Mechanical and other applicable documents are considered a part of the electrical documents insofar as they apply as if referred to in full.

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. The extent of electrical work is indicated on drawings and/or specified in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 sections of the specification. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, supervision and service necessary for a complete electrical system. Work includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following items.

ITEM SECTION

1. Electrical General Provisions 26 0500 2. Electrical Connections for Equipment 26 0507 3. Grounding 26 0526 4. Supporting Devices 26 0529 5. Conduit Raceway 26 0532 6. Electrical Boxes and Fittings 26 0533 7. Raceway Systems 26 0536 8. Electrical Seismic Control 26 0548 9. Electrical Identification 26 0553 10. Protective Device Study 26 0573 11. Occupancy Sensors 26 0923 12. Lighting Control Equipment 26 0943 13. Wiring Devices 26 2726 14. Overcurrent Protective Devices 26 2815 15. Motor and Circuit Disconnects 26 2816 16. Motor Starters 26 2913 17. Uninterruptible Power Supply 26 3353 18. Demolition 26 4119 19. Interior and Exterior Building Lighting 26 5100 20. Telephone Systems (Raceways) 27 1501 21. Audiovisual Systems 27 4100 22. Fire Alarm and Detection System 28 3111

B. Use of standard industry symbols together with the special symbols, notes, and instructions indicated on the drawings describe the work, materials, apparatus and systems required as a portion of this work.

C. Visit the site during the bidding period to determine existing conditions affecting electrical and other work. All costs arising from site conditions and/or preparation shall be included in the base bid. No additional charges will be allowed due to inadequate site inspection.

1.3 DEFINITION OF TERMS

A. The following terms used in Divisions 26, 27 and 28 documents are defined as follows:

1. "Provide": Means furnish, install and connect, unless otherwise indicated. 2. "Furnish": Means purchase and deliver to project site.


3. "Install": Means to physically install the items in-place. 4. "Connect": Means make final electrical connections for a complete operating

piece of equipment. 1.4 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. Consult all other sections, determine the extent and character of related work and properly coordinate work specified herein with that specified elsewhere to produce a complete installation.

B. General and Supplementary Conditions: Drawings and general provisions of contract and Division 1 of the Specifications, apply to all Division 26, 27 and 28 sections.

C. Earthwork:

1. Provide trenching, backfilling, boring and soil compaction as required for the installation of underground conduit, buried cable, in-grade pull boxes, manholes, lighting pole foundations, etc. See Division 31, Sitework, and other portions of Divisions 26, 27 and 28, for material and installation requirements.

D. Concrete Work:

1. Provide forming, steel bar reinforcing, cast-in-place concrete, finishing and grouting as required for underground conduit encasement, light pole foundations, pull box slabs, vaults, equipment pads, etc. See Division 3, Concrete for material and installation requirements.

E. Miscellaneous Metal Work:

1. Provide fittings, brackets, backing, supports, rods, welding and pipe as required for support and bracing of raceways, lighting fixtures, panelboards, distribution boards, switchboards, motor controls centers, etc. See Division 5, Metals for material and installation requirements.

F. Miscellaneous Lumber and Framing Work:

1. Provide wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of electrical materials and equipment. See Division 6, Rough Carpentry for material and installation requirements.

G. Moisture Protection:

1. Provide membrane clamps, sheet metal flashing, counter flashing, caulking and sealants as required for waterproofing of conduit penetrations and sealing penetrations in or through fire walls, floors and ceiling slabs and foundation walls. All penetrations through vapor barriers at slabs on grade shall be taped and made vapor tight. See Division 7, Thermal and Moisture Protection for material and installation requirements.

H. Access panels and doors:

1. Provide in walls, ceiling, and floors for access to electrical devices and equipment. See Division 8, Doors and Windows for material and installation requirements.

I. Painting:

1. Provide surface preparation, priming and finish coating as required for electrical cabinets, exposed conduit, pull and junction boxes, poles, surface metal raceways, etc. See Division 9, Finishes for material and installation requirements.

1.5 WORK FURNISHED AND INSTALLED UNDER ANOTHER SECTION REQUIRING CONNECTIONS UNDER THIS SECTION:

A. Provide electrical service, make requisite connections and perform operational test. Items furnished and installed under other sections and connected under this section, include but are not limited to the following:

1. Electric motors.


2. Package mechanical equipment: fans, fan coil units, pumps, boilers, duplex compressors, etc.

3. Flow switches and valve monitors. 4. Motorized dampers. 5. Fire and smoke dampers 6. Duct mounted smoke detectors. 7. Elevator/Escalator Controllers. 8. Irrigation controllers. 9. Door hold-open/release devices. 10. Motorized projection screens. 11. Wheel chair lifts. 12. Roll down doors. 13. Electric hardware. 14. Laboratory equipment including hoods, cold rooms, autoclaves, drying ovens,

glassware washers and dryers, refrigerators, freezers, etc. 15. Shop equipment including saw dust collectors, saws, lathes, grinders, welders,

planers, presses, etc. 16. Temperature control panels. 17. Variable frequency controllers. 18. Chiller starters. 19. Motorized Chalkboards/Markerboards/Whiteboards. 20. Display cases. 21. Water coolers. 22. Kitchen equipment including ovens, fryers, mixers, disposers, dishwashers, etc. 23. Paint spray booths. 24. Fire sprinkler alarm bells. 25. Electric heat trace cable for domestic and industrial hot water piping systems. 26. Electric heat trace cable for guttering, drain lines, etc. 27. Anti-sweat heaters, fan coils, etc. for walk-in coolers and freezers. 28. Hand dryers, hair dryers. 29. Dock levelers. 30. Systems/Open Office Furniture

1.6 ITEMS FURNISHED UNDER ANOTHER DIVISION, BUT INSTALLED AND CONNECTED

UNDER THIS DIVISION:

A. Items furnished under other Divisions, but turned over to Division 26 for installation and final connection include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Wall mounted control stations for motorized roll-up doors/grills. 2. Wall mounted control stations for motorized projection screens. 3. Wall mounted control stations for handicap lift. 4. Lighting fixtures for paint spray booths. 5. Lighting fixtures, receptacles, and switches for fume hoods. 6. Lighting fixtures for kitchen hoods. 7. Lighting fixtures for walk-in freezers and coolers.

1.7 WORK NOT INCLUDED IN THIS DIVISION:

A. Items of work provided under another contract include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following:

1. Telephone cables and electronic equipment. 2. Data system cables, fittings, coverplates and electronic equipment.


3. Control wires for irrigation control valves. 4. Energy management/temperature control system; both line and low voltage

including conductors and conduit. 5. Television monitors and projection equipment. 6. Security system equipment, cables, fittings, and coverplates. 7. CCTV cabling and electronic equipment. 8. MATV cabling and electronic equipment

1.8 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS:

A. Before bidding, Contractor shall familiarize himself with the drawings, specifications and project site. Submit requests for clarification to Architect/Engineer in writing prior to issuance of final addendum. After signing the contract, the Contractor shall meet the intent, purpose, and function of the Contract Documents. Any costs of materials, labor and equipment arising therefrom, to make each system complete and operable, is the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Reference to codes, standards, specifications and recommendations of technical societies, trade organizations and governmental agencies refers to the latest edition of such publications adopted and published prior to submittal of the bid proposed, unless noted otherwise herein. Such codes or standards are considered a part of this specification as though fully repeated herein.

B. When codes, standards, regulations, etc. allow work of lesser quality or extent than is specified under this Division, nothing in said codes shall be construed or inferred as reducing the quality, requirements or extent of the Drawings and Specifications. Perform work in accordance with applicable requirements of all governing codes, rules and regulations including the following minimum standards, whether statutory or not:

1. National Electric Code (NEC). 2. International Building Code (IBC). 3. International Fire Code (IFC). 4. International Mechanical Code (IMC).

C. Standards: Comply with the following standards where applicable for equipment and materials specified under this Division.

1. UL Underwriters' Laboratories 2. ASTM American Society for Testing Materials 3. CBN Certified Ballast Manufacturers 4. IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association 5. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association 6. ANSI American National Standards Institute 7. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratories

D. All electrical apparatus furnished under this Section shall conform to (NEMA) standards and the NEC and bear the Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) label where such label is applicable.

E. Comply with requirements of State and Local Ordinances. If a conflict occurs between these requirements and the Contract Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. The Contractor accepts this responsibility upon submitting his bid, and no extra charge will be allowed after the contract is awarded. This shall not be construed as relieving the Contractor from complying with any requirements of the Contract Documents that may be in excess of the aforementioned requirements, and not contrary to same.

F. Obtain all permits, inspections, etc. required by authority having jurisdiction. Include all fees in bid. Furnish a certificate of approval to the Owner's Representative from the Inspection Authority at completion of the work.


G. Employ only qualified craftsmen with at least three years of experience. Workmanship shall be neat, have a good mechanical appearance and conform to best electrical construction practices. Provide a competent superintendent to direct the work at all times. Any person found incompetent shall be discharged from the project and replaced by satisfactory personnel.

H. Contractor shall have a current state contracting license applicable to type of work to be performed under this contract.

1.10 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE ORDER PROPOSALS

A. In the event that a submission of a change order is issued by the contractor, the following information will be required to be submitted by the contractor, prior to any consideration by the owner/architect.

a. Where project manager or project engineer work is required, the labor cost shall not exceed 2% of the electrical portion of the change order.

b. All equipment, including conduit and wire, shall be itemized, identifying unit costs and quantities of equipment. Distributor quotes shall accompany all change order requests. The distributor quotes shall include costs for all equipment including conduit and wire. Lot pricing for equipment is not acceptable.

c. The general contractor shall review and confirm that the quantity and costs of materials submitted appear reasonable for the scope proposed.

d. Labor units shall not exceed base NECA 1 standards. No adjustment factors shall be approved.

e. Any research and labeling time, shall be the responsibility of the electrical contractor and shall not be included in the change order request.

f. Any costs associated with the purchase of tools or transportation shall be fully itemized for review by architect/owner.

g. Overtime rates shall only be approved where additional manpower cannot achieve the same result.

h. Change order form shall follow the following format: i. PCO number ii. Detailed description of work being performed iii. Location on project where work is performed iv. Chosen NECA column v. Identified material:

1. QTY 2. Unit cost 3. Mark up 4. Material total

vi. Identified labor: 1. QTY 2. Unit cost 3. Composite labor rate 4. Labor total

1.11 SUBMITTALS:

A. SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA:

1. After the Contract is awarded but prior to manufacture or installation of any equipment, prepare complete Shop Drawings and Brochures for materials and equipment as required by each section of the specification. Submit 8 complete sets for review. All sets of shop drawing material shall be bound. Prior to submission of the Shop Drawings and Project Data, review and certify that they are in compliance with the Contract Documents. Verify all dimensional information to ensure proper clearance for installation of equipment. Check all materials and equipment after arrival on the job site and verify compliance with the Contract Documents. A minimum period of two weeks, exclusive of


transmittal time, will be required each time Shop Drawing and/or Brochure is submitted or resubmitted for review. This time period shall be considered by the Contractor when scheduling submittal data. If the shop drawings are rejected twice, the contractor shall reimburse the engineer the sum of $200.00 for the third review and any additional reviews required.

2. Shop drawings requiring the use of electronic documents (floor plans, Lighting plans, fire alarm plans, etc.) shall be requested via a request for information (RFI) through the general contractor. Electronic documents will be provided to the Architect for distribution. No direct vendor requests will be accepted.

3. Review of Shop Drawings and Brochures shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for dimensions and/or errors that may be contained therein, or deviations from the Contract Document's requirements. It shall be clearly understood that the noting of some errors but overlooking others does not grant the Contractor permission to proceed in error. Regardless of any information contained in the Shop Drawings and Brochures, the requirements of the Contract Document's shall govern and are not waived, or superseded in any way by the review of the Shop Drawings and Brochures.

4. Certifications shall be written or in the form of rubber stamp impressions as follows:

a. I hereby certify that this Shop Drawing and/or Brochure has been checked prior to submittal and that it complies in all respects with the requirements of the Contract Drawings and Specifications for this Project.

(Name of Electrical Subcontractor)

Signed .

Position Date .

5. Observe the following rules when submitting the Shop Drawings and Brochures.

a. Each Shop Drawing shall indicate in the lower right hand corner, and each Brochure shall indicate on the front cover the following: Title of the sheet or brochure, name and location of the building; names of the Architect and Electrical Engineer, Contractor, Subcontractors, Manufacturer, Supplier/Vendor, etc., date of submittal, and the date of correction and revision. Unless the above information is included the submittal will be returned for resubmittal.

b. Shop Drawings shall be done in an easily legible scale and shall contain sufficient plans, elevations, sections, and isometrics to clearly describe the equipment or apparatus, and its location. Drawings shall be prepared by an Engineer/Draftsmen skilled in this type of work. Shop Drawings shall be drawn to at least 1/4" = 1'0" scale.

c. Brochures to be submitted shall be published by the Manufacturers and shall contain complete and detailed engineering and dimensional information. Brochures submitted shall contain only information relevant to the particular equipment or materials to be furnished. The Contractor shall not submit catalogs that describe several different items in addition to those items to be used, unless all irrelevant information is marked out, or unless relevant information is clearly marked. Brochures from each manufacturer shall be identified and submitted separately.

6. ELECTRONIC SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS:

a. Provide submittals in Portable Document Format (PDF).

b. Documents must be electronically bookmarked and keyword searchable using Adobe Acrobat (http://www.adobe.com/acrobat) or Bluebeam Revu


(http://www.bluebeam.com) for each relevant section. For example, include electronic bookmarks separating “Light Fixtures” from “Panelboards”.

c. Electronically highlight all options for light fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Manual highlighting and scanning of the documents is NOT acceptable and will NOT be reviewed.

d. Provide only completed cutsheets for all fixture and equipment types. Blank cutsheets submitted with a schedule are NOT acceptable and will NOT be reviewed.

e. A maximum of one submittal per specification section is allowed. It is NOT acceptable to provide a product by product submittal. Single product by product submittals will NOT be reviewed.

1.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Provide operating instruction and maintenance data books for all equipment and materials furnished under this Division.

B. Submit four copies of operating and maintenance data books for review at least four weeks before final review of the project. Assemble all data in a completely indexed volume or volumes and identify the size, model, and features indicated for each item. The binder (sized to the material) shall be a 2" slide lock unit (Wilson-Jones WLJ36544B). The cover shall be engraved with the job title in 1/2" high letters and the name and address of the Contractor in 1/4" high letters. Provide the same information in 1/8" letters on the spine.

C. Include complete cleaning and servicing data compiled in clearly and easily understandable form. Show serial numbers of each piece of equipment, complete lists of replacement parts, motor ratings, etc. Each unit shall have its own individual sheet. (Example: If two items of equipment A and D appear on the same sheet, an individual sheet shall be provided for each unit specified).

D. Include the following information where applicable.

1. Identifying name and mark number. 2. Certified outline Drawings and Shop Drawings. 3. Parts lists. 4. Performance curves and data. 5. Wiring diagrams. 6. Light fixture schedule with the lamps and ballast data used on the project for all

fixtures 7. Manufacturer's recommended operating and maintenance instructions. 8. Vendor's name and address for each item.

E. The engineer shall review the manuals and when approved, will forward the manuals on to the architect. If the manuals are rejected twice, the contractor shall reimburse the engineer the sum of $200.00 for each review afterwards.

1.13 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. Maintain, on a daily basis, a complete set of “Record Drawings”, reflecting an accurate record of work in accordance with the following:

1. Show the complete routing and location of all feeders rated 100 amps and larger. Locate work buried below grade or under slab, work concealed above ceilings, and work in concealed spaces, dimensionally from fixed structural elements (not partition walls, etc.)

2. Show the complete routing and location of all telecommunications conduits, systems raceways, and empty raceways, 1-1/4" and larger. Locate work buried below grade or under slab, work concealed above ceilings, and work in


concealed spaces, dimensionally from fixed structural elements (not partition walls, etc.).

3. Show all changes, deviations, addendum items, change orders, job instructions, etc., that change the work from that shown on the contract documents, including wall relocations, fixtures and device changes, branch circuiting changes, etc. Where locations of boxes, raceways, equipment, etc. are adjusted in the field to fit conditions, but such new locations may not be obvious by referring to the contract document, show new locations on the record drawings.

B. At the discretion of the Architect/Engineer, the drawings will be reviewed on a periodic basis and used as a pre-requisite for progress payments. This requirement shall not be construed as authorization for the Contractor to make changes in the layout, or work without written authorization for such changes. The “Record Drawings” for daily recording shall consist of a set of blue line prints of the Contract Drawings.

C. Upon completion of the work, purchase a complete set of electronic drawings. Transfer all “Record” information from the blue line prints to the drawings via the current CAD program that it was written. The Architect/Engineer shall review the drawings and the Contractor shall incorporate the resulting comments into the final record drawings. The Contractor shall make two complete copies of the drawings electronically and forward this to the Engineer.

D. Certify the “Record Drawings” for correctness by placing and signing the following certifications of the first sheet of the drawings:

"CERTIFIED CORRECT (3/8" high letters) (Name of General Contractor)

By: Date:

(Name of Electrical Contractor)

By: Date: 1.14 GUARANTEE:

A. Ensure that electrical system installed under this contract is in proper working order and in compliance with drawings, specifications, and/or authorized changes. Without additional charge, replace any work or materials that develop defect, except from ordinary wear and tear, within one year from the date of substantial completion. Exception: Incandescent and fluorescent lamps shall be guaranteed for a period of two months from the date of substantial completion.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. Products are specified by manufacturer name, description, and/or catalog number. Discrepancies between equipment specified and the intended function of equipment shall be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer in writing prior to bidding. Failure to report any conflict, including catalog numbers, discontinued products, etc., does not relieve the Contractor from meeting the intent of the contract documents nor shall it change the contract cost. If the Contractor is unable to interpret any part of the plans and/or specifications, or should he find discrepancies therein, he shall bring this to the attention of the Architect/Engineer who will issue interpretation and/or additional instructions to Bidders before the project is bid.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Provide products of manufacturers specified. Manufacturers catalog numbers and descriptions establish the quality of product required. Substitutions will be considered if a


duplicate written application (2-copies) is at the office of the Architect/Engineer eight (8) working days prior to the day of the bidding. The application shall include the following: 1) A statement certifying that the equipment proposed is equal to that specified; that it has the same electrical and physical characteristics, compatible dimensions, and meets the functional intent of the contract documents; 2) The specified and submittal catalog numbers of the equipment under consideration; 3) A pictorial and specification brochure.

B. Any conflict arising from the use of substituted equipment shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, who shall bear all costs required to make the equipment comply with the intent of the contract documents.

C. Samples may be required for non-standard or substituted items before installation during construction. Provide all samples as required.

D. No materials or apparatus may be substituted after the bid opening except where the equipment specified has been discontinued.

E. Provide only equipment specified in the Contract Documents or approved by addendum.

2.3 SPARE PARTS:

A. Provide spare parts (fuses, diffusers, lamps, etc.) as specified. Transmit all spare parts to Owner's Representative prior to substantial completion.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Layout electrical work in advance of construction to eliminate unnecessary cutting, drilling, channeling, etc. Where such cutting, drilling, or channeling becomes necessary for proper installation; perform with care. Use skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair damage to building and equipment at no additional cost to the contract. Cutting work of other Contractors shall be done only with the consent of that Contractor. Cutting structural members shall not be permitted.

B. Since the drawings of floor, wall, and ceiling installation are made at small scale; outlets, devices, equipment, etc., are indicated only in their approximate location unless dimensioned. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls and ceilings where not dimensioned, and coordinate such locations with work of other trades to prevent interferences. Verify all dimensions on the job. Do not scale the electrical drawings, but refer to the architectural and mechanical shop drawings and project drawings for dimensions as applicable.

C. Perform for other trades, the electrical wiring and connection for all devices, equipment or apparatus. Consult Architectural, Mechanical, and other applicable drawings, and all applicable shop drawings to avoid switches, outlets, and other equipment from being hidden behind doors, cabinets, counters, heating equipment, etc., or from being located in chalkboards, tackboards, glass panels, etc. Relocate buried electrical devices and/or connections as directed at no additional cost.

D. Coordinate the location of outlets, devices, connections, and equipment with the supplier of the systems furniture prior to rough-in.

E. Where conduit, outlets or apparatus are to be encased in concrete, it must be located and secured by a journeyman or foreman present at the point of installation. Check locations of the electrical items before and after concrete and/or masonry installation and relocate displaced items.

F. Provide block-outs, sleeves, demolition work, etc., required for installation of work specified in this division.

3.2 CLEAN:

A. Clean up all equipment, conduit, fittings, packing cartons and other debris that is a direct result of the installation of the work of this Division.


B. Clean fixtures, interiors and exteriors of all equipment, and raceways. Replace all filters in electrical equipment upon request for Substantial Completion.

3.3 POWER OUTAGES:

A. All power outages required for execution of this work shall occur during non-standard working hours and at the convenience of the Owner. Include all costs for overtime work in bid.

B. Submit written request at least 7 days in advance of scheduled outage and proceed with outage only after receiving authorization from the Owner's Representative.

C. Keep all outages to an absolute minimum.

3.4 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS:

A. Provide storage space for storage of materials and apparatus and assume complete responsibility for all losses due to any cause whatsoever. In no case shall storage interfere with traffic conditions in any public thoroughfare or constitute a hazard to persons in the vicinity. Protect completed work, work underway, and apparatus against loss or damage.

3.5 EXCAVATING FOR ELECTRICAL WORK:

A. General: Locate and protect existing utilities and other underground work in manner that will ensure that no damage or service interruption will result from excavating and backfilling. Perform excavation in a manner that protects walls, footings, and other structural members from being disturbed or damaged in any way. Burial depths must comply with NEC Section 300-5 (or State of Utah requirement, whichever is more stringent), unless noted otherwise on drawings.

B. Protect persons from injury at excavations, by barricades, warnings and illumination.

C. Coordinate excavations with weather conditions, to minimize possibility of washouts, settlements and other damages and hazards.

D. Provide temporary covering or enclosure and temporary heat as necessary to protect bottoms of excavations from freezing and frost action. Do not install electrical work on frozen excavation bases or sub-bases.

E. Do not excavate for electrical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, so that total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling will be minimum. See other sections of specification for additional requirements for excavating.

F. Store excavated material (temporarily) near excavation, in a manner that will not interfere with or damage excavation or other work. Do not store under trees (within drip line).

G. Retain excavated material that complies with requirements for backfill material. Dispose of excavated material that is either in excess of quantity needed for backfilling or does not comply with requirements for backfill material. Remove unused material from project site, and dispose of in lawful manner.

3.6 BACKFILL MATERIALS:

A. For buried conduit or cable (other than below slab-on-grade, or concrete encased) - 2" thickness of well graded sand on all side of conduit or cable.

B. For trench backfill to within 6" of final grade - soil material suitable for compacting to required densities.

C. For top 6" of excavation - Top soil.

D. Backfill excavations in 8" high courses of backfill material, uniformly compacted to the following densities (percent of maximum density, ASTM D 1557), using power-driven hand-operated compaction equipment.


1. Lawn/Landscaped Areas: 85 percent for cohesive soils, 95 percent for cohesionless soils.

2. Paved Areas, Other than Roadways (90 percent for cohesive soils, 95 percent for cohesionless soils).

E. Subsidence: Where subsidence is measurable or observable at electrical work excavations during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality and condition of the surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.7 CONCRETE BASES:

A. Unless otherwise noted, provide 4" high reinforced concrete bases for all floor mounted or floor standing electrical equipment, including generators, transformers, switchgear, battery racks, motor control centers, etc. Extend bases 6" beyond equipment or mounting rails on all sides or as shown on the drawings. Notwithstanding this requirement, coordinate with equipment manufacturer, shop drawings, and height of base to ensure compliance with NEC 404.8.

B. Concrete bases shall be provided under Divisions 26, 27 and 28. Coordinate size and location of all bases and furnish all required anchor bolts, sleeves, reinforcing and templates as required to obtain a proper installation.

C. Provide and locate properly sized concrete pads for power company furnished pad mounted transformers in accordance with power company clearance requirements. Where the serving utility is Rocky Mountain Power, the electrical contractor shall conform to the requirements of Electrical Service Requirements, Section 6.4.

3.8 ROOF PENETRATIONS:

A. Where raceways penetrate roofing or similar structural area, provide appropriate roof jack coordinate with the roofing contractor and the Architect in order to match the vent with the roof construction. The jack shall be sized to fit tightly to raceway for weather-tight seal, and with flange extending a minimum of 9" under roofing in all sides or as required by the roof type of construction. Completely seal opening between inside diameter of roof flashing and outside diameter of penetrating raceways. Coordinate all work with work required under roofing section of specifications.

3.9 FIRE PENETRATION SEALS:

A. Seal all penetrations for work of this section through fire rated floors, walls and ceilings to prevent the spread of smoke, fire, toxic gas or water through the penetration either before, during or after fire. The fire rating of the penetration seal shall be at least that of the floor, wall or ceiling that it is installed, so that the original fire rating of the floor or wall is maintained as required by Article 300-21 of the National Electrical Code. Where applicable, provide OZ Type CFSF/I and CAFSF/I fire seal fittings for conduit and cable penetrations through concrete and masonry walls, floors, slabs, and similar structures. Where applicable, provide 3M CID cast-in device for floor slabs. Where applicable, provide 3M fire barrier sealing penetration system, and/or IPC Flame Safe Fire Stop System, and/or Chase Foam fire stop system, including wall wrap, partitions, caps, and other accessories as required. All materials to comply with UL 1479 (ASTM E-814). Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of sealing fittings and barrier sealing systems.

3.10 PROJECT FINALIZATION AND START-UP:

A. Upon completion of equipment and system installation, assemble all equipment Factory Representatives and Subcontractors for system start-up.

B. Each Representative and Subcontractor shall assist in start-up and check out their respective system and remain at the site until the total system operation is accepted by the Owner's representative.


C. The Factory Representative and/or System Subcontractor shall give personal instruction on operating and maintenance of their equipment to the Owner's maintenance and/or operation personnel. To certify acceptance of operation and instruction by the Owner's Representative, the contractor shall prepare a written statement as follows:

1. This is to certify that the Factory Representative and System Subcontractor for each of the systems listed below have performed start-up and final check out of their respective systems.

2. The Owner's Representative has received complete and thorough instruction in the operation and maintenance of each system.

SYSTEM FACTORY REPRESENTATIVE

(List systems included) (List name and address of Factory Representative)

Owner's Representative Contractor

D. Send copy of acceptance to Architect/Engineer.

3.11 FINAL REVIEW:

A. At the time of final review, the project foreman shall accompany the reviewing party, and remove coverplates, panel covers and other access panels as requested, to allow review of the entire electrical system.

END OF SECTION 26 0500


BLANK PAGE

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 0507-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 260507

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-23 section making reference to electrical connections.


A. Extent of electrical connection for equipment includes final electrical connection of all equipment having electrical requirements. Make final connections for all owner furnished equipment. See other applicable portions of specification for building temperature control wiring requirements.

B. Refer to Division-23 sections for motor starters and controls furnished integrally with equipment; not work of this section.

C. Refer to Division-23 section for control system wiring; not work of this section.

D. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements.


A. NEC COMPLIANCE: Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type products used and installation of electrical power connections.

B. UL LABELS: Provide electrical connection products and materials that have been UL-listed and labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, raceways, conductors, cords, cord caps, wiring devices, pressure connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices, terminations, and connections as required. Crimp on or slip-on type splicing materials (insulation displacement type) designed to be used without wire stripping are not acceptable. See Section 26 0532, Conduit Raceways; Section 26 2726 Wiring Devices: and Section 26 0519 Conductors and Cables for additional requirements. Provide final connections for equipment consistent with the following:

1. Permanently installed fixed equipment - flexible seal-tite conduit from branch circuit terminal equipment, or raceway; to equipment, control cabinet, terminal junction box or wiring terminals. Totally enclose all wiring in raceway.

2. Movable and/or portable equipment - wiring device, cord cap, and multi-conductor cord suitable for the equipment and in accordance with NEC requirements (Article 400).

3. Other methods as required by the National Electrical Code and/or as required by special equipment or field conditions.

ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 26 0507-2 © BNA Consulting

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS:

A. Make electrical connections in accordance with connector manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams.

C. Coordinate installation of electrical connections for equipment with equipment installation work.

D. Verify all electrical loads (voltage, phase, horse power, full load amperes, number and point of connections, minimum circuit ampacity, etc.) for equipment furnished under other Divisions of this specification, by reviewing respective shop drawings furnished under each division. Meet with each subcontractor furnishing equipment requiring electrical service and review equipment electrical characteristics. Report any variances from electrical characteristics noted on the electrical drawings to Architect before proceeding with rough-work. In summary it is not in the Electrical Engineers scope to review the shop drawings from other trades/divisions.

E. Obtain and review the equipment shop drawings to determine particular final connection requirements before rough-in begins for each equipment item.

F. Refer to basic materials and methods Section 26 0553 Electrical Identification, Conductors, for identification of electrical power supply conductor terminations.


GROUNDING 26 0526-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in this section.


A. Provide grounding as specified herein, and as indicated on drawings.

B. Provide grounding and bonding of all electrical and communication apparatus, machinery, appliances, building components, and items required by the NEC to provide a permanent, continuous, low impedance, grounding system.

C. Unless otherwise indicated, ground the complete electrical installation including the system neutral, metallic conduits and raceways, boxes, fittings, devices, cabinets, and equipment in accordance with all code requirements.

D. Ground each separately derived system, as described in NEC Section 250-30, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Types of grounding in this section include the following:

1. Underground Metal Water Piping

2. Metal Building Frames

3. Grounding Electrodes

4. Separately Derived Systems

5. Service Equipment

6. Enclosures

7. Systems

8. Equipment

9. Other items indicated on drawings

F. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding work specified elsewhere in these specifications.


A. Comply with NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and ground fault protection systems. Comply with applicable ANSI and IEEE requirements. Provide products that have been UL listed and labeled.

B. Resistance from the service entrance ground bus, through the grounding electrode to earth, shall not exceed 5 ohms.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit the name of test agency to be used for testing specified in this section. Submit results of tests specified in this section. Also include test results in Operation and Maintenance Manuals as specified.


PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:

A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide each electrical grounding system as specified herein, and as shown on drawings, including but not necessarily limited to, cables/wires, connectors, terminals (solderless lugs), grounding rods/electrodes and plate electrodes, bonding jumper braid, and other items and accessories needed for complete installation. Where materials or components are not otherwise indicated, comply with NEC, NEMA and established industry standards for applications indicated.

B. ELECTRICAL GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding conductors for grounding connections matching power supply wiring materials and sized according to NEC. Provide with green insulation.

C. INSULATED GROUNDING BUSHINGS: Plated malleable iron body with 150 degree Centigrade molded plastic insulating throat, lay-in grounding lug with hardened stainless steel fasteners, OZ-Gedney BLG, or Thomas & Betts #TIGB series.

D. CONNECTIONS TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, GROUND RODS, OR SPLICES: For splicing and/or connecting conductors, use exothermic welds or high pressure compression type connectors. Provide exothermic weld kits manufactured by Cadweld or Thermoweld. If high compression type connectors are used for cable-to-cable, or cable-to-steel, or cable-to-ground rod connections, provide Thomas & Betts #53000 series, or Burndy Hyground series.

E. BONDING JUMPERS: OZ-Gedney Type BJ, or Thomas & Betts #3840 series, or Burndy type GG and type B braid.

F. INTERSYSTEM BONDING TERMINAL: Provide one 12” L. x 2” H x ¼” thick copper bus bar. Mount on wall adjacent to Main Electrical Service Equipment on insulating standoffs, 18” A.F.F. Furnish complete with lugs for connecting systems grounding cables. All holes shall be drilled for 2 hole compression lugs. Provide 6 spare lugs. Connect to equipment grounding bus in Main Electrical Service Equipment with No. 4 AWG copper conductor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF GROUNDING SYSTEMS:

A. Install electrical grounding systems in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure grounding devices comply with requirements.

B. Install clamp-on connectors only on thoroughly cleaned and metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical conductivity and circuit integrity.

C. Provide grounding for the entire raceway, enclosure, equipment and device system in accordance with NEC. All non-metallic raceways shall include copper grounding conductor sized in accordance with NEC. Include copper grounding conductor in all raceway installed in suspended slabs.

D. Provide grounding conductors for dimming systems in accordance with manufacturer's requirement.

3.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES:

A. Separately Derived Electrical System Grounding Electrode: Ground each separately derived system per requirements in NEC Section 250-26 unless indicated otherwise.

B. GROUNDING ELECTRODE CONDUCTOR: Provide grounding electrode conductor sized per NEC table 250-94 or as indicated.

C. Run main grounding conductors exposed or in metallic conduit if protection or concealment is required.


D. EQUIPMENT BONDING/GROUNDING: Provide a NEC sized conductor, whether indicated or not on the drawings, in raceways as follows:

1. Non-metallic conduits and ducts.

2. Distribution feeders.

3. Motor and equipment branch circuits.

4. Device and lighting branch circuits.

5. Provide grounding bushings and bonding jumpers for all conduit terminating in reducing washers, concentric, eccentric or oversized knockouts at panelboards, cabinets and gutters.

E. Provide bonding jumpers across expansion and deflection couplings in conduit runs, across pipe connections at water meters, and across dielectric couplings in metallic cold water piping system.

F. Provide bonding wire in all flexible conduit.

3.3 TESTING:

A. Obtain and record ground resistance measurements both from service entrance ground bus to the ground electrode and from the ground electrode to earth. Install additional bonding and grounding electrodes as required to comply with resistance limits specified under this Section.

B. Include typewritten records of measured resistance values in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

C. Use independent testing agency for all testing.

D. Use test equipment expressly designed for the purpose intended. Submit name of testing agency for review and approval, in writing, to the Engineer prior to the performance of any testing.



BLANK PAGE

SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0529-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0529

SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification section, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division-26, 27 and 28 section making reference to supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals, specified herein.


A. Extent of supports, anchors, and sleeves is indicated by drawings and schedules and/or specified in other Division-26 sections. See Section 260532, Raceways, for additional requirements.

B. Work of this section includes supports, anchors, sleeves and seals required for a complete raceway support system, including but not limited to: clevis hangers, riser clamps, C-clamps, beam clamps, one and two hole conduit straps, offset conduit clamps, expansion anchors, toggle bolts, threaded rods, U-channel strut systems, threaded rods and all associated accessories.


A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical supporting devices. Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/NEMA Std. Pub No. FB 1, "Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies". Provide electrical components that are UL-listed and labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES:

A. GENERAL:

1. Provide supporting devices; complying with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation; and as herein specified. See drawings for additional requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES:

A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as required, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply with requirements of NECA, NEC and ANSI/NEMA for installation of supporting devices.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other work.

C. Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structures. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where possible. For pre-and post tensioned construction, use pre-set inserts for support of all electrical work. Do not use toggle bolts, moly bolts, wood plugs or screws in sheetrock or plaster as support for any equipment or raceway.

SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 0529-2 © BNA Consulting

D. RACEWAYS:

1. Support raceways that are rigidly attached to structure at intervals not to exceed 8 feet on center, minimum of two straps per 10 foot length of raceway, and within 12" of each junction box, coupling, outlet or fitting. Support raceway at each 90° degree bend. Support raceway (as it is installed) in accordance with the following:

NUMBER OF RUNS 3/4" TO 1-1/4" 0 1-1/2" & LARGER 0

1 Full straps, clamps or hangers. Hanger

2 Full straps, clamps or hangers. Mounting Channel

3 or more Mounting Channel Mounting Channel

2. Support suspended raceways on trapeze hanger systems; or individually by

means of threaded rod and straps, clamps, or hangers suitable for the application. Do not use "tie wire" as a portion of any raceway support system; do not support raceway from ceiling support wires.

E. FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT:

1. Provide rigid attachment of all floor mounted equipment to the floor slab or structural system. Provide 5/8" bolts or expansion anchors at each 90 degree corner and at intervals not to exceed 48" on center along entire perimeter of the equipment. Provide rigid attachment for all floor mounted switchboards, panelboards, power and control equipment, motor control centers, dimmer cabinets, transformers (provide neoprene vibrations isolators at anchor points), oil switches, battery packs and racks, and similar equipment furnished under Division 26, 27 and 28.

F. WIREWAYS, BUS DUCTS AND CABLE TRAYS:

1. Provide vertical and lateral support systems for all wireways, busway, and cable trays that are supported from overhead structure. See Sections 260536 and 262500 for additional requirements.


CONDUIT RACEWAY 26 0532-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0532

CONDUIT RACEWAY

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to electrical raceways and specified herein.


A. Extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of raceways in this section include the following:

1. Electrical Metallic Tubing

2. Flexible Metal Conduit

3. Intermediate Metal Conduit

4. Liquid-tight Flexible Metal Conduit

5. Rigid Metal Conduit

6. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit


A. MANUFACTURERS: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway systems of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years.

B. STANDARDS: Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components that have been UL-listed and labeled. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems.

C. SUBMITTALS: Not required.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING:

A. GENERAL:

1. Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) as indicated; with minimum trade size of 3/4".

B. RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC): FS WW-C-0581 and ANSI C80.1.

C. INTERMEDIATE STEEL CONDUIT (IMC): FS WW-C-581.

D. PVC EXTERNALLY COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT: ANSI C80.1 and NEMA Std. Pub. No. RN 1.

E. ALUMINUM CONDUIT: Not acceptable.

F. MC CABLE:

1. MC Cable is acceptable for all branch circuits installed in gypsum wallboard walls from the home run device box to the last device box on the branch circuit and all boxes in between, from the home run device box to the branch panel, the circuit shall be installed in an approved raceway. MC Cable is acceptable for all light


fixture whips not longer than six feet in length. Located in removable grid ceilings. MC Cable is unacceptable to be installed from light fixture to light fixture. All MC Cable shall be provided with anti short fittings.

G. RIGID AND INTERMEDIATE STEEL CONDUIT FITTINGS:

1. Provide fully threaded malleable steel couplings; raintight and concrete tight where required by application. Provide double locknuts and metal bushings at all conduit terminations. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1-1/4" and larger.

H. ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT): FS WW-C-563 and ANSI C80.3.

I. EMT FITTINGS:

1. Provide insulated throat nylon bushings with non-indenter type malleable steel fittings at all conduit terminations. Install OZ Type B bushings on conduits 1" larger. Cast or indenter type fittings are not acceptable.

J. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT: FS WW-C-566, of the following type;

1. Zinc-coated steel.

K. FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 1, and Style A.

L. LIQUID TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT:

1. Provide liquid-tight, flexible metal conduit; constructed of single strip, flexible continuous, interlocked, and double-wrapped steel; galvanized inside and outside; coated with liquid-tight jacket of flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC).

M. LIQUID-TIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS: FS W-F-406, Type 1, Class 3, Style G.

N. EXPANSION FITTINGS: OZ Type AX, or equivalent to suit application.

2.2 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS:

A. GENERAL:

1. Provide non-metallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes and weights as

indicated; with minimum trade size of 3/4".

B. UNDERGROUND PVC PLASTIC UTILITIES DUCT:

1. Minimum requirements shall be schedule 40 for encased burial in concrete and for Type II for direct burial.

C. PVC AND ABS PLASTIC UTILITIES DUCT FITTINGS:

D. ANSI/NEMA TC 9, match to duct type and material.

E. HDPE CONDUIT: Not acceptable.

2.3 CONDUIT; TUBING; AND DUCT ACCESSORIES:

A. Provide conduit, tubing and duct accessories of types and sizes, and materials, complying with manufacturer's published product information, that mate and match conduit and tubing. Provide manufactured spacers in all duct bank runs.

2.4 SEALING BUSHINGS:

A. Provide OZ Type FSK, WSK, or CSMI as required by application. Provide OZ type CSB internal sealing bushings.

2.5 CABLE SUPPORTS:

A. Provide OZ cable supports for vertical risers, type as required by application.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS:

A. Install electrical raceways where indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with the following:

1. SERVICE ENTRANCE CONDUCTORS, AND CONDUCTORS OVER 600 VOLTS:

a. Install in rigid metal conduit (RMC), or intermediate metal conduit (IMC); except where buried below grade, install in non-metallic conduit or duct, individually encased in concrete. See duct banks.

2. FEEDERS UNDER 600 VOLTS:

a. Install feeders to panels and motor control centers and individual equipment feeders rated 100 amps and greater, in rigid metal conduit (RMC), or intermediate metal conduit (IMC), or Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); except where buried below grade, install in non-metallic conduit or duct. Encase feeders 1-1/4" and larger, individually in concrete where installed below grade. See duct banks.

3. BRANCH CIRCUITS, SIGNAL AND CONTROL CIRCUITS, AND INDIVIDUAL

EQUIPMENT CIRCUITS RATED LESS THAN 100 AMPS:

a. Install in electric metallic tubing (EMT). Below concrete slab-on-grade or in earth fill, install in non-metallic plastic duct. In areas exposed to weather, moisture, or physical damage, install in RMC or IMC. In suspended slabs, install in EMT. Encase non-metallic duct 1-1/4" and larger in concrete. See duct banks.

B. Provide 1000 feet of 3/4" conduit with 3 #12 conductors and 1000 feet of 3/4" conduit with 3 #10 conductors. Provide all supports, fittings, boxes, terminations, etc. as required for installation. Install only as directed by engineer. Credit back all unused material and labor to the Owner.

C. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components.

D. Install raceway in accordance with the following:

1. Provide a minimum of 12" clearance measured from outside of insulation from flues, steam and hot water piping, etc. Avoid installing raceways in immediate vicinity of boilers and similar heat emitting equipment. Conceal raceways in finished walls, ceilings and floor (other than slab-on-grade), except in mechanical, electrical and/or communication rooms, conceal all conduit and connections to motors, equipment, and surface mounted cabinets unless exposed work is indicated on the drawings. Run concealed conduits in as direct a line as possible with gradual bends. Where conduit is exposed in mechanical spaces, etc., install parallel with or at right angles to building or room structural lines. Do not install lighting raceway until piping and duct work locations have been determined in order to avoid fixtures being obstructed by overhead equipment.

2. Where cutting raceway is necessary, remove all inside and outside burrs; make cuts smooth and square with raceway. Paint all field threads (or portions of raceway where corrosion protection has been damaged) with primer and enamel finish coat to match adjacent raceway surface.

3. Provide a minimum of 1 ½” from nearest surface of the roof decking to raceway.

4. Provide a maximum of three phase conductors in any one conduit or as approved by electrical engineer. Where phase conductors share a common neutral they must have a means to simultaneously disconnect all ungrounded


conductors at the point where the branch circuits originate. The ungrounded and neutral conductors of a multi-wire branch circuit must be grouped together by wire ties at the point of origination.

5. Provide neutral and ground wire as specified elsewhere in documents.

E. Comply with NEC for requirements for installation of pull boxes in long runs.

F. Cap open ends of conduits and protect other raceways as required against accumulation of dirt and debris. Pull a mandrel and swab through all conduit before installing conductors. Install a 200 lb. nylon pull cord in each empty conduit run.

G. Replace all crushed, wrinkled or deformed raceway before installing conductors.

H. Do not use flame type devices as a heat application to bend PVC conduit. Use a heating device that supplies uniform heat over the entire area without scorching the conduit.

I. Provide rigid metal conduit (RMC) for all bends greater than 22 degrees in buried conduit. Provide protective coating for RMC bend as specified herein.

J. Where raceways penetrate building, area ways, manholes or vault walls and floors below grade, install rigid metal conduit (RMC) for a minimum distance of 10 feet on the exterior side of the floor or wall measured from interior face. Provide OZ, Type FSK, WSK or CSMI sealing bushings (with external membrane clamps as applicable) for all conduit penetrations entering walls or slabs below grade. Provide segmented type CSB internal sealing bushings in all raceways penetrating building walls and slabs below grade, and in all above grade raceway penetrations susceptible to moisture migration into building through raceway.

K. Install liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors, transformers, and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration.

L. Install spare 3/4" conduits (capped) from each branch panelboard into the ceiling and floor space. Run five into the ceiling space and five into the floor space. Where the floor is not accessible run six conduits into the ceiling space. Run conduits the required distance necessary to reach accessible ceiling space.

M. Provide OZ expansion fittings on all conduits crossing building expansion joints, both in slab and suspended.

N. Provide OZ cable supports in all vertical risers in accordance with NEC 300-19; type as required by application.

O. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of cables/conductors within raceways.

P. Raceway installation below grade:

1. Apply protective coating to metallic raceways in direct contact with earth or fill of any type; consisting of spirally wrapped PVC tape (1/2" minimum overlap of scotch wrap tape or equal); or factory applied vinyl cladding (minimum thickness .020 inches). Completely wrap and tape all field joints.

2. Burial depths must comply with NEC Section 300-5 but in no case be less than 24", unless noted otherwise on drawings.

Q. Raceway installation below slab-on-grade, or below grade:

1. For slab-on-grade construction, install runs of rigid plastic conduit (PVC) below slab. All raceway shall be located a minimum of 8” below bottom of slab. Install RMC (with protective coating) for raceways passing vertically through slab-on-grade. Slope raceways as required to drain away from electrical enclosures and to avoid collection of moisture in raceway low points.

2. Apply protective coating to metallic raceways in direct contact with earth or fill of any type; consisting of spirally wrapped PVC tape (1/2" minimum overlap of scotch wrap tape or equal); or factory applied vinyl cladding (minimum thickness .020 inches). Completely wrap and tape all field joints.


3. Mark all buried conduits that do not require concrete encasement by placing yellow plastic marker tape (minimum 6" wide) along entire length of run 12" below final grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in a common trench and do not exceed an overall width of 16", install a single line marker.

4. Burial depths must comply with NEC Section 300-5 but in no case be less than 24", unless noted otherwise on drawings.

R. Raceway installation in suspended slabs:

1. Install conduit as close to the middle of concrete slab as practicable without disturbing reinforcement. Do not install conduits of diameter greater than 1/3 of the slab thickness. Space conduits not less than 3 diameters on center (except at stub up locations). Provide OZ expansion fittings at all expansion joints. All raceways shall be installed with concrete tight fittings. Include copper ground conductor in all raceways installed in suspended slabs.

S. Raceway installation in hazardous locations:

1. Install RMC in all hazardous locations as defined by NEC. Provide suitable fittings, seal-offs, boxes, etc. to comply with requirements.

2. Engage at least five full threads on all fittings. Provide inspection fittings with explosion proof drains to prevent water accumulation in conduit runs. Install seal-offs for arcing or high temperature equipment, at housing with splices or taps and where conduits enter or leave the hazardous area. Provide seal-offs of the appropriate type for vertical or horizontal installation. Ground all metallic parts.

T. DUCTBANKS:

1. Provide ductbank construction as indicated using 3000 psi at 28 day strength concrete. Use Type II low alkali per ASTM C150. Use ASTM C-33 aggregate gradation with maximum size of 3/4". Use W/C ratio of 0.50. Install #4 reinforcing bar per ASTM 615 grade 50 in each corner of ductbank. Provide minimum 4" concrete cover on all sides of exterior conduits. Provide polypropylene pull rope in all spare duct.

U. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.



BLANK PAGE

ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 0533-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0533

ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is a part of each Division-26, 27 and 28 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein. See Section 260532, Raceways, for additional requirements.


A. The extent of electrical box and electrical fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings in this section include the following:

1. Outlet Boxes

2. Junction Boxes

3. Pull Boxes

4. Floor Boxes

5. Conduit Bodies

6. Bushings

7. Locknuts

8. Knockout Closures

9. Miscellaneous Boxes and Fittings


A. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of electrical boxes and fittings. Comply with ANSI C 134,1 (NEMA Standards Pub No. OS 1) as applicable to sheet-steel outlet boxes, device boxes, covers and box supports. Provide electrical boxes and fittings that have been UL-listed and labeled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit manufacturer’s data including specifications, installation instruction and general recommendations for each type of floor box used on project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FABRICATED MATERIALS:

A. INTERIOR OUTLET BOXES:

1. Provide one piece, galvanized flat rolled sheet steel interior outlet wiring boxes with accessory rings, of types, shapes and sizes, including box depths, to suit each respective location and installation, construct with stamped knockouts in back and sides, and with threaded screw holes with corrosion-resistant screws for securing box and covers and wiring devices; minimum size 4"x4"x2-1/8".

2. Provide an ‘FS’ box, with no knockouts when surface mounted in a finished, non-utility space. Surface mounting is only acceptable when approved by the Architect.

B. INTERIOR OUTLET BOX ACCESSORIES:


1. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation, including mounting brackets, hangers, extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, that are compatible with outlet boxes being used and fulfilling requirements of individual wiring applications.

C. WEATHERPROOF OUTLET BOXES:

1. Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal weatherproof outlet wiring boxes, of types, shapes and sizes (including depth) required, with threaded conduit ends, cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged waterproof caps suitably configured for each application, with face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant fasteners.

D. JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES:

1. Provide code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

E. FLOOR BOXES:

1. Single Service Floor Box: Provide leveling and fully adjustable floor service receptacle outlets and fittings of types and ratings indicated; and with finish as selected by Architect. Equip with wiring devices as specified in Section 262726. Provide boxes compatible with floor system; provide epoxy-coated stamped steel boxes or cast iron boxes for slab-on-grade construction; provide stamped steel boxes for suspended slabs. Equip with tile and/or carpet flanges to accommodate floor finish material. Boxes shall be available in one, two or three gang configurations. Boxes shall comply with UL Standard UL514A.

2. Multi-Service Floor Box: Provide leveling and fully adjustable multi compartment floor box; there shall be multiple independent wiring compartments; the floor box shall permit tunneling from end power compartment to end power compartment. Floor box shall accommodate a minimum of two duplex receptacles and two mounting plates for telecommunication devices. Equip with wiring devices as specified in Section 262726. Provide boxes compatible with floor system; with finish as selected by Architect. Provide epoxy-coated stamped steel boxes or cast-iron boxes for slab-on-grade construction; provide stamped steel boxes for suspended slabs. Equip with tile and/or carpet flanges to accommodate floor finish material. Boxes shall comply with UL Standards UL514A and/or UL514C.

3. Manufacturer: subject to compliance with requirements, provide floor boxes of one of the following:

a. Bell Electric/Square D Co.

b. Crouse-Hinds Co.

c. Harvey Hubbell, Inc.

d. Thomas & Betts.

e. Wiremold

F. CONDUIT BODIES:

1. Provide galvanized cast-metal conduit bodies, of types, shapes and sizes to suit respective locations and installation, construct with threaded-conduit-entrance ends, removable covers, and corrosion-resistant screws.

G. BUSHINGS, KNOCKOUT CLOSURES AND LOCKNUTS:

1. Provide corrosion-resistant punched-steel box knockout closures, conduit locknuts and malleable steel conduit bushings and offset connectors, of types and sizes to suit respective uses and installation.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS:

A. GENERAL:

1. Install electrical boxes and fittings where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

2. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable and raceway installation work.

3. Provide coverplates for all boxes. See Section 262726, Wiring Devices.

4. Provide weatherproof outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.

5. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed.

6. Install boxes and conduit bodies to ensure ready accessibility of electrical wiring. Do not install boxes above ducts or behind equipment. Install recessed boxes with face of box or ring flush with adjacent surface. Seal between switch, receptacle and other outlet box openings and adjacent surfaces with plaster, grout, or similar suitable material.

7. Fasten boxes rigidly to substrates or structural surfaces, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. Use bar hangers for stud construction. Use of nails for securing boxes is prohibited. Set boxes on opposite sides of common wall with minimum 10" of conduit between them. Set boxes on opposite sides of fire resistant walls with minimum of 24” separation.

8. Provide a minimum of 1 ½” from the nearest surface of the roof decking to the installed boxes.

9. Provide electrical connections for installed boxes.



BLANK PAGE

RACEWAY SYSTEMS 26 0536-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0536

RACEWAY SYSTEMS

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 Section making reference to electrical raceways specified herein.


A. Extent of raceways is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of raceways in this section include the following:

1. Cable tray systems

2. Overhead metal raceways

3. Underfloor metal raceways

4. Header ducts for cellular metal floor deck units

5. Surface metal raceways

6. Wire basket cable tray systems.


A. STANDARDS:

1. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways. Comply with applicable portions of UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems; and provide products and components that have been UL-listed and labeled. Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to construction and installation of raceway systems.

2. Comply with the following publications and standards for construction and installation or wire basket cable tray:

a. Comply with NEC Article 392

b. NEMA VE-1; NEMA VE-2-2001

c. NFPA 70B

d. ASTM B633; ASTM A653; ASTM A510

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA:

1. Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations, for each type of raceway as follows:

a. Surface Metal Raceways

b. Underfloor metal raceways

c. Header Ducts for Cellular Metal Floor Deck Units

d. Cable Tray Systems

e. Overhead metal raceways

f. Wire basket cable tray systems.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS:


1. Submit dimensioned drawings of raceway systems showing layout of raceways and fittings, spatial relationships to associated equipment, and adjoining raceways, for each type of raceway as follows:

a. Surface metal Raceways

b. Underfloor Metal Raceways

c. Header Ducts for Cellular Metal Floor Deck Units

d. Cable Tray Systems

e. Overhead metal raceways

f. Wire basket cable tray systems

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED RACEWAY SYSTEMS:

A. GENERAL:

1. Provide electrical raceways of types, grades, sizes, weights [wall thicknesses], and number of channels, for each service indicated. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not necessarily limited to, couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, holddown straps, end caps, and other components and accessories as needed for complete system.

B. SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS:

1. Provide galvanized steel surface metal raceways of sizes and channels indicated. Provide fittings indicated that match and mate with raceway. Paint with manufacturer's standard prime coating and finish color as indicated. Provide receptacles on centers as indicated on drawings or as directed by engineer.

2. MANUFACTURER:

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide surface metal raceways of one of the following:

i. Wiremold Company

ii. Hubbell Incorporated

C. CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS:

1. Provide UL-listed tray systems of sizes, types and capacities indicated, and meeting all requirements of NEMA VE-1. Trays to be provided include but are not necessarily limited to the following:

TYPE WIDTH DEPTH RUNG SPACING NEMACLASS

LADDER [6"][9"][12"][18"] [24"][30"][36"]

[3"][4"] [5"][6"]

[6"][9"] [12"][18"]

[1]

SOLID BOTTOM

[6"][9"][12"][18"] [24"][30"][36"]

[3"][4"] [5"][6"] [1]

2. Provide radius of 12”and in no case smaller than required to comply with

minimum radius requirement of cable manufacturer.

3. Provide all fittings including elbows, intersections, expansion joints, transition fittings, reducers, barrier strips, conduit-to-tray clamps, hangers, supports, retaining clips, etc. Bond each expansion joint in tray system by means of 1/O copper jumper (with crimped lug connectors) at each joint. Provide cantilever, single-rod or trapeze support systems as indicated. Provide all rod or trapeze supported tray systems with rigid unistrut support to structure; laterally at intervals not to exceed 25 feet on center, and longitudinally at intervals not to exceed 50 feet on center.

4. Provide tray with hot-dip (after fabrication) galvanized corrosion-resistant finish. Grind all rough edges, drip concentrations, etc, to smooth finish. Apply cold zinc spray to all field cut surfaces.


5. Provide barriers/dividers equal to the height of the tray dividing the following systems:

a. Data (Copper) Cabling

b. Optical Cabling

c. BMS Cabling

d. Intrusion Detection/Video Surveillance/Access Control

e. TV Distribution System Cabling

f. Intercom System Cabling

6. MANUFACTURER:

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cable tray systems of one of the following:

i. Cooper B-Line

ii. Wiremold/P/W

iii. Globe Tray, GS Metals

iv. Tyco Cope

v. Square D Company

vi. Mono-Systems

vii. Thomas & Betts

D. WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS:

1. MANUFACTURER:

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cable tray system of one of the following (OR APPROVED EQUAL):

i. Cooper B-Line Systems

ii. Cablofil, Inc.

iii. P/W Industries

iv. Hubbell Incorporated

2. Provide wire basket cable tray of types, grades, ratings, and sizes as specified and indicated meeting all requirements of NEMA VE-1. Provide complete assembly of raceway including, but not necessarily limited to, offsets, adapters, connector plates, splice plates, brackets, connector assemblies, holddown clamp assemblies, grounding clamps and other components and accessories as needed for complete system.

3. WIRE BASKET: Wire basket shall be made of high strength steel wires conforming to ASTM A510, and formed into a standard 2 inch by 4 inch wire mesh pattern with intersecting wires welded together. All wire ends along wire basket sides (flanges) shall be rounded during manufacturing for safety of cables and installers.

a. All straight section longitudinal wires shall be straight, with no bends.

b. Straight sections shall be furnished in standard 118 inch lengths.

c. Wire basket shall have a 4 inch usable loading depth by 20 inches wide.

d. Wire basket shall be electro-plated zinc in accordance with ASTM B633 SC2, with clear chromate sealer.

e. Wire basket shall have a load capacity of 116 lbs per foot based on 5 foot spacing between supports.

4. BENDS: Horizontal and vertical bends, and horizontal tees shall be field formed. Inside radius of field bends shall be no less than 12 inches, and in no case smaller than required to comply with minimum radius requirement of cable


manufacturer. Horizontal bends and tees shall be made such that the side rail of the tray is continuous with no gaps.

5. SPLICE ASSEMBLIES: Splice assemblies shall consist of splice plates and clamp/connectors furnished by the tray system manufacturer as standard components of the system. Splice assemblies shall be used to join separate horizontal sections together. Splice plates shall be approximately 2.7 inches long by 1.6 inches high, zinc-plated. Clamp/connectors shall be the bolted type consisting of welded stud plates with threaded studs and serrated flanged locknuts. Hardware shall be zinc-plated.

6. ACCESSORES AND COMPONENTS: Support accessories shall be zinc-plated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC3. All threaded components shall be coated in accordance with ASTM B633 SC1.

7. Provide all fittings including connector plates, splice plates, clamps, supports, etc.

8. Grind all rough edges, drip concentrations, etc, to smooth finish. Apply cold zinc spray to all field cut surfaces.

E. UNDERFLOOR HEADER DUCTS: [Provide spec]

1. MANUFACTURER:

a. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide underfloor header ducts of one of the following:

i. Robertson Company

ii. Square D Company

iii. Wiremold Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL RACEWAYS:

A. Install electrical raceways where indicated; in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA "Standard of Installation", and complying with recognized industry practices.

B. Coordinate with other work including metal and concrete deck work, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components.

C. Seal joints of underfloor ducts with sealing compound or tape prior to placing concrete.

D. Level and square raceway runs, and install at proper elevations/heights.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; remove burrs, dirt and construction debris.


ELECTRICAL SEISMIC CONTROL 26 0548-1

SECTION 26 0548

ELECTRICAL SEISMIC CONTROL

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED:

A. Anchorage and seismic restraint systems for all Division 26 isolated and non-isolated equipment, cable tray, and conduit systems.

B. Equipment/cable tray/conduit to isolated and/or seismically supported shall include but not be limited to the following:

1. Conduit 2. Cable Tray 3. Light Fixtures 4. Bus Duct

1.2 RELATED WORK:

A. Requirements: Provide Electrical Seismic Control in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. Section 260500 – Electrical General Provisions

1.3 REFERENCES:

A. International Building Code, Current Edition in use by Jurisdictional Authority.

B. NFPA Bulletin 90A, Current Edition.

C. UL Standard 181.


A. The Division 26 Contractor shall be responsible for supplying and installing equipment, vibration isolators, flexible connections, rigid steel frames, anchors, inserts, hangers and attachments, supports, seismic snubbers and bracing to comply with the following:

1. Short period design spectral response acceleration coefficient SDS=0.70. 2. One second period design spectral response acceleration coefficient SD1=0.28. 3. Site Class B. 4. Seismic Design Category D.


A. All supports, hangers, bases, anchorage and bracing for all isolated equipment and non-isolated equipment shall be designed by a professional engineer licensed in the state where the project is located, employed by the restraint manufacturer, qualified with seismic experience in bracing for electrical equipment. Shop drawings submitted for earthquake bracing and anchors shall bear the Engineer's signed professional seal. All calculations/design work required for the seismic anchorage and restraint of all Division 26 equipment and systems shall be provided by a single firm.

B. The above qualified seismic engineer shall determine specific requirements for equipment anchorage and restraints, locations and sizes based on shop drawings for the electrical equipment that have been submitted, reviewed and accepted by the Architect/Engineer for this project.

C. Seismic Engineer or the Engineer's Representative shall field inspect final installation and certify that bracing and anchorage are in conformance with the Seismic Engineer's design. A certificate of compliance bearing the Seismic Engineer's signed Professional


Engineer's seal shall be submitted and shall be included in each copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals.

D. The Division 26 Contractor shall require all equipment suppliers furnish equipment that meets the seismic code, with bases/skids/curb designed to receive seismic bracing and/or anchorage. All isolated and non-isolated electrical equipment bracing to be used in the project shall be designed from the Equipment Shop Drawings and certified correct by the equipment manufacturer for seismic description listed in Paragraph 1.4 above, with direct anchorage capability.

1.6 SUBMITTALS:

A. A single submittal shall be provided for all seismic anchorage and restraints for all Division 26 equipment and systems provided as part of this project. Individual submittals for specific systems will not be accepted.

B. Submit shop drawings, calculations, and printed data for the following items under provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract:

1. Complete engineering calculations and shop drawings for all seismic requirements for all equipment to be restrained as outlined in Paragraph 1.1 above, and as detailed on drawings.

2. The professional seal of the engineer who is responsible for the design of the Seismic Restraint System.

3. Details for all seismic bracing. 4. Details for steel frames, concrete inertia bases, and housekeeping pads. Include

dimensions, embed depths, dowelling details, and concrete reinforcing requirements.

5. Clearly outlined procedures for installing and adjusting the isolators, seismic bracing anchors, snubbers, cables, and bolt connections.

6. Floor plan noting the locations, size, and type of anchorage and restraint to be used.

7. Include confirmation that all calculations are based on the design criteria listed in Paragraph 1.4.A of this Section.

8. Certificate of Compliance.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS:

2.1 RESTRAINT EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS:

A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Suppliers for Non-Isolated Systems:

1. Mason Industries, Inc. 2. Korfund 3. Amber/Booth Company 4. Vibration Mountings and Control Company 5. Kinetics 6. International Seismic Application Technology 7. Tolco

B. Manufacture and design of restraints and anchors for isolated equipment shall be by the manufacturer of the vibration isolators furnished for the equipment.

2.2 SNUBBERS:

A. Snubbers shall be all-directional and consist of interlocking steel members restrained by replaceable shock absorbent elastomeric materials a minimum of 3/4 inch thick.

B. Snubbers shall be manufactured with an air gap between hard and resilient material of not less than 1/8 inch or more than 1/4 inch.

C. Snubbers shall be Mason Industries Z -1011 or accepted equivalent.



3.1 DESIGN AND INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. All electrical equipment cable tray and conduit shall be braced, anchored, snubbed or supported to withstand seismic disturbances in accordance with the criteria of this specification. Provide all engineering, labor, materials, and equipment for protection against seismic disturbances as specified herein. The following electrical components are exempt from seismic restraint requirements.

a. Components in Seismic Design Categories A and B (see 1.4 above).

b. Components in Seismic Design Category C (see 1.4 above) that have an important factor IP of 1.0 (see 1.4 above).

c. Components that have an importance factor IP of 1.0 (see 1.4 above), that are mounted less than four feet above the floor, that weigh less than 400 pounds, and that have flexible ductwork, piping, and conduit connections.

d. Components that have an importance factor IP of 1.0 (see 1.4 above), that weigh 20 pounds or less, and that have flexible ductwork, piping, and conduit connections.

2. Powder-actuated fasteners (shot pins) shall not be used for component anchorage in tension applications in Seismic Design Category D, E, or F.

3. Attachments and supports for electrical equipment shall meet the following provisions:

a. Attachments and supports transferring seismic loads shall be constructed of materials suitable for the application and designed and constructed in accordance with a nationally recognized structural code such as, when constructed of steel, AISC, Manual of Steel Construction (Ref. 9.8-1 or 9.8-2).

b. Friction clips shall not be used for anchorage attachment.

c. Expansion anchors shall not be used for electrical equipment rated over 10 hp (7.45 kW). Exception: Undercut expansion anchors.

d. Drilled and grouted-in-place anchors for tensile load applications shall use either expansive cement or expansive epoxy grout.

e. Supports shall be specifically evaluated if weak-axis bending of light-gauge support steel is relied on for the seismic load path.

f. Components mounted on vibration isolation systems shall have a bumper restraint or snubber in each horizontal direction. The design force shall be taken as 2Fp. The intent is to prevent excessive movement and to avoid fracture of support springs and any non- ductile components of the isolators.

g. Seismic supports shall be constructed so that support engagement is maintained.

B. Spring Isolated Equipment:

1. All vibration isolated equipment shall be mounted on rigid steel frames or concrete bases as described in the vibration control specifications unless the equipment manufacturer certified direct attachment capability. Each spring mounted base shall have a minimum of four all-directional seismic snubbers that are double acting and located as close to the vibration isolators as possible to facilitate attachment both to the base and the structure. Snubbers shall be installed with factory set clearances.

C. Non-Isolated Equipment:


1. The section 260548 (Electrical Seismic Control) Contractor shall be responsible for thoroughly reviewing all drawings and specifications to determine all equipment to be restrained. This Contractor shall be responsible for certifying that this equipment is mounted and braced such that it adheres to the system description criteria in part 1.04 of this specification section.

D. Conduit:

1. Seismic braces for conduit may be omitted when the distance from the top of the conduit to the supporting structure is 12” or less.

2. A rigid conduit system shall not be braced to dissimilar parts of a building or two dissimilar building systems that may respond in a different mode during an earthquake. Examples: Wall and a roof; solid concrete wall and a metal deck with lightweight concrete fill.

3. Unbraced conduit attached to in-line equipment shall be provided with adequate flexibility to accommodate differential displacements.

4. At the interface of adjacent structures or portions of the same structure that may move independently, utility lines shall be provided with adequate flexibility to accommodate the anticipated differential movement between the ground and the structure.

5. Provide large enough pipe sleeves through wall or floors to allow for anticipated differential movements.

E. Cable Tray:

1. Seismic restraints are not required for cable tray with importance factor IP of 1.0, provided that the following condition is met for the full length of each cable tray.

a. Cable trays are suspended from rod hangers and hangers that are 12” or less in length from the point rod attaches to tray, to the point rod connects to the supporting structure. Rods must be secured to both top and bottom cross angles with locking nuts above and below angle iron.


ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 26 0553-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0553

ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL



B. Requirements of the following Division 26 Sections apply to this section:

1. “Basic Electrical Requirements”.

2. “Basic Electrical Materials and Methods”.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following:

1. Buried electrical line warnings.

2. Identification labels for raceways, cables and conductors.

3. Operational instruction signs.

4. Warning and caution signs.

5. Equipment labels and signs.

6. Arc-flash hazard labels

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

C. Division 9 Section “Painting” for related identification requirements.

D. Refer to other Division 26 sections for additional specific electrical identification associated with specific items.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code”

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer’s data on each type of electrical identification products.

B. SAMPLES: Submit one sample of each component of the electrical identification system as follows:

1. Wire/cable tape marker.

2. Tags

3. Engraved, plastic laminate labels.

4. Arc-flash hazard labels.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. American Labelmark Co.


2. Calpico, Inc.

3. Cole-Flex Corp.

4. Emed Co., Inc.

5. George-Ingraham Corp.

6. Ideal Industries, Inc.

7. Kraftbilt

8. LEM Products, Inc.

9. Markal Corp

10. National Band and Tag Co.

11. Panduit Corp.

12. Radar Engineers Div., EPIC Corp.

13. Seton Name Plate Co.

14. Standard Signs, Inc.

15. W.H Brady, Co.

2.2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Colored Conduit Systems for raceway identification:

1. Factory-painted conduit and/or factory-painted couplings and fittings

B. Colored paint for raceway identification:

1. Use Kwal Paint colors as specified in Part 3 – Execution.

C. Color Adhesive Marking Tape for Raceways, Wires and Cables:

1. Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mills thick by 1” to 2” in width.

D. Underground Line Detectable Marking Tape:

1. Permanent, bright colored, continuous-printed, acid- and alkali-resistant plastic tape specifically compounded for direct-burial service. Not less than 6” wide by 4 mills thick.

2. With metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep.

3. Printed legend indicative of general type of underground line below.

E. Wire/Cable Designation Tape Markers:

1. Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound, cable/conductor markers with pre-printed numbers and letters.

F. Brass or Aluminum Tags:

1. Metal tags with stamped legend, punched for fastener.

2. Dimensions: 2” X 2” 19 gage.

G. Engraved, Plastic Laminated Labels, Signs and Instruction Plates:

1. Engraving stock plastic laminate, 1/16” minimum thickness for signs up to 20 sq. in. or 8” in length; 1/8 “ thick for larger sizes. Engraved legend in 1/4” high white letters on black face and punched for mechanical fasteners.

H. Arc-flash Hazard Labels:

1. ANSI Z535.4 Safety Label.

2. Adhesive backed polyester with self-laminating flap. Chemical, abrasion and heat resistant.

3. Dimensions: 5” x 3.5”


4. Information contained: Arc-flash boundary; Voltage; Flash Hazard Category; Incident Energy (arc rating); checkboxes for the required Personal Protective Equipment (PPE) and the date that the calculations were performed.

I. Equipment Labels:

1. Adhesive backed polyester with self-laminating flap. Chemical, abrasion and heat resistant.

2. Dimensions: minimum 5” x 2”

3. Conductor-Identification-Means Labels:

a. Information contained: the method utilized for identifying ungrounded conductors within switchboards, distribution panels and branch circuit panels.

4. Available-Fault-Current Labels:

a. Information contained: maximum available fault current at the respective piece of equipment, and date of calculation of fault current.

5. Source-of-Supply Labels:

a. Information contained: indicate the device or equipment where the power supply originates.

J. Baked Enamel Warning and Caution Signs for Interior Use:

1. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors legend and size appropriate to location.

K. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated and Metal Signs:

1. Self-tapping stainless steel screws or # 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts, flat and lock washers.

L. Cable Ties:

1. Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking nylon cable ties, 0.18” minimum width, 50-lb. Minimum tensile strength, and suitable for a temperature range from minus 40 F. to 185 F. Provide ties for specified colors when used for color coding.

M. Colored Support Wires:

1. When electrical equipment/wiring is supported by wires within the ceiling cavity, these wires shall be independent of the ceiling support assembly and shall be distinguishable by painting entire length in bright yellow.


3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Lettering and Graphics:

1. Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors and other designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering and colors as approved in submittals and as required by code.

B. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions and requirements of NEC.

C. Sequence of Work:

1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require a finish, install identification after completion of finish work.

D. Conduit Identification:

1. Identify Raceways of Certain Systems with Color Coding. Acceptable means of color identification are as follows:


a. Colored adhesive marking tape.

b. Field-painted colored bands.

c. Factory-painted conduit.

d. Color exposed or accessible raceways of the following systems for identification. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling conduit. Apply bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, and at 20-foot maximum intervals in straight runs. Apply the following colors:

i. Fire Alarm System: Red

ii. Sound/IC: Blue

iii. Telephone: Yellow

iv. Data: Green

v. MATV: Black

vi. Security: Orange

2. Identify Junction, Pull and Connection Boxes.

a. Code-required caution sign for boxes shall be pressured-sensitive, self-adhesive label indication system voltage in black, preprinted on orange background. Install on outside of box cover. Also label box covers on outside of cover with identity of contained circuits. Use pressure-sensitive plastic labels at exposed locations and similar labels or plasticized card stock tags at concealed boxes.

3. Label and paint the covers of the systems junction boxes as follows:

SYSTEM COLOR (ALL COLORS ARE KWAL PAINT)

Fire Alarm Red Alert AC118R

Sound/IC Neon Blue 7076A

Telephone Competition Yellow 7225A

Data Java Green AC098N

MATV Flat Black

Security Fiesta Orange AC107Y E. Underground Electrical Line Identification.

1. During trench backfilling, for exterior underground power, signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground line detectable marking tape, located directly above line at 6 to 8 inches below finished grade. Where multiple lines are installed in a common trench or concrete envelope, do not exceed an overall width of 16 inches; install a single line marker.

2. Install detectable marking tape for all underground wiring, both direct-buried and in raceway.

3. Provide red marker dye applied to concrete encased ductbank.

F. Conductor Color Coding.

1. Provide color coding for secondary service, feeder and branch circuit conductors throughout the project secondary electrical system as follows:

120/208 Volts Phase 277/480 Volts

Black A Brown

Red B Purple

Blue C Yellow

White Neutral Gray


Green Ground Green

2. Switch legs, travelers and other wiring for branch circuits shall be of colors other than those listed above.

3. Use conductors with color factory applied the entire length of the conductors except as follows:

a. The following field-applied color-coding methods may be used in lieu of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG.

b. Apply colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply the last two laps of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inch-wide tape in colors as specified. Do not obliterate cable identification markings by taping. Tape locations may be adjusted slightly to prevent such obliteration.

c. In lieu of pressure-sensitive tape, colored cable ties may be used for color identification. Apply three ties of specified color to each wire at each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced 3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten for snug fit, and cut off excess length.

G. Power Circuit Identification.

1. Securely fasten identifying metal tags or aluminum wraparound marker bands to cables, feeders, and power circuits in vaults, pull boxes, junction boxes, manholes, and switchboard rooms with 1/4-inch steel letter and number stamps with legend to correspond with designations on Drawings. If metal tags are provided, attach them with approximately 55-lb monofilament line or one-piece self-locking nylon cable ties.

2. Tag or label conductors as follows:

a. Future Connections: Conductors indicated to be for future connection or connection under another contract with identification indicting source and circuit numbers.

b. Multiple Circuits: Where multiple branch circuits or control wiring or communications/ signal conductors are present in the same box or enclosure (except for three-circuit, four-wire home runs), label each conductor or cable. Provide legend indicating source, voltage, circuit number, and phase for branch circuit wiring. Phase and voltage of branch circuit wiring may be indicated by mean of coded color of conductor insulation. For control and communications/signal wiring, use color coding or wire/cable marking tape at terminations and at intermediate locations where conductors appear in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tapes.

3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification schemes for the facility’s electrical installations.

H. Apply warning, caution and instruction signs and stencils as follows:

1. Install warning, caution, or instruction signs where required by NEC, where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of the items they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. Warning and caution signs shall be furnished and installed on, but not be limited to the following equipment and locations:


a. Entrances to rooms and other guarded locations that contain exposed live parts 600 volts or less; signs shall forbid unqualified personnel to enter.

b. Switch and Overcurrent device enclosures with splices, taps and feed-through conductors. Provide warning label on the enclosures that identifies the nearest disconnecting means for any feed-through conductors.

c. Entrances to buildings, vaults, rooms or enclosures containing exposed live parts or exposed conductors operating at over 600 volts: DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE-KEEP OUT.

d. Metal-enclosed switchgear, unit substations, transformers, enclosures, pull boxes, connection boxes and similar equipment operating at over 600 volts shall have appropriate caution signs and warning labels.

e. Indoor and Outdoor substations operating over 600 volts. Provide warning signs, instructional signs and single-line diagrams in accordance with NEC 225.70.

I. Emergency Operating Signs: Install engraved laminated signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, load shedding, or other emergency operations.

J. Install equipment/system circuit/device identification as follows:

1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic-laminate on each major unit of electrical equipment in building, including central or master unit of each electrical system. This includes communication/signal/alarm systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, with 1/4“-high lettering on 1-inch-high label (1 1/2-inch-high where two lines are required) white lettering in black field. White lettering in red field for Emergency Power Systems. Text shall match terminology and numbering of the Contract Documents and shop drawings. Apply labels for each unit of the following categories of electrical equipment.

a. Each service disconnect, to identify it as a service disconnect.

b. Panelboards (exterior and interior), electrical cabinets, and enclosures. For subpanels, identify feeder circuit served from.

c. Switches in fusible panelboards shall be labeled. Main switches shall be identified.

d. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items.

e. Electrical switchgear and switchboards.

f. Motor control centers.

g. Motor starters, including circuit origination, HP, heater size, FLA, and mechanical equipment designation.

h. Disconnect switches.

i. Pushbutton stations.

j. Power transfer equipment.

k. Contactors.

l. Dimmers.

m. Control devices.

n. Transformers.

o. Power generating units, to include transfer switches.

p. Telephone switching equipment.

q. Clock/program master equipment.

r. Call system master station.


s. TV/audio monitoring master station.

t. Fire alarm master station or control panel.

u. Busduct – Label all cable tap boxes, bus plug-in units, etc. with plastic laminate labels designating load served.

v. Variable frequency drives.

w. Lighting Control Equipment.

x. Uninterruptable Power Supply.

K. Post Conductor-Identification-Means labels at locations of switchboards, distribution panels and branch circuit panels. The labels shall identify the color-coding used on ungrounded conductors for each voltage system used on the premises.

L. Apply Available-Fault-Current labels at the service entrance equipment.

M. Apply Source-of-Supply labels on the exterior covers of equipment (except in single- or two-family dwellings) as follows:

1. Each switchboard supplied by a feeder.

2. Each branch circuit panelboard supplied by a feeder.

3. Each disconnect switch serving elevators, escalators, moving walks, chairlifts, platform lifts and dumbwaiters.

4. Each dry type transformer (or primary-side disconnect switch at transformer). If the primary-side disconnect is remote from the transformer, both the remote disconnect and the transformer shall be labeled, and the transformer label shall also indicate the location of the disconnect.

5. Each feeder disconnect, branch circuit disconnect, panelboard or switchboard in a remote building or structure.

6. Each on-site emergency power source, with sign placed at service entrance equipment to comply with NEC 700.

N. The label shall identify the device or equipment where the power supply originates, and the system voltage and phase. For example: Feeder Power Supply for Panel “XX” Originates at Panel “XX” (or Switchboard “XX”, Transformer “XX”, Switch “XX”, etc.); 120/208 volts, 3-phase (or 120/240, 277/480, etc.).

O. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers, pushbuttons, pilot lights, motor control centers, and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components, where labeling is specified elsewhere.

P. Install labels at locations indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.

Q. Engrave all receptacle plates other than those serving 120 volt, single phase devices. State voltage and amperage characteristics: Example; “208V 30A”.

R. Mark each device box (for each type of wiring device) with a permanent ink felt tip marker, indicating the circuit that the device is connected to: Example; “CKT A-1”

S. Label circuit breaker feeding fire alarm panel “Fire Alarm Circuit”. Using plastic laminate label, white lettering on a red background.



BLANK PAGE

PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY 26 0573-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0573

PROTECTIVE DEVICE STUDY

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.


A. Studies in this section include the following:

1. Fault current protective device and equipment evaluation

2. Protective device coordination study

3. Arc-flash hazard analysis and study


A. Provide protective device and arc-flash hazard studies performed by qualified engineers of the equipment manufacturer or an approved consultant. Studies must bear the professional engineer's stamp of the engineer in responsible charge of the protective device studies. Perform all work in accordance with latest IEEE and ANSI standards.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Provide submittals in Portable Document Format (PDF), electronically bookmarked and keyword searchable.

B. Preliminary Submittal: Submit partial study that includes the calculated values for short circuit current availability and arc flash levels for each switchgear bus, medium voltage controller, switchboard, low voltage motor control center, distribution panelboard, automatic transfer switch, and branch circuit panelboard. This data shall be submitted prior to, or at the same time as, submitting the entire electrical gear package. Contractor shall utilize construction drawings to estimate approximate feeder lengths for this preliminary submittal. Submitted data shall include equipment/panel designations, feeder conductor sizes, feeder lengths, and calculated short circuit values and arc flash levels. Include the utility transformer ratings and transformer impedances used for the preparation of the short circuit calculations.

C. Construction Period Submittal: During the construction period but prior to application of utility power to the electrical distribution system, submit an indexed copy of the complete protective device study based on actual field values. Include the following:

1. Introductory section with basic formulas, pertinent data, and rationale employed in the study.

2. One-line diagram for that portion of the system included in the study.

3. Calculations section showing tabulated calculations.

4. Results, recommendations, settings, etc.

D. Provide one revision to study based on engineering review comments for the completed study to allow for minor modifications to adjustable circuit breakers to minimize arc flash levels.

PART 2 – STUDIES

2.1 FAULT CURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICE & EQUIPMENT EVALUATION

A. Perform fault current analysis with the aid of a computer and appropriate software. Include as input data the maximum available short circuit contribution, resistance and


reactance components of the branch impedances, the X/R ratios, base quantities selected, and other source impedances.

B. Calculate fault current close and latch duty values and interrupting duty values on the basis of assumed three-phase bolted short circuits at each switchgear bus, medium voltage controller, switchboard, low voltage motor control center, distribution panelboard, branch circuit panel and other significant locations throughout the system. Include symmetrical fault currents, and X/R ratios in the fault current tabulations. For each fault location, list the total duty on the bus, as well as the individual contribution from each connected branch, with its respective X/R ratio. Calculate ground fault currents at each bus. Incorporate major motor contributions in determining momentary and interrupting ratings of protection devices.

C. Perform an evaluation to determine the adequacy of circuit breakers, molded case switches, automatic transfer switches, and fuses, by tabulating and comparing the short circuit ratings of these devices with the calculated fault currents. Apply appropriate multiplying factors based on system X/R ratios and protective device rating standards. Report problem areas or inadequacies in the equipment due to short circuit currents prior to release for fabrication of switchgear, switchboards and/or appliance panelboard.

2.2 PROTECTIVE DEVICE COORDINATION STUDY

A. Perform a protective device coordination study including the necessary calculations and logic decisions required to select power fuse ratings, protective relay characteristics and settings, ratios and characteristics of associated current transformers, and low voltage breaker trip characteristics and settings. Perform the studies in accordance with the latest applicable IEEE and ANSI standards.

B. Include all medium and low voltage classes of equipment in the coordination study from the building or plant service protective devices down to and including the largest rated device in the low voltage motor control centers and panelboards. Include the phase and ground overcurrent protection as well as settings of all other adjustable protective devices.

C. Develop time-current characteristics of the specified protective devices on log-log paper. Include complete titles, representative one-line diagram and legends, significant motor starting characteristics, complete parameters of transformers, complete operating bands of low voltage circuit breaker trip curves and fuses. Indicate on plots the types of protective devices selected, proposed relay taps, time dial and instantaneous trip settings, transformer magnetizing inrush and ANSI transformer withstand parameters, cable thermal overcurrent withstand limits and significant symmetrical and asymmetrical fault currents. Adhere to all restrictions of the National Electrical Code. Maintain proper coordination intervals and separation of characteristic curves.

D. Provide coordination plots for phase and ground protective devices on a system basis. Provide a sufficient number of separate curves to clearly indicate the coordination achieved.

E. Provide the selection and settings of the protective devices in a tabulated form listing circuit identification, IEEE device number, current transformer ratios and connection, manufacturer and type, range of adjustment and recommended settings. Provide a tabulation of the recommended power fuse selection for medium voltage fuses where applied in the system. Promptly report any discrepancies, problem areas, or inadequacies prior to release for fabrication of switchgear, switchboards and/or appliance panels.

2.3 ARC-FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS AND STUDY

A. Perform an arc-flash hazard analysis and study. Include the necessary calculations required to determine the level of Personal Protection Equipment (PPE) that a worker must use, the Arc Flash Boundary in inches, and the incident energy at each location. This information shall be calculated and determined for each piece of service entrance equipment, each power distribution switchboard or panel, each separately-mounted


circuit breaker, each motor control center, each individually mounted motor starter, and for each branch circuit panelboard.

B. Perform the analysis and study in accordance with IEEE 1584.

C. Furnish and install a label at each piece of service equipment, each power distribution switchboard or panel, each separately mounted circuit breaker, each motor control center, each individually mounted motor starter, and each branch circuit panel board. The label shall be an ANSI approved Arc Flash Warning Label that warns and instructs workers of the arc flash hazard, voltage, arc flash boundary, and required PPE (Personal Protective Equipment).

2.4 ANALYSIS/REPORT

A. Include the following in the report.

1. Description, purpose, basis and scope of the study and a single line diagram of that portion of the power system that is included within the scope of the study.

2. Tabulations of circuit breaker, fuse and other protective device ratings versus calculated short circuit duties and commentary regarding same. Include formulas and description of methods used.

3. Protective device time versus current coordination curves, tabulations of relay and circuit breaker trip settings, fuse selection, and commentary regarding same.

4. Fault current calculations including a definition of terms and guide for interpretation of computer printout.

5. Recommended size for power fuses and recommended settings for ground fault relays and for all adjustable trip relays, circuit breakers, etc.

6. Tabulation of arc-flash calculations for each location and tabulation of arc-flash hazard, voltage, boundary and required PPE for each equipment item listed in the arc-flash analysis.

2.5 PROTECTIVE DEVICE TESTING, CALIBRATION AND ADJUSTMENT

A. Provide the services of a qualified field engineer employed by the equipment manufacturer, and necessary tools and equipment to test, calibrate and adjust the protective relays, ground fault relays and circuit breaker trip devices as recommended in the Protective Device Study.

2.6 TYPEWRITTEN DEVICE SETTING TABULATION:

A. Provide type written tabulation that includes all settings for each protective relay, ground fault relay and circuit breaker solid-state trip devices. Enclose the table in a protective plastic sleeve and affix to the main service entrance equipment.


OCCUPANCY SENSORS 26 0923-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0923

OCCUPANCY SENSORS

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to wiring devices specified herein.


A. The extent of occupancy sensor work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of occupancy sensors in this section include the following:

1. Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensors

2. Passive Infrared Ceiling and Wall Mount Sensors

3. Control Pack

4. Passive Infrared Wall Switch

5. Dual Technology Wall Switch

6. Dual Technology Wall Switch with Dimming and Daylight Control.

7. Ultrasonic Wall Switch

8. Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensor with Daylight Control

9. Dimming Ballast Ambient Light Controller

10. Dual Technology Ceiling Sensor w/ Control Pack


A. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards as applicable to construction and installation of occupancy sensors. Provide occupancy sensors that have been UL listed and labeled.

B. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems, motor loads and any other passive infrared or microwave systems.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on occupancy sensors, control modules, wiring diagrams, interconnection diagrams and any related accessories.

B. Submit scaled drawings with lighting fixtures shown clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years of experience in the sensor and lighting control industry. Sensors and related relays shall be compatible with the specific lighting types controlled. All sensors shall be of the same manufacturer, mixing brands of sensors is not acceptable.

A. ULTRASONIC (MICROPHONICS) CEILING SENSORS: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. The sensor shall be Class 2, low voltage device capable of mounting to a wall or ceiling as required for optimum coverage.


2. Sensor shall incorporate one transmitter for each receiver oriented in the same direction.

3. Sensor shall be capable of being networked with additional units to achieve adequate coverage.

4. Sensor shall utilize a dry contact relay for control of lighting relay.

5. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity from 0% to 100% for coverage pattern.

6. Sensor shall have time out adjustment from 15 seconds to 32 minutes. Timer shall use a timer chip and be linear in adjustment.

7. Sensitivity and timer controls shall be accessible on the front of the sensor, but recessed to inhibit tampering.

8. Sensor shall incorporate an accessible, but recessed, ON override device.

9. Sensor shall be easily mounted to a suspended ceiling tile without using large holes, or to a standard 4 x 4 box.

10. Sensor shall be available with more than one pair of transmitters/receivers to achieve coverage required.

11. Sensor shall incorporate a real time motion indicator visible from the front of the unit.

12. Transmitters/receivers shall be protected from damage.

13. Subject to compliance with the above requirements, provide models of one of the following:

a. Hubbell-ATU Series

b. Sensor Switch-CM Series

c. Wattstopper-WT Series

d. Mytech – Omni- US Series

e. Lithonia – LMTO Series

f. Greengate OMC-U Series

g. Leviton – OSC UOW Series

B. PASSIVE INFRARED CEILING AND WALL MOUNT SENSORS: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. The sensor shall be Class 2, low voltage device capable of mounting to a wall or ceiling as required for optimum coverage.

2. Sensor shall utilize a dual element pyroelectric detector and a multi-segmented lens to achieve adequate coverage.

3. Sensor shall be capable of being networked with additional units to achieve adequate coverage.

4. Sensor shall utilize a dry contact relay for control of lighting relay.

5. Sensor shall have time out adjustment from 8 seconds to 32 minutes. Timer shall be linear in adjustment.

6. Sensor shall incorporate a motion indicator behind the lens array.

7. Ceiling mount sensor shall have a 360 degree field of view with a 34 foot diameter coverage pattern when mounted at a height of twelve feet.

8. Ceiling mount sensor shall protrude no more than 1.5 inches when surface mounted. Sensor shall be capable or recessed mounting without impairing field of view.

9. Wall mount sensor shall have a 117 degree field of view and cover up 1600 square feet when mounted at a height of eight feet.

10. Wall mount sensor shall have three adjustment positions for range control.



a. Hubbell-ATP Series

b. Sensor Switch-CM Series

c. Wattstopper-CX Series

d. Mytech-Omni-IR/LO-IR Series

e. Lithonia - LIRO Series

f. Greengate OMC-P Series

g. Leviton – OSWWV/IOW Series

C. PASSIVE INFRARED WALL SWITCH: Where units are indicated provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Sensor shall utilize a dual element pyroelectric detector behind a lens to detect the motion of infrared energy emitted by the human.

2. Lens shall be of the multi-element type that divides the field of view into forty zones of detection.

3. Sensor shall fit a single gang switch box and utilize a decorator cover plate.

4. Sensor shall not protrude more than 0.75 inches from switch box.

5. Sensor shall operate at 120VAC and 277VAC.

6. Sensor shall have a time-out delay, adjustable from 1 minute to 30 minutes.

7. Sensor shall have an Automatic/OFF switch on front of unit.

8. Sensor shall incorporate a daylight control. The adjustable ambient light control shall be adjustable from 20 to 420 foot-candles.

9. Sensor shall have a 170 degree field of view. Detection beam shall be horizontal.

10. Sensor shall use a dry contact relay to control the lighting load.

11. Sensor shall be rated for 0 to 600 watts at 120VAC and 277VAC and adapt automatically to the operating voltage.


a. Hubbell-WS Series

b. Sensor Switch-WSD-P Series

c. Wattstopper-WS Series

d. Mytech-LP Series

e. Lithonia - LIRW Series

f. Greengate OSW-P Series

g. Leviton – ODS 10 – ID Series

D. ULTRASONIC (MICROPHONICS) WALL SWITCH: Where units are indicated provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Sensor shall utilize active ultrasonics to detect motion.

2. Sensor shall have two ultrasonic transmitters and one receiver.

3. Sensor shall incorporate an inrush current limiter circuit to protect the relay contacts.

4. Sensor shall utilize a dry relay contact for control of the lighting load.

5. Sensor shall have a time out adjustment from 8 seconds to 32 minutes. Timer shall be linear and controlled by a timer chip.

6. Sensor shall have automatic sensitivity adjustment and be microprocessor controlled.

7. Sensor shall have automatic gain setback to reduce the sensitivity after the sensor has turned off the lighting to prevent false tripping.


8. Sensor shall have transmitter control adjustments to prevent false tripping from hallway traffic.

9. Sensor shall have a 180 degree field of view, coverage up to 800 square feet, and shall detect six inches of hand movement towards the sensor at a distance of 22 feet. Sensor shall detect body motion towards the sensor at a distance of 32 feet.

10. Sensor shall operate at 120VAC and 277VAC.

11. Sensor shall be rated for 40 to 740 watts at 120VAC and 90 to 1400 watts at 277VAC.

12. Sensor shall be automatic on and shall have an automatic to off override switch on the unit. Switch shall be an air gap switch to disconnect power to the lighting load.

13. Sensor shall have a real time motion indicator on the front of the unit.

14. Sensor shall mount to a single or double gang switch box.


a. Hubbell-ATU 1277 Series

b. Sensorswitch-WSD-PDT-P Series

c. Mytech LH-US Series

d. Greengate OSW-U Series

e. Leviton – OSSMT-MD Series

E. DUAL TECHNOLOGY WALL SWITCH: Where units are indicated provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Sensor shall utilize PIR (Passive Infrared) to turn on the lights and then PIR or US (Ultrasonic) technologies to keep lights on.

2. Sensor shall incorporate an inrush current limiter circuit to protect the relay contacts.

3. Sensor shall utilize single or dual dry relay contacts for control of the lighting loads. Contractor shall verify requirements in coordination with the drawings.

4. Sensor shall have a self-adjusting time delay, selectable 5, 15 and 30 minutes.

5. Sensor shall have automatic sensitivity adjustment and be microprocessor controlled.

6. Sensor shall have light level sensing 0 to 200 footcandles.

7. Sensor shall have a 180 degree field of view, coverage up to 800 square feet and shall detect 6 inches of hand movement towards the sensor up to 300 square feet; and body motion towards the sensor up to 1000 square feet.

8. Sensor shall be rated for 0 to 800 watts at 120VAC and 0 to 1200 watts at 277VAC.

9. Sensor shall be automatic on and shall have an automatic to off override switch on the unit. Switch shall be equipped with an air gap switch to disconnect power to the lighting load.

10. Sensor shall have real time motion indicator on the front of the unit.

11. Sensor shall mount to a single gang switch box.

12. Subject to compliance with the above requirements. Provide models of one of the following:

a. Greengate ONW-D

F. DUAL TECHNOLOGY WALL SWITCH WITH DIMMING AND DAY-LIGHT CONTROL: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:


1. Dual technology sensors shall have one of its two technologies, not require motion to detect occupancy.

2. Sensors shall offer a minimum on timer of at least 15 minutes, in order to prevent all cycling of lamps before they have burned for the lamp manufacturers minimum recommended time period.

3. Sensors shall utilize an occupancy time delay that keeps lights on after last detected occupancy. Factory default setting of the occupancy time delay shall be 15 minutes.

4. Manual adjustment to the occupancy time delay so as to increase it shall be accommodated.

5. Sensor shall be capable of switching both 120 VAC and 277 VAC.

6. Sensor shall recess into single gang switch box and fit standard GFI opening.

7. Sensor shall meet NEC grounding requirements by providing a dedicated ground connection and intrinsically grounding through its mounting strap.

8. Line and load wire connections shall be interchangeable.

9. Wall switch sensor shall have field programmable adjustments for selecting operational modes, occupancy time delays, minimum on time, and photocell set-point.

10. Sensor shall be capable of both auto-on and manual operation.

11. Combination photocell/dimming sensors set point and deadband shall be automatically calibrated through the sensors microprocessor by initiating the automatic set point programming procedure. Min and max dim settings as well as set point may be manually entered.


a. Sensor-switch – N5X-PDT-D Series

G. ULTRASONIC (MICROPHONICS) CEILING SENSOR WITH DAYLIGHT CONTROL: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Sensor shall meet all requirements of Ultrasonic Ceiling Sensors.

2. Sensor shall incorporate a daylight control photocell to control the lighting based on available ambient light and occupancy.

3. Photocell shall be adjustable from 2 to 300 footcandles.

4. Photocell shall have an adjustable dead band control from 10% to 400% to set the difference between lights on level and lights off level.

5. Adjustments shall be accessible on front of sensor.

6. Photocell control shall have a bi-colored LED on front of sensor to aid in adjusting lighting on\off levels.

7. Photocell control shall have an adjustable time delay from 2 seconds to 4 minutes to prevent lights from cycling during temporary interruptions of ambient light.

8. Switching priority shall be given to the occupancy sensor function when the space is vacant to turn the lighting off.


9. Daylight control shall override the sensor when the space is occupied to turn the lighting off if there is sufficient ambient light available and on when ambient light level drops.

10. Daylight control shall not be dependent on the sensor cycling the lighting off before photocell control will operate.

11. Daylight control sensor shall be able to be networked with other sensors.


a. Hubbell-ATU/CRP Series

b. Sensor Switch-CM9-P Series

c. Wattstopper-DT Series

d. Mytech-Omni US –RP Series

e. Leviton – OSC UOW Series

H. DIMMING BALLAST AMBIENT LIGHT CONTROLLER: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Ambient light controller shall wire directly to the low voltage control circuit of the ballast.

2. Control shall be by a photocell that senses available daylight and adjusts the light output to maintain a preset light level.

3. Photocell control shall be adjustable.

4. Ambient light controller shall be capable of controlling up to 48 ballasts.

5. Ambient light controller shall not require a power source other than that supplied by the ballast.


a. Sensor Switch-CM-ALC Series

b. Wattstopper-WD Series

c. Mytech DLC-7 Series

I. DUAL TECHNOLOGY CEILING SENSOR: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Sensor shall incorporate ultrasonic (microphonics) and infrared technologies in a single unit.

2. Sensor shall be Class 2, low voltage; capable of mounting in the ceiling for maximum coverage.

3. Sensor shall use internal microprocessor for motion signal analysis and automatic self-adjustment.

4. Sensor shall have automatic self-adjustment algorithm that adjusts timer and sensitivity settings to maximize performance and minimize energy usage.

5. Sensor shall have manual time-out adjustment from 8 minutes to 32 minutes and automatic time out from 8 minutes to 100 minutes.

6. Sensor shall have test time-out setting of 8 seconds, with automatic return to 8 minutes after one hour if sensor is left in test mode.

7. Sensor’s microprocessor shall automatically extend timer by 1 hour in response to recognition to false off condition. After 5 hours, sensor reduces extended time by 30 minutes and continues to reduce by 30 minute increments over the next few days.

8. Sensor’s microprocessor shall automatically reduce either PIR or ultrasonic sensitivity in response to false on condition.


9. Sensor microprocessor will automatically monitor PIR background threshold signal level and makes corresponding sensitivity adjustments automatically.

10. Sensor microprocessor algorithm shall incorporate automatic adaptation to continuous airflow.

11. For airflow that is so intense as to mask motion, sensor shall flash indicator LED code to indicate excessive airflow.

12. Sensor’s microprocessor shall use a four week learning period and develop a circadian calendar.

13. An internal 24 hour 7 day clock establishes what periods the room is typically occupied, biasing sensor to keep lights on while normally occupied and off when normally unoccupied.

14. Sensor shall have selection settings for the following dual technology schemes:

a. High Sensitivity and High Confidence (miser mode)

15. Sensor shall be available with either 180 degrees or 360 degrees coverage pattern.

16. Infrared lens shall have 360 degree field of view. Two types of lens shall be available, standard and extra dense.

17. Sensor shall have a variety of mask inserts for PIR coverage rejection to prevent false tripping.

18. Transducers shall be protected from tampering.

19. Sensor shall have manual adjustments for timer and sensitivities and override switches to force manual adjustment mode.

20. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity from 0% to 100% for both ultrasonic and infrared.

21. Controls shall be behind cover to resist tampering. All adjustments shall be accessible from the front of the sensor.

22. Sensor shall be available with a photocell adjustment from 20 to 3,000 Lux.

23. Sensor shall provide internal operating status and settings confirmation via LED motion lamp indicator.

24. Sensor shall have two (if 180 degree) or three (if 360 degree) real time LED motion indicators visible from the front of the unit: Red = infrared; green = ultrasonic.


a. Hubbell-ATD Series

b. Sensor Switch-CM-PDT Series

c. Wattstopper-DT Series

d. Mytech-Omni-DT Series

e. Lithonia - LMTO Series

f. Leviton – OSC UOW Series

g. Greengate OMC – DT Series

J. PASSIVE INFRARED CEILING SENSOR: Where units are indicated, provide a sensor that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Sensor shall incorporate infrared sensing technology.

2. Sensor shall be Class 2, low voltage; capable of mounting in the ceiling for maximum coverage.

3. Sensor shall use internal microprocessor for signal analysis and automatic self-adjustment.


4. Sensor shall have automatic self-adjustment algorithm that adjusts timer and sensitivity settings to maximize performance and minimize energy usage.

5. Sensor shall have manual time-out adjustment from 8 minutes to 32 minutes and automatic time-out from 8 minutes to 100 minutes.

6. Sensor shall have test time-out setting of 8 seconds, with automatic return to 8 minutes after one hour if sensor is left in test mode.

7. Sensor microprocessor shall automatically extend timer by 1 hour in response to recognition of false off condition.

8. After 5 hours, sensor reduces extended time by 30 minutes and continues to reduce by 30 minute increments over the next few days.

9. Sensor’s microprocessor will automatically monitor PIR background threshold signal level and makes corresponding sensitivity adjustments automatically.

10. Sensor’s microprocessor shall use a four week learning period and develop a circadian calendar. An internal 24 hour 7 day clock establishes what periods the room is typically occupied, biasing sensor to keep lights on.

11. Sensor shall be available with a 360 degree coverage pattern. Infrared lens shall have 360 degree field of view. Two types of lens shall be available, standard and extra dense.

12. Sensor shall have mask inserts for PIR coverage rejection.

13. Sensor shall have manual adjustments for timer and sensitivities and override switches to force manual adjustment mode.

14. Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity from 0% to 100% for infrared sensor.

15. Controls shall be behind cover to resist tampering. All adjustments shall be accessible from the front of the sensor.

16. Sensor shall be available with a photocell adjustment from 20 to 3,000 Lux.

17. Sensor shall have one real time LED motion indicator visible from the front of the unit: Red = infrared.


a. Hubbell-ATP Series

b. Sensor Switch-CM-9 Series

c. Wattstopper-WPIR CX Series

d. Mytech-Omni-IR

e. Lithonia - LIRO Series

f. Greengate OMC-P Series

g. Leviton – OSC IOW Series

K. 24 VDC POWER/CONTROL PACK: Where units are indicated, provide a power/control pack that meets the following minimum requirements:

1. Control module shall consist of a DC power supply and a dry contact relay for switching a lighting load.

2. Control module shall be available in versions to accept 120, and 277 VAC line voltages.

3. Output shall be 24VDC nominal, and shall be inherently safe, low voltage, limited power output (Class 2).

4. Output shall supply 100mA current, in addition to current consumed internally to operate internal relay.

5. Relay shall utilize normally open, silver alloy dry contacts, and shall be rated for a 20A ballast load at 120V and 277V.

6. Relay function shall not require more than 5 mA control current to operate.


7. Control module shall have line voltage wiring, consisting of input voltage and relay contact connections, exiting from one end, and low voltage DC connections, consisting of ground, power, and control wires, exiting from the other end.

8. Control module shall be sized to fit inside a standard 4” x 4” junction box.

9. Control module shall be equipped with a 1/2” EMT threaded male fitting on the line voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the outside of a junction box with the line voltage wiring internal to the box and the low voltage wiring external.

10. Control module shall be equipable with accessory 1/2” EMT threaded male fitting on the low voltage end, such that it may be mounted to the inside of a ballast cavity with the box and line voltage wiring internal to the cavity and the low voltage wiring external.

11. Slave module shall be available for switching additional circuits. Slave module has same construction and specifications as control module except without power supply function.


a. Hubbell-CU Series

b. Sensor Switch-PP-20 Series

c. Wattstopper-BEP Series

d. Mytech-MP Series

e. Lithonia - LPCS Series

f. Greengate SP20-MV Series

g. Leviton – OSC/OSA Series


3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT:

A. Install occupancy lighting control system components and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that lighting control equipment complies with requirements.

B. Comply with requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NECA's "Standard of Installation" pertaining to general electrical installation practices.

C. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings, as necessary to interface installation of lighting control equipment work with other work.

D. Contractor shall be on site as required, to adjust lighting control units for proper operation.

E. Mount the switchpack in a standard 4" junction box. Mount sensor to a standard 4” junction boxes. Refer to manufacturer supplied mounting instructions.

F. Provide 5 spare sensors for each type used on project.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements.

B. System start-up: Provide a factory authorized technician to verify the installation and test the system.

C. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.


D. Contractor shall visit the job site 3 months after the owner has taken occupancy and adjust any units not operating properly, otherwise remove and replace with new units.

3.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICES:

A. System Start-Up: Provide a factory authorized technician to verify the installation, test the system, and train the owner on proper operation and maintenance of the system. Before requesting start-up services, the installing contractor shall verify that:

1. The sensors have been fully installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Low voltage wiring for overrides and sensors is completed.

3. Accurate ‘as-built’ load schedules have been prepared.

4. Proper notification of the impending start-up has been provided to the owner’s representative.

5. Programming of all switches, sensors, power packs, relays, etc. shall be completed by factory authorized technician, prior to final and training.

B. Factory support: Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the owner during the warranty period. Factory assistance shall consist of assistance in solving programming or other application issues pertaining to the control equipment. The factory shall provide a toll free number for technical support.

C. Functional Testing:

1. The owner shall hire a third party that will conduct and certify the functional testing.

2. Lighting controls devices shall be tested to ensure that control hardware and software are calibrated, adjusted, programmed, and in proper working conditions in accordance with the construction documents, manufacturer’s instructions and code requirements. The following shall be performed:

a. Certify that sensors have been located, aimed and calibrated per manufacturer recommendations.

b. Status indicator operates properly.

c. Fixtures that are controlled by auto-on controls turn on to permitted level.

d. Fixtures that are controlled by manual on controls operate when manually activated.

e. Fixtures do not turn on incorrectly due to HVAC or movement outside the controlled area.

f. Confirm that occupancy sensors turn off after space is vacated and do not turn on unless space is occupied.

g. Simulate unoccupied conditions and confirm that vacancy sensors only turn on manually and turn off after space is vacated.

3. The party responsible for the functional testing shall provide documentation that the installed lighting controls meet or exceed all performance criteria and shall not be directly involved in the design or construction of the project.

3.4 WARRANTY:

A. Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year limited warranty on lighting control system. A


ten (10) year limited warranty shall be provided on the lighting control relays.

3.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. A complete set of ‘as-builts’ drawings showing installed wiring, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of this equipment shall be included in the operating and maintenance manuals upon complete of the system.

B. Provide a CD to the owner containing the information specified below. The CD shall include all information required to allow the Owner to change the schedules themselves. The CD shall contain a minimum of following:

1. CAD drawing files of ‘as-built’ lighting control components and point to point connections.

2. General configuration programming.

3. Job specific configuration programming to include schedule.

4. Tutorial file on complete programming of lighting control system.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Provide four (4) hours of video taped training in two 2 hour sessions on the operation and use of the lighting control equipment, at job site, at no cost to the Owner.

3.7 MANUFACTURER AUTHORIZED PERSONNEL TRAINING:

A. Building Operating Personnel Training: Train Owner's building personnel in procedures for starting-up, testing and operating lighting control system equipment.


LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT 26 0943-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 0943

LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT

PART 1 – GENERAL




1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of lighting control equipment work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, lighting control panels, control stations and other user interface devices, wiring and ancillary equipment.

B. Types of lighting control equipment specified in this section, includes the following:

1. Low voltage relay control panels

2. Wall stations

3. Occupancy sensors

4. Daylight photosensor

C. Requirements are indicated elsewhere in these specifications for work including but not limited to raceways, electrical boxes and fittings required for installation of lighting control equipment, not work of this section.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of lighting control equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. To ensure a uniform installation and single responsibility, all switching and dimming equipment described herein shall be supplied by a single manufacturer.

B. Installer: Qualified with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on projects with lighting control equipment installation work similar to that required for project.

C. NEC Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable National Electrical Codes regarding electrical wiring standards.

D. NEMA Compliance: The control system shall comply with all applicable portions of the NEMA Standard regarding the types of electrical equipment enclosure.

E. Codes and Standards: Provide units that meet the requirements of IEEE Std. 2000.1.1999.

F. Independent Testing Laboratory: Provide units that have been tested and listed under UL 916 energy management equipment.

G. Component Pre-testing: All control equipment shall undergo strict inspection standards. The equipment shall be previously tested and burned-in at the factory prior to installation.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s data on lighting control equipment including, but not


limited to published catalog data sheets, rough-in diagrams and instructions for installation, operating and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings and documentation of lighting control components and interconnection including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Electronic controllers

2. Control stations

3. Photo sensors

4. Occupancy sensors

5. Network wiring details

6. Input and output wiring details

7. Lighting control panel load schedules

8. Accurately scaled equipment layouts, wire/cable routing and connections to control wiring and electrical power feeders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS:

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lighting control equipment of one of the following;

1. Douglas Lighting Controls

2. Greengate Lighting Control

3. Lighting Control & Design

4. Lutron

5. Nexlight

6. Wattstopper


A. The lighting control system shall provide seamless control and monitoring of all lighting included in the scope of work regardless of whether it is relay switched or dimmed.

B. The lighting control system shall consist of low voltage relay control panels with programmable switch inputs, the panel shall be microprocessor controlled with a touchscreen interface display. The touchscreen shall provide relay status information viewable through a protected windowed enclosure. All local programming shall be permissible through the self-prompting touchscreen.

C. Programmable intelligence shall include:

1. Time of day control (64 time-of-day/holiday schedules)

2. 32 holiday dates

3. Timed inputs (adjustable from 1 to 99 minutes)

4. Timed override (from touchscreen, adjustable from 1 to 999 minutes, then resumes normal schedule)

5. Pre-set controls

6. Auto daylight savings adjust

7. Astronomical clock with offsets

8. Local control (from touchscreen and local switch)

9. Digital switches

http://www.douglaslightingcontrol.com/

http://www.cooperindustries.com/content/public/en/lighting/controls/brands/greengate.html

http://lightingcontrols.com/

http://www.lutron.com/en-US/Pages/default.aspx

http://www.nexlight.com/nexlight/

http://www.wattstopper.com/


10. Flash warning of impending off for occupants

11. Network override

D. The controller shall permit lighting to be overridden on for after-hours use or cleaning. The controller shall provide priority and masking choices to allow for customizing the functions of switch inputs, thereby enabling switches to function differently at different times of day. These overrides shall be digital, network or hard-wired inputs.

E. The lighting control system shall be fully programmable through PC programming software. Programming shall be permitted through a direct RS-232 connection, modem or TCP/IP.

F. The control system shall provide networking between lighting control panels. The network shall support up to a maximum of 254 control panels. Panels shall permit data sharing for global controls. All inputs shall be transferable over the network to create any switching pattern.

G. The lighting control system shall log all control events. Log reports shall be available through the integral touchscreen or enterprise software.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Relay Panel

1. Enclosure: Shall be NEMA 1 rated, code gauge steel cabinet. Enclosure and contents shall be designed to operate in interior spaces with temperatures of 32°f - 104°f (0°-40°c) and 0-90% non-condensing humidity. Enclosure shall be available with optional recessed mounting hardware. See drawings for mounting requirements and refer to schedules on drawings for sizes.

2. Interior: Interiors shall be sized to accept relays and will provide true on/off indication of relay status through LED’s. The system shall employ all modular connectors to avoid repeat wiring in case of component failure. The system CPU board shall be mounted on quick release hinge pins. All connections for the dry contact inputs shall incorporate modular connectors.

3. Power Supply: The control panel shall incorporate the use of a multi-tapped transformer. The panel shall not require specification of voltage for each control location. The voltage of 120 and 277 VAC shall be available with each control panel.

4. Cover: Provide surface cover with captive screws in hinged, lockable configuration. A wiring schedule directory card shall be affixed to the covers back to allow identification of circuits/relays/load controlled. Schedules must be typed and related to final room names and numbers (not bid document room names and numbers).

5. High Voltage Barrier: The controller shall provide the ability to provide for either voltage separation or emergency circuit separation.

6. Relays: The system shall utilize normally open control relays, that are rated to 20A at 120/277 VAC. The relays shall be mechanically latching, and shall permit individual override and LED configuration of relay status. The relays shall be rated for 10 million operations.

7. System Controller: The system controller shall consist of an integral touchscreen that provides access to the main programming features. The touchscreen shall permit the user to manually command any or all relays individually.

a. Provide master on/off control of a relay group while still allowing individual relays to be overridden by their local switch.

b. The control system shall permit up to 32 dry contact inputs for override purposes. Momentary 3 wire or 2 wire (toggle) inputs shall be supported. Any input shall be software linked to any number or relays.


c. The controller shall provide timers for each override. Each override timer shall be capable of 0-999 minutes. Software shall enable or disable overrides based on priorities, masks or time of day scheduling.

d. The controller shall accept either dry contact or analog ambient light sensors. The controller shall provide power for the sensor. Sensors shall provide for outdoor, indoor or skylight applications and issue a command to the controller once the threshold is reached.

e. Each control panel shall incorporate diagnostic aids for confirmation of proper operation. The control panel shall employ both a backlit touchscreen and LED’s to indicate:

i. Power

ii. System OK

iii. Network communications

iv. System clock and date

v. Programming confirmation

vi. Control panel subnet network communications

8. Switches: The lighting controller shall support digitally addressable LED annunciated switches. Provide low voltage push-button switches in up to 6 button configurations. Provide factory engraved labeling for individual push-buttons. Provide in color to match wiring devices and coverplate to match devices and plates in Wiring Devices (Section 26 2726).

9. Wiring:

a. Provide CAT5 cable between switches and controller to create a digital switch network.

b. Provide CAT5 cable between controller and other controllers via a RS-485 network. The RS-485 network shall support up to 250 controllers with a maximum distance of 4000 feet.

c. Programming: Provide a RS-232 (RJ-R Connection) to allow programming through either a local connection or remotely through a modem.

d. Provide wiring in conduit located within the walls and non-accessible ceilings. Provide wiring above accessible ceilings in conduit to system enclosure.

B. Room Controllers:

1. The room controller shall provide the following functionality;

a. Provide interface with room occupancy sensor to provide lighting control and be programmable as either manual on/automatic off or automatic on/automatic off (automatic on shall not allow lighting to exceed 50% level). Provide interface with room wall stations to provide multi-level switching and/or variable dimming. Provide interface with daylight photosensors to provide daylighting controls of lighting fixture via multi-level (step dimming) and/or variable dimming.

2. Provide with network interface to tie to building relay panel

3. The room controller shall be a fully functional lighting control system to match the room lighting and control requirements. The controller shall provide the following features:

a. Separate compartments for line voltage, emergency voltage and low voltage connections.

b. Breakouts for direct conduit connections.

c. Dual voltage (120/277 VAC)

d. Low voltage connections using standard RJ-45 connectors.


e. Zero cross circuitry for each load.

f. Relay and 0-10V dimming zone configuration to match room requirements.

4. Daylight photo sensors shall work with the room controller to provide automatic daylight dimming capabilities for loads connected to the room controller. The daylight sensor shall include the following features:

a. An additional photodiode that measures only the visible spectrum.

b. The sensor shall have three light level ranges;

i. Low (3-300 LUX), high (30-3000 LUX) and direct sun (300-30,000 LUX).

c. The sensor shall provide the capability of controlling multiple (up to three) daylight zones for dimming daylight harvesting.

d. The sensor shall include an internal photodiode that measures light in a 60 degree angle cutting off the unwanted light from the interior of the room.

5. Ceiling Mounted Occupancy Sensors: Sensors shall utilize dual-technology (ultrasonic and infrared technologies) and have the following additional features:

a. Sensor shall be class 2, low voltage; capable of mounting in the ceiling for maximum coverage.

b. Sensor shall have automatic self-adjustment algorithm that adjusts timer and sensitivity settings to maximize performance and minimize energy usage.

c. Sensor shall have 360 degree field of view.

d. Sensor shall incorporate non-volatile memory such that all settings and parameters are saved in protected memory.

e. Sensor shall have time delays from 10 to 30 minutes.

f. Sensor shall provide a visual means of indication that motion is being detected via an LED.

g. Sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity.

6. Wall Stations: Provide low voltage momentary push-button switches up to 6 button configurations to match requirements of lighting control within the room. Provide factory engraved labeling for individual push buttons. Provide in a color to match wiring devices and coverplates to match devices and plates in Wiring Devices (Section 26 2726). Wall station shall connect to the room controller via the room controller local network.

PART 3 - EXECUTION:

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT:

A. Install lighting control system components and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturers written instructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that lighting control equipment complies with requirements.

B. Comply with Requirements of NEC, and applicable portions of NECA’s ‘Standard of Installation’ pertaining to general electrical installation practices.

C. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, as necessary to interface installation of lighting control equipment work with other work.

D. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 26 0553 for requirements.



A. Upon completion of installation and after circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance of system with requirements.

B. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

3.3 PRODUCT SUPPORT AND SERVICES:

A. System Start-Up: Provide a factory authorized technician to verify the installation, test the system, and train the owner on proper operation and maintenance of the system. Before requesting start-up services, the installing contractor shall verify that:

1. The control system has been fully installed in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions.

2. Low voltage wiring for overrides and sensors is completed.

3. Accurate ‘as-built’ load schedules have been prepared for each lighting control panel.

4. Proper notification of the impending start-up has been provided to the owner’s representative.

5. Programming of all switches, relays, groups of relays shall be completed by factory authorized technician, prior to final and training.

B. Factory support: Factory telephone support shall be available at no cost to the owner during the warranty period. Factory assistance shall consist of assistance in solving programming or other application issues pertaining to the control equipment. The factory shall provide a toll free number for technical support.

3.4 WARRANTY:

A. Manufacturer shall provide a one (1) year limited warranty on lighting control system. A ten (10) year limited warranty shall be provided on the lighting control relays.

3.5 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. A complete set of ‘as-builts’ drawings showing installed wiring, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of this equipment shall be included in the operating and maintenance manuals upon complete of the system.

B. Provide a CD to the owner containing the information specified below. The CD shall include all information required to allow the Owner to change the schedules themselves. The CD shall contain a minimum of following:

1. CAD drawing files of ‘as-built’ lighting control components and point to point connections.


3. Job specific configuration programming to include schedule.

4. Tutorial file on complete programming of lighting control system.

3.6 TRAINING

A. Provide four (4) hours of video taped training in two 2 hour sessions on the operation and use of the lighting control equipment, at job site, at no cost to the Owner.


WIRING DEVICES 26 2726-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to wiring devices specified herein.


A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution systems that are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy.

B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following:

1. Receptacles

2. Switches

3. Dimmer controls

4. Cord caps

5. Cord connectors

6. Poke-through assemblies

7. Telephone/power poles

8.


A. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards as applicable to construction and installation of electrical wiring devices. Provide electrical wiring devices that have been UL listed and labeled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA:

1. Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES:

A. GENERAL:

1. Provide factory-fabricated wiring devices, in types, and electrical ratings for

applications indicated and complying with NEMA Stds. Pub No. WD 1.

B. Provide wiring devices (of proper voltage rating) as follows:

RECEPTACLE SWITCHES


MFGR 1-POLE 3-WAY 4-WAY W-PILOT

Hubbell HBL 5352 HBL 1221 HBL 1223 HBL 1224 HBL 1221-PL

Bryant 5352 1221 1223 1224 1221-PL

Pass Seymour 5352 20AC1 20AC3 20AC4 20AC1-RPL

Leviton 5362 1221 1223 1224

Cooper 5352 1221 1273 1224 1221-PL

C. Provide devices in colors selected by Architect. Provide red devices on all emergency

circuits.

D. TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION (TVSS) RECEPTACLES:

1. Provide TVSS receptacles having 4 series parallel 130V MOV's capable of a minimum of 140 joules suppression. Provide units with visual (and audible) surge status indicators to monitor condition of surge circuit; visual indicator to be "on" when power present and suppression circuit is fully functional. (Audible indicator shall sound a "beep" alarm approximately every 30 seconds if suppression circuit has been damaged.) Provide NEMA 5-20R, 20 amp, 125V receptacle of one of the following manufacturers:

MANUFACTURER

SPECIFICATION GRADE HUBBELL PASS SEYMOUR

Duplex Recept-Visual only 5350 5352 XXXSP

Duplex Recept-Visual/Audible 5352 5362 XXXSP

Single Recept-Visual only 5351 N/A

Duplex Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual/Audible IG5352S IG5362 XXXSP

Single Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual only IG5351S N/A

HOSPITAL GRADE HUBBELL PASS SEYMOUR

Duplex Recept-Visual/Audible 8300HS 8300 XXXSP

Single Recept-Visual only 8310HS N/A

Duplex Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual/Audible IG8300HS IG8300 XXXSP

Single Recept-Isol Gnd, Visual only IG8310HS N/A

2. Color of devices selected by Architect. Provide red devices on all emergency

circuits.

E. CONTROLLED RECEPTACLE:

1. Provide a commercial spec grade receptacle with factory markings to comply with NEC 406.3€. Provide NEMA 5-20R, 20 Amp, 125V receptacle of one of the following manufacturers:

a. Leviton-16252-2P

b. Pass & Seymour – 26352CD

F. GROUND-FAULT INTERRUPTER:

1. Provide general-duty, duplex receptacle, ground-fault circuit interrupters; feed-thru types, capable of protecting connected downstream receptacles on single circuit; grounding type UL-rated Class A, Group A, 20-amperes rating; 120-volts, 60 Hz; with solid-state ground-fault sensing and signaling; with 5 milliamperes ground-fault trip level; color as selected by Architect. Provide Hospital grade


where required elsewhere by specification or drawings. Provide units of one of the following:

a. P&S/Sierra

b. Hubbell

c. Leviton

d. Square D

G. USB RECEPTACLE

1. Provide duplex receptacle with two (2) USB 3.0 amps, 5VDC, 2.0 Type A charging ports.

2. Provide products of one of the following:

a. Bryant – USB20-X

b. Cooper – TR7736-X

c. Hubbell – USB20X2-X

d. Legrand – TR5362USB-X

e. Leviton – T5832-X

H. TAMPER RESISTANT RECEPTACLES:

1. Provide tamper resistant receptacles in the following areas; Dwelling units, child care facilities, kindergarten and pre-school classrooms, guest rooms, guest suites and pediatric locations within healthcare facilities.


a. Leviton-TWR20-X

b. Hubbell – BR20XTR

c. Pass Seymour – TR63X

d. Cooper – TR5362

I. WEATHER-RESISTANT RECEPTACLES

1. Provide weather-resistant receptacles in outdoor locations such as under roofed open porches, canopies, marquees, etc.


a. Pass & Seymour 2095TRWRXXX.

b. Hubbell GFTR20XX

J. CORD CAPS AND CONNECTORS:

1. Provide 3, 4 and 5-wire grounding, cap plugs, and connectors of ampere and voltage rating required, for final equipment, and as indicated otherwise on drawings.


a. Cooper

b. General Electric

c. Hubbell

d. Leviton


e. P&S

K. INCANDESCENT LAMP DIMMERS:

1. Provide branch lighting solid-state AC dimmer controls for incandescent fixtures; wattage and voltage as indicated, 60 hertz, with continuously adjustable slider control. Dimmer shall match low voltage transformer. Color as selected by Architect. Provide devices manufactured by one of the following:

a. Lutron (Nova Series)

b. Hubbell (AS Series)

L. FLUORESCENT LAMP DIMMERS:

1. Provide single-pole, semi-conductor modular type AC dimmers for fluorescent fixtures; 60 hertz, with wattage and voltage as indicated, continuously adjustable slider control, and with electromagnetic filters to reduce noise and interference to minimum. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low end dimming. Dimmer shall match lamp/ballast combination. Color as selected by Architect. Provide devices manufactured by one of the following:

a. Lutron (Nova Series)

2.2 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES:

A. WALL PLATES:

1. Provide coverplates for wiring devices; plate color to match attached wiring devices. Provide nylon or Lexan coverplates in all finished areas. Provide galvanized steel plates in unfinished areas. Provide blank coverplates for all empty outlet boxes.

B. WEATHER-PROTECTING DEVICE ENCLOSURES:

1. Where required for compliance with NEC 406-8 (receptacles installed outdoors for use other than with portable tools or equipment), provide weather-tight device covers that provide complete protection with the cord and cap inserted into the wiring device. Provide units that mount on either single or double gang devices.

2. Provide products of one of the following for In Box Horizontal for brick and cast stone:

a. Arlington Industries

i. DSHB1C Clear Cover

ii. DSHB1W White Cover

iii. DSHB1BR Brown Cover

iv. DSHB1BRC Brown Clear Cover

3. Provide products of one of the following for In Box Vertical or Horizontal for Stucco and Metal Sidings:

a. Arlington Industries

i. DSBVM1C Clear Cover

ii. DSBVM1W White Cover

iii. DSBHM1C Clear Cover

iv. DSBHM1W White Cover

4. Provide products of one of the following for roof mounted installations:

a. Intermatic WP1020 or WP1030


b. P&S WIUC10C or WIUC20c

2.3 POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLY DEVICES:

A. Provide factory-assembled poke-through assembly devices equipped with wiring devices as specified herein; capable of maintaining fire floor rating of 3 hours. Unit shall be UL514A listed. Construct for installation in concrete floor with center tube, fire-stop wafers, spreader plates, service fitting base plate, and 4-11/16" conduit box. Provide service fitting with alignment adjustment screws for complete installation; finish as selected by Architect. Provide devices manufactured by one of the following:

1. Hubbell

2. Wiremold Co.

B. Provide the following poke-thru assemblies as noted on the drawings:

1. Type PT-1 Power and Data; Provide a poke-thru assembly to provide interface between power and communications cabling. These devices shall provide flush device outlets that will not obstruct the floor area. The activation cover shall be supplied with a 20 amp duplex receptacle and capable of accommodations for up to four (4) modular communications jacks.

2. Type PT-2 Furniture Feed; Provide a poke-thru assembly to provide interface between power and communications cabling and the modular furniture workstation or activation location. The activation cover shall provide one ¾” NPSM threaded opening for power and one 1 ¼” NPSM threaded opening for communications.

2.4 TELEPHONE/POWER POLES:

A. Provide factory-assembled telephone/power poles of types, sizes and ratings indicated; for use with telephone and power systems installed above suspended ceilings. Provide with 2 duplex receptacles as specified herein. Isolate power section from telephone compartment with separating steel enclosure. Extend wiring from receptacles to junction box at top of pole where connections are made above suspended ceiling. Provide pole foot with carpet pad and ceiling tile trim pad. Provide poles in color selected by Architect, manufactured by one of the following:

1. Hubbell

2. Wiremold Co.


3.1 GENERAL

A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including painting, electrical box and wiring work, as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other work. Install devices in boxes such that front of device is flush and square with coverplate. Drawings are small scale and, unless dimensioned, indicate approximate locations only of outlets, devices, equipment, etc. Locate outlets and apparatus symmetrically on floors, walls and ceilings where not dimensioned and coordinate with other work. Verify all dimensioned items on job site. Consult architectural cabinet, millwork, and equipment shop drawings before beginning rough-in of electrical work. Adjust locations of all electrical outlets as required to accommodate work in area, and to avoid conflicts with wainscoat, back splash, tackboards, and other items.

C. Provide receptacles in surface raceway at 12” on center unless indicated otherwise.

D. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes that are clean; free from excess building


materials, dirt, and debris.

E. Install blank plates on all boxes without devices.

F. Delay installation of wiring devices until wiring work and painting is completed. Provide separate neutral conductor from panel to each GFI receptacle.

G. Install GFI receptacles for all receptacles installed in the following locations:

1. Restrooms, locker rooms, kitchens, within 6 feet of any sink, or when serving vending machines and electric drinking fountains.

2. Indoor wet locations, non-dwelling garages, elevator rooms and pits.

3. Outdoors, and on rooftops.

4. Dwelling unit garages, crawlspaces and unfinished basements, accessory buildings, boathouses, and receptacles for boat hoists.

H. Where light switches or wall box dimmers are specified, provide a separate neutral for each phase of the branch circuits that switches or dimmers are connected.

I. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.

3.2 PROTECTION OF WALL PLATES AND RECEPTACLES:

A. At time of substantial completion, replace those items, that have been damaged, including those stained, burned and scored.

3.3 GROUNDING:

A. Provide electrically continuous, tight grounding connections for wiring devices, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 TESTING:

A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring devices for electrical continuity and proper polarity connections. After energizing circuitry, test wiring devices to demonstrate compliance with requirements.


OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES 26 2815-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 2815

OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to overcurrent protective devices specified herein.


A. Extent of overcurrent protective device work is indicated by drawings and schedules and specified herein. Overcurrent protective devices specified herein are for installation as individual components in separate enclosures; and for installation as integral components of switchboard and panelboards. See Section 262413, Switchgear and Switchboards, and Section 262416, Panelboards.

B. Types of overcurrent protective devices in this section include the following for operation at 600 Volts and below:

1. Molded case thermal circuit breakers

2. Molded case solid-state circuit breakers

3. Insulated case circuit breakers

4. Power circuit breakers

5. Fusible switches

6. Bolted pressure switches

7. Fuses

C. Refer to other Division-26 sections for cable/wire and connector work required in conjunction with overcurrent protective devices.


A. Comply with NEC requirements and NEMA and ANSI standards as applicable to construction and installation of overcurrent devices.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on overcurrent protective devices, including catalog cuts, time-current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit layout drawings of overcurrent protective devices, with layouts of circuit breakers, including spatial relationships to proximate equipment. Failure to submit said spatial layouts does not relieve contractor of responsibility to verify all required clearances before release of equipment for fabrication.

C. Submit manufacturer’s data and shop drawings only after completion of the preliminary protective device study (see Section 26 0573 as applicable). Any Section 26 2815 submittals received prior to submission of the preliminary protective device study will be REJECTED.

D. MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than two units of each size and type, unless specified otherwise in another section of these specifications.

E. TRIP CURVES & SETTINGS:


1. Submit time-current trip curves (in log-log format) and trip setting parameter/range information (for each trip function) for all solid-state circuit breakers.

a. Manufacturer shall also provide recommended trip settings with the shop drawing submittal (including ground fault settings) for coordination with downstream overcurrent devices. Manufacturer shall base recommendations on the AIC rating of the electrical equipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (main and branch device manufacturer must be same as panelboard and/or switchboard manufacturer):

B. CIRCUIT BREAKERS AND FUSIBLE SWITCHES:

1. Cutler Hammer Products, Eaton Corp.

2. General Electric Co.

3. Square D Co.

4. Siemens Energy and Automation

C. BOLTED PRESSURE SWITCHES:

1. Bolt Switch Co.

2. General Electric Co. (HPC; High Pressure Contact Switches)

3. Pringle Switch Co.

4. Square D Co.

D. MOLDED CASE THERMAL TRIP CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

1. Provide factory-assembled, molded case circuit breaker for power distribution panelboards and switchboards; and for individual mounting, as indicated. Provide breakers of amperage, voltage, and RMS interrupting rating shown, with permanent thermal trip and adjustable instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Series rated systems are not acceptable. Construct with overcenter, trip-free, toggle type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position and in an ambient temperature of 40 degrees C. Provide with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated, of proper size to accommodate conductors specified.

2. Circuit breakers 15 amps through 799 amps shall be molded case thermal trip circuit breakers.

E. MOLDED CASE SOLID-STATE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

1. Provide factory-assembled, molded case solid-state circuit breakers for power distribution switchgear and switchboards. Provide breakers of amperage, voltage and RMS interrupting rating shown, and with solid-state trip mechanisms. Breakers shall be UL listed for application at 100% of their continuous ampere rating.

2. Circuit breakers 800 amps through 1199 amps shall be molded case solid-state circuit breakers.

3. Solid-state trip mechanisms shall have the following functions: Adjustable long time ampere rating; adjustable long time delay; adjustable short time pick up; adjustable short time delay and adjustable instantaneous pick up.


F. INSULATED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

1. Provide factory-assembled, insulated case circuit breakers for power distribution switchgear and switchboards. Provide breakers of amperage, voltage and RMS interrupting rating shown, with solid-state trip mechanisms and with manual spring charging mechanism. Breakers shall be UL listed for application at 100% of their continuous ampere rating.

2. Circuit breakers 1200 amps and larger shall be insulated case circuit breakers.

3. Solid-state trip mechanisms shall have the following functions: Adjustable long time ampere rating; adjustable long time delay; adjustable short time pick up; adjustable short time delay and adjustable instantaneous pick up.

4. On service disconnect breakers where phase to ground voltage exceeds 150V and the breaker is capable of being set at or over 1000A (and also where GFP protection is indicated on the one line diagram for downstream breakers), the solid-state trip mechanism shall also include the following:

a. Adjustable ground fault pick up and adjustable ground fault time delay, and ground fault test button.

b. Over/under voltage trip

c. Current imbalance trip

5. Provide an energy-reducing maintenance switch with local, lit status indicator to allow for a reduction of the instantaneous pickup and instantaneous delay settings for use during maintenance. Device shall mount in face of dead-front. The switch shall be provided by the same manufacturer as the circuit breaker.

6. Include integral phase failure (single-phasing) protection where phase failure (PF) is indicated on the one line diagram

G. FUSIBLE SWITCHES:

1. Provide factory-assembled fusible switch units for power distribution panelboards and switchboards, and individual mounting as indicated. Provide switch units of amperage, voltage, and RMS interrupting rating as shown, with quick-make, quick-break mechanisms, visible blades and dual horsepower ratings. Series rated systems are not acceptable. Equip with lockable handles with on-off indication. Interlock switch covers and handles to prevent opening in "ON" position. Provide switch with Class R rejection fuse clip kits. Provide AL/CU rated lugs of proper size to accommodate conductors specified.

H. BOLTED PRESSURE SWITCHES:

1. Provide factory-assembled fusible bolted pressure contact type switches of amperage, voltage and RMS interrupting ratings shown. Equip switches with quick-make, quick-break mechanisms with electric capacitor operated trip. Provide Buss KAZ signal activating fuses open. Provide ''blown fuse protection'' in HPC switches. Provide AL/CU rated lugs of proper size to accommodate conductors specified.

I. PHASE FAILURE PROTECTION:

1. Provide phase failure protection on overcurrent protective devices as indicated, by means of a single-phase, dead phase, reverse phase relay (Taylor Electronics Md1 PNDR). Provide relay to operate shunt trip or capacitor trip as required to open overcurrent protective device upon malfunction. Provide relay with adjustable time delay.

J. GROUND FAULT PROTECTION:

1. Provide ground fault sensing and relaying equipment on all overcurrent protective devices where phase to ground voltage is in excess of 150 volts and the overcurrent protection device is capable of being set at or over 1000 amps.


Provide ground fault sensing and relaying equipment on other devices as indicated.

2. Provide zero sequence current sensors for overcurrent protective devices; inputs compatible with relay. Construct sensor frame so it can be opened to prevent removal or installation around conductors without disturbing conductors. Provide test winding in sensor for testing operation of GFP unit including sensor pick-up relay, and circuit protection device operation.

3. Provide solid-state ground-fault relay, that requires no external source of electrical power, drawing energy to operate GFP system directly from output of current sensor. Construct with adjustable pick-up current sensitivity for GF current from 200 to 1200 amperes, with calibrated dial to show pick-up point settings. Provide factory-set time delay of 1.5 seconds and protection that precludes tampering with setting after installation.

4. Provide monitor panel capable of indicating relay operation, and provide means for testing system with or without interruption of service. Construct so GF system can not be left in an inactive or OFF state. Provide indicator lamps and TEST and RESET control switches.

5. MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ground-fault sensing and relaying equipment of one of the following:

a. General Electric Co.

b. Brown Boveri Electric, Inc.

c. HI-Z Corporation

d. Pringle Electric Mfg. Co.

e. Square D Co.

2.2 FUSES

A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provided fuses of type, sizes and ratings and electrical characteristics of a single manufacturer as follows. Provide fuses labeled UL Class L or UL Class R, current limiting and rated for up to 200,000 amperes. Provide Buss KAZ signal activating fuses where required elsewhere in specification.

B. Where fuses are shown feeding individual or groups of equipment items, comply with manufacturer's recommendation for fusing; adjust fuse size and type as necessary to comply with manufacturer's recommendation.

C. Provide and install spare fuse cabinet in main electrical room.

D. MAIN SERVICE AND FEEDER CIRCUITS: For fuse ratings over 600 amperes provide UL Class L Fuses (KRP-C, or A4BQ or LCL or KLPC). For fuse ratings up to 600 amperes, provide UL Class RK1 (KTN-R, KTS-R or A2K-R, A6K-R or NCCR, SCLR or KLN-R, KLS-R). If fuse directly feeds motors, transformers or other inductive load provide UL RK5 time delay (FRN-R, FRS-R or TR-R, TRS-R or ECN-R, ECS-R or FLN-R, FLS-R).

E. BRANCH CIRCUITS: For motor circuits, transformer circuits, or other inductive loads, provide UL Class RK5 (FRN-R, FRS-R or TR-R, TRS-R or ECN-R, ECN-S or FLN-R, FLS-A). For other circuits, provide UL Class RK1, (KTN-R, KTS-R OR A2K-R, A6K-R or NCLR, SCLR OR KLNR, KLSR).

F. MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses of one of the following:

1. Bussman Mfg. Co.

2. Mersen (Ferraz Shawmut)

3. Reliance Fuse Div./Brush Fuse Inc.


4. Littlefuse, Inc.


3.1 INSTALLATION OF OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES:

A. Install overcurrent protective devices as indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC and NEMA standards for installation of overcurrent protective devices.

B. Coordinate with work as necessary to interface installations of overcurrent protective devices with other work.

C. Install fuses in overcurrent protective devices. For motor circuits, fuse sizes shown on drawings are for general guidance only. Size fuses in accordance with fuse manufacturer's recommendation for given motor nameplate ampere rating. Test operation. If nuisance tripping occurs, increase fuse size and disconnect device (if necessary) as required to provide nuisance free tripping. Adjust fuse size properly for ambient temperature, frequent starting and stopping of motor loads, and for loads with long start times. Include all costs in bid.

D. After the switchgear is energized and just prior to Substantial Completion, the contractor shall ensure that the field-adjustable circuit breakers and solid-state circuit breakers and associated trip mechanisms have been set to the appropriate settings as recommended by the equipment Manufacturer (or as recommended by the electrical contractor's Protective Device Study if section 260573 has been included in the project). Time-current trip curves and trip setting information as was required in the Submittal portion of this specification shall be made available by the contractor at this time.

E. Field test all ground fault protective devices for proper operation; test to be performed by representative of the manufacturer. Include verification of complete time current trip characteristics.

F. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.


A. Prior to energization of overcurrent protective devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short-circuits. Correct malfunctioning units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements.


MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 2816-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 2816

MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to motor and circuit disconnect switches specified herein.


A. Extent of motor and circuit disconnect switch work is indicated by drawings and schedule. Work includes complete installations and electrical connections.


A. Provide motor and circuit disconnect switches that have been UL listed and labeled. Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Pub. No. KS 1, and NEC.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data including specifications, installation and general recommendations, for each type of motor and circuit disconnect switch required.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit dimensioned drawings of electrical motor and circuit disconnect switches that have rating of 100 amperes and larger.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of switch):

1. Cutler Hammer Products, Eaton Corp.

2. Square D Company

3. General Electric Company

4. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

2.2 FABRICATED SWITCHES:

A. GENERAL: Provide disconnect and safety switches as indicated herein. Provide:

1. General duty switches on 240 Volt rated circuits.

2. Heavy duty switches on 480 volt rated circuits.

3. HP rated switches on all motor circuits.

B. GENERAL DUTY SWITCHES: Provide general-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 240 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating spring assisted, quick-make, quick-break mechanisms. Provide single phase or three phase and with solid neutral as required by application. Equip with operating handle that is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application, unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits.

MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 26 2816-2 © BNA Consulting

C. HEAVY-DUTY SWITCHES: Provide heavy-duty type, sheet-steel enclosed safety switches, fusible or non-fusible as indicated, of types, sizes and electrical characteristics indicated; rated 600 volts, 60 hertz; incorporating quick-make, quick-break type mechanisms. Provide single phase or 3 phase, and with solid neutral as required by application, Equip with operating handle that is capable of being padlocked in OFF position. Provide NEMA 1 or NEMA 3R as required by application unless noted. Provide fusible switches with Class R rejection fuse clip kits.

D. FUSES: Provide fuses for switches, as required of classes, types and ratings needed to fulfill electrical requirements for service indicated. Provide spare fuses amounting to one spare fuse for each 10 installed but not less than three of any one type and size. See Section 262815 Overcurrent Protective Devices for fuse types.

E. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECT SWITCHES:

A. Install motor and circuit disconnect switches where indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate motor and circuit disconnect switch installation work with electrical raceway and cable work, as necessary for proper interface.

C. Install disconnect switches used with motor driven appliances, and motors and controllers within sight of controller position.

D. For disconnect switches serving motors controlled by variable frequency drives, provide late-make, early-break auxiliary contacts on each disconnect switch. Provide Heavy-Duty switch. Wire auxiliary contact to VFD safety contact, such that disconnecting the motor will shut down the drive first, and closing the switch will start the drive only after power is applied to the motor.


MOTOR STARTERS 26 2913-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 2913

MOTOR STARTERS

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of Division-26 sections making reference to motor starters specified herein.


A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of motor starters in this section include the following:

1. AC Fraction Horsepower Manual Starters

2. AC Line Voltage Manual Starters

3. AC Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters

4. AC Combination Non-Reversing Magnetic Starters


A. Comply with NEC and NEMA Standards as applicable to wiring methods, construction and installation of motor starters. Comply with applicable requirements of UL 508, "Electric Industrial Control Equipment", pertaining to electrical motor starters. Provide units that have been UL-listed and labeled.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Submit dimensioned drawings of motor starters showing accurately scaled equipment layouts.

C. MOTOR VOLTAGE/CURRENT REPORT: After installation is complete, including water and air balancing, measure voltage (L-L and L-N) and full load current of each phase of each motor. Submit report showing field readings of voltage, amperage, service factor, and thermal heater size installed for each motor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER:

A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type and rating of motor starter):

1. Allen-Bradley Co.

2. Appleton Electric Co.

3. Crouse-Hinds Co.

4. Eaton Corp., Cutler Hammer Products

5. General Electric Co.

6. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc.

7. Square D Co.


B. MAINTENANCE STOCK, FUSES: For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 10 installed units, but not less than 5 units of each, for both power and control circuit fuses.

2.2 MOTOR STARTERS:

A. GENERAL: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and ancillary components; of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated that comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published information and as required for complete installations.

B. THERMAL OVERLOAD UNITS: Provide thermal overload units, sized to actual running full load current, not to motor plate current. Size heaters for mechanical equipment after air and water balancing have been completed.

C. AC FRACTIONAL HP MANUAL STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 2510): Provide manual, single-phase, 1 and 2 pole, 300 volt AC max, fractional HP motor starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; equip with one piece thermal overload relay with field adjustment capability of plus or minus 10 percent of nominal overload heater rating; for protection of AC motors of 1 HP and less. (For manually controlled motors in excess of 1 HP, see Line Voltage Manual Starters specified herein). Provide starter with quick-make, quick-break trip free toggle mechanisms, green pilot lights, and with lock-off toggle operated handle. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosures, unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp location unless noted otherwise. Provide flush mounted units with coverplate to match wiring device coverplates.

D. AC LINE VOLTAGE MANUAL STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 2510): Provide line voltage manual starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt AC max; equip with pushbutton operator, low voltage protection feature, and green pilot light. Provide starters with trip free mechanism such that contacts will open under load and remain open until thermal element has cooled, and unit is reset. Mount surface units in NEMA 1 enclosure, unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp location, unless noted otherwise. Provide overlapping trim for flush mounted units.

E. AC NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8536): Provide line voltage magnetic starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt max, with thermal overload protection in all phases and inherent under voltage release. Equip units with holding contact, 2 normally open, and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts, unless noted otherwise. Provide fused control transformer in each starter and 120V control coil. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light, and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp location, unless noted otherwise. Equip all spare starters complete with items as specified herein.

F. AC COMBINATION NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8539): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volts max with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with motor circuit protector. Provide motor circuit protector, instantaneous trip circuit breaker as indicated and adjust to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light, and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide combination starters for individual mounting, or for group mounting in motor control center as indicated. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp locations, unless noted otherwise. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

G. AC COMBINATION NON-REVERSING MAGNETIC STARTERS (EQUAL TO SQUARE D CLASS 8538): Provide line voltage combination starters, of types, ratings, and electrical characteristics; 2 or 3 pole, 600 volt maximum with non-reversing magnetic starters as specified herein; in common cubicle or enclosure with fusible disconnect switch. Provide quick-make, quick-break, disconnect for NEMA sizes 1, 2, 3, and 4; and visible blade, automatic circuit interrupters with push-to-trip feature and separate fuse


clips for larger NEMA sizes. Fuse all starters with dual-element (time-delay) fuses equal to Bussman FRN/FRS-R. Equip disconnect switch with Class R rejection fuse kits. Mount hand-off-auto switch, red pilot light, and reset button in face of enclosure. Provide combination starters for individual mounting, or for group mounting in motor control centers as indicated. Provide NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated. Provide NEMA 3R enclosure in exterior or damp locations, unless noted otherwise.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS:

A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA standards, and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Install fuses in fusible disconnects, if any. Mount chart inside each starter indicating heater type, size, and ampere ratings available.

C. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.

3.2 ADJUST AND CLEAN:

A. Inspect operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement.

B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish.


A. Subsequent to wire/cable hook-up, energize motor starters and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements.


UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY 26 3353-1

SECTION 26 3353

UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including general and supplementary conditions and Division-1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.



A. Extent of uninterruptible power supply system work is indicated by drawings and specified here-in.

B. U.P.S. System shall be designed in accordance with applicable sections of the following publications.

1. NEMA

2. NEC

3. IEEE (Inverter)

4. OSHA

5. ASA

6. ASMC

C. All components shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, UL electronic testing laboratories, etc.

1.3 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA: Submit manufacturer's data on U.P.S. systems including, but not limited to, roughing-in diagrams and instructions for installation, operation and maintenance, suitable for inclusion in maintenance manuals. Also include standard or typical riser and complete wiring diagrams for panel and system.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS: Provide shop drawings showing equipment/device locations and connecting wiring of entire U.P.S. system. Include wiring diagrams and riser diagrams.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. MANUFACTURER: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide U.P.S. system of the following:

1. Liebert

2. MGE

3. Mitsubishi Electric

2.2 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY SYSTEM

A. Provide a continuous duty, solid state, uninterruptible power supply system, hereafter referred to as the UPS. The UPS shall operate in conjunction with the building electrical system to provide precise power for critical equipment loads. The system shall consist of the solid state inverter, rectifier/battery charger, a storage battery, static bypass, and maintenance bypass transfer switch as described in the following specification.


2.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. All materials and parts comprising the UPS shall be new, of current manufacture, and shall not have been in prior service, except as required during factory testing.

B. All active electronic devices shall be solid state and not exceed manufacturer recommended tolerances for maximum reliability. All semiconductor devices shall be sealed. Vacuum tubes shall not be used. All relays shall be provided with dust covers.

2.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION

A. System Definition

1. The UPS shall consist of a rectifier/battery charger, batteries, inverter, static bypass transfer switch, synchronizing equipment, protective devices power center and accessories as specified herein that shall automatically continuity of electric power within specified tolerances, without interruption, upon failure or deterioration of the normal AC power source. Continuity of electric power to the load shall be maintained for an emergency period with the inverter supplied by the batteries, up to the specified maximum time or until restoration of the normal AC power source.

B. Modes of Operation

1. The UPS shall be designed to operate as an on-line, reverse transfer system in the following modes:

a. Normal -- The critical load shall be continuously supplied by the inverter. The rectifier/battery charger shall derive power from the utility AC source and supply DC power to the inverter while simultaneously float charging the battery.

b. Emergency -- Upon failure of the utility AC power the critical load shall be supplied by the inverter that without any switching, shall obtain its power from the storage battery. There shall be no interruption to the critical load upon failure or restoration of the utility AC source.

c. Recharge -- Upon restoration of the utility AC source (prior to battery discharge), the rectifier/battery charger shall automatically restart, walk-in, and gradually power the inverter and simultaneously recharge the battery. This shall be an automatic function and shall cause no interruption to the critical load.

d. Bypass Mode -- If the UPS must be taken out of service for maintenance or repair of internal failures, the static transfer switch shall transfer the load from the inverter to the bypass source with no interruption to the critical load. Automatic retransfer of the load shall be accomplished after the UPS inverter has synchronized to the alternate bypass input source. Then the static transfer switch shall transfer the load from the bypass input source to the UPS inverter output without interruption and without paralleling of the sources.

e. Downgrade -- If the battery only is to be taken out of service for maintenance, it shall be disconnected from the rectifier/battery charger and inverter by means of an external circuit breaker. The UPS shall continue to function as specified herein, except for power outage protection and transient characteristics.

2.5 UPS REQUIREMENTS

A. System Rating

1. The UPS system shall be sized to maintain a load of 750 KW. The UPS system shall be equipped with a battery. The battery shall be able to supply rated load, at rated voltage, for a minimum protection period of 90 minutes.


B. Electrical Characteristics

1. System Input Requirements

a. AC input to Rectifier/Battery Charger

i. Voltage: 120/208 volts AC, 3 phase, 3 wires plus equipment ground.

ii. Voltage Range: +10%, -20% of nominal

iii. Frequency 60 Hz +/-5%

iv. Current Limit: 115% of nominal AC input current maximum.

v. Input Current Walk-in: 15 seconds to full rated input current, field selectable 5 to 15 seconds.

vi. Current Distortion: 10% reflected THD maximum at full load when fitted with optional input filter; 30% THD maximum at full load without optional input filter.

b. Power Factor Typically 0.8 lagging with full load at nominal input voltage and normal float voltage on battery.

c. AC Bypass Input

i. Voltage: 120/208 volts AC, 3 phase, 4 wires plus equipment ground.

ii. Frequency: 60 HZ nominal +/-0.5 Hz

iii. Power Rating: as indicated

C. System Output Capacity

1. Output Rating: 750 KW

2. Voltage: 120/208 volts AC, 3 phase, 4 wires plus ground, manual adjustable (+5%)

3. Voltage Regulation: +/-0.5% three-phase RMS average for a balanced three-phase load; +/-1.0% three-phase RMS average for a 100% unbalanced load.

4. Frequency: 60 HZ nominal +/-0.1%

5. Voltage Distortion: 1% total harmonic distortion (THD) for linear loads; 2.5% THD for 100% nonlinear loads.

6. Overload Capability: 125% for ten minutes; 150% for one minute; 200% for 10 cycles.

D. Output Voltage Transient Characteristics:

1. 100% load step +/-2.5%

2. Loss or return of AC input power +/-1.0%

3. Manual transfer of 100% load +/-3.0%

4. Output Voltage Transient Recovery Time -- The system output voltage shall return to within +1% of the steady state value within 1 cycle.

5. Output Frequency Regulation -- The UPS shall be capable of providing the nominal output frequency +0.1% when the UPS inverter is not synchronized (free running) to the AC bypass input line.

E. System Overload -- The system shall be capable of supplying regulated output during overloads of up to 150% of the system rating for a period of 60 seconds. Overloads in excess of this rating shall cause the static bypass transfer switch to reverse transfer and


allow the AC bypass input source to supply the necessary fault clearing current required. Once the overload is cleared, the static bypass transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer and normal UPS operation shall resume. Overloads in excess of the system’s overload rating shall be furnished by the AC bypass input line for a maximum of 90 seconds. If the overload still persists, the load shall be disconnected.

F. System Efficiency -- The over all efficiency, input to output, shall be at least 81% with the battery fully charged and the inverter supplying full rated load.

G. Audible Noise -- Noise generated by the UPS under any condition of normal operation shall not exceed 65 dBA measured 1 meter from surface of the UPS.

2.6 RECTIFIER/BATTERY CHARGER

A. General

1. Incoming AC power shall be converted to regulated DC output by the rectifier/battery charger. A rectifier/capacitor/filter arrangement shall provide coarsely regulated DC, that shall be further enhanced by a transistorized chopper to provide the tightly regulated DC needed for inverter and battery charging operation.

B. AC Input Protection

1. The rectifier/battery charger shall be protected by means of an AC input circuit breaker. Overloads in excess of the rectifier/battery chargers normal rating or sensing of an abnormally high DC voltage condition shall cause the AC input circuit breaker to be tripped off.

C. Power Walk-In

1. The rectifier/battery charger shall contain a walk in circuit that causes the unit to assume the load gradually after the input voltage is applied. Currents shall increase gradually from 20% to 100% over a 15 second period after the battery open circuit voltage has been reached. Walk-in time shall be field selectable from 5 to 20 seconds.

D. Magnetization Inrush Current

1. The initial magnetization inrush current shall be limited to 600% of the rectifier/battery charger full load current.

E. Input Power Factor

1. The rectifier/battery charger shall have a minimum power factor of 0.80 lagging at nominal input voltage and frequency, with the inverter operating at full rated load, and while charging a discharged battery.

F. Overload Protection and Disconnection

1. An automatic input circuit breaker shall be provided for rectifier/battery charger disconnection for overload and abnormally high DC voltage protection. The overload devices shall not be activated when the rectifier/battery charger is started under any of the operating conditions listed.

G. Capacity

1. The rectifier/battery charger shall have sufficient capacity to support a fully loaded inverter and recharge the battery to 95% of its full capacity within 10 times the discharge period when input current limit is set at 125% of the normal full load rating.

2.7 INVERTER

A. General

1. The inverter output shall be derived from a solid state Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) type inverter design and have the operating characteristics as specified in


previous paragraphs. The inverter shall be capable of providing the specified precise output power characteristics while operating form any DC source voltage within the battery operating range.

B. Output

1. The inverter output voltage and capacity shall be as specified in previous paragraphs and shall operate in accordance with the following regulation requirements.

C. Voltage Regulation

1. The inverter steady state output voltage shall not deviate by more than +1% due to the following conditions:

a. 0% to 100% load

b. Ambient temperature variations

c. Minimum to maximum DC bus voltage

D. Voltage Adjustments

1. The inverter shall have a control to manually adjust the output voltage +5% from the nominal value.

E. Frequency Control

1. The output frequency of the inverter shall be controlled by an oscillator, that shall be operated as a free running unit when not synchronized to the bypass AC input source. The inverter shall track the synchronizing source with + degrees. If the external synchronizing source deviates from the preset frequency by +9.5 Hz, the oscillator shall automatically revert to a free running mode of operation.

F. Frequency Regulation

1. The inverter free-running (non=synchronized mode of operation), steady state output frequency shall not deviate by more than +0.1% due to the following conditions:

a. 0% to 100% load.

b. Ambient temperature variation.

c. Minimum to maximum DC bus voltage

d. The inverter output shall have zero frequency transients for the system disturbances listed herein.

G. Harmonic Distortion

1. The inverter shall provide harmonic filtering necessary to limit the Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) in the output voltage to 5% or less and single harmonics to 3% over the entire linear load range. Excessive filtering shall not be required to reduce harmonics.

H. Transient Response

1. The inverter transient voltage shall not exceed +5% due to the following system disturbances:

a. A 100% step load application and removal with zero initial load or 100% initial load.

b. Transfer of rated load from the by pad source to the UPS inverter output during automatic forward transfer of the static bypass transfer switch.

c. Loss or return of AC input power.

I. Transient Recovery


1. The output voltage shall return to within +1% of the steady state value within 20 milliseconds.

2.8 OVERLOAD

A. The inverter shall be capable of supplying currents and regulated voltage for overloads exceeding 103% and up to 150% of full load current for a period of up to 60 seconds. The static bypass transfer switch shall transfer the load to bypass if the overload exceeds the overload rating.

2.9 FAULT CLEARING AND CURRENT LIMIT

A. The inverter shall current limit for loads in excess of 125% of its full load rating. Maximum effective current at the output of the UPS inverter (bypass AC input not available) shall be 150%.

B. Inverter DC Protection

1. The inverter shall be protected by the following described features that shall be independently adjustable for maximum system flexibility. The UPS shall be designed to interface with a lead acid battery.

a. DC Overvoltage Trip

b. DC Undervoltage Shutdown

C. Output Protection

1. The inverter shall be electronically current limited to protect against overloads and abnormal load conditions.

D. Overcurrent Protection

1. The inverter shall be protected from excessive overloads, including faults and reverse currents, by fast acting fuses to prevent damage to power semiconductors.

E. Surge Protection

1. The inverter shall have built in protection against undervoltage, overcurrent, and overvoltage surges on the output caused by load transfer between the UPS and an external synchronized bypass AC input source.

F. Load Power Factor

1. The inverter shall be designed to supply rated volt-ampere (VA) output into a 0.8 lagging power factor load.

G. Thermal Overload Protection

1. The inverter shall be provided with thermal overload protection to protect against fan failures and high ambient temperature conditions.

2.10 SYSTEM STATUS AND CONTROL

A. General

1. The UPS shall be provided with a system status panel to provide monitoring and control of the complete system.

B. System Metering

1. A single digital meter (0.5% accuracy) shall be provided with the capability of monitoring the following system functions:

a. AC input voltage

b. AC input current

c. Input frequency


d. Battery voltage

e. Battery DC current (charge/discharge)

f. AC output voltage

g. AC output current

h. Output frequency

i. Percent of rated load being supplied by the UPS

j. Battery time left during battery operation

C. System Controls

1. The following controls shall be provided for the system:

a. Inverter on/off pushbutton with protective cover AC input power on/off (circuit breaker)

b. Lamp test selector pad

c. Audio reset selector pad

d. Emergency Power Off (EPO) pushbutton with protective cover

D. System Mimic

1. A system mimic diagram with indicating Light Emitting Diodes (LED) shall be provided as a part of the system status panel. The mimic shall depict a complete single line diagram of the UPS and the following functions shall be illuminated with LED indicators.

a. AC input power on

b. UPS on battery

c. UPS on line

d. UPS on bypass

e. Bypass power available

f. Battery circuit breaker open

g. Rectifier fault

h. Inverter fault

i. Meter display indications

E. System Status and Alarm

1. Visual Status and Alarm Indicators -- The following system operating conditions shall be provided with visual display or LED annunciation:

a. UPS on line (front panel)

b. UPS on battery (front panel)

c. UPS on bypass (front panel)

d. Rectifier fault (front panel)

e. Inverter fault (front panel)

f. Output overload (internal)

g. Uninterruptible transfer inhibited (internal)

h. Logic supplies inoperative (internal)

i. Battery circuit breaker open (front panel)


2. Audible Alarm -- A horn shall be located on the system status panel, that is activated for a rectifier or inverter fault condition or when the inverter is on and the battery circuit breaker is open.

3. Contact Closures -- Form "C" -- Contact closures shall be provided for the following conditions.

a. UPS on line

b. UPS on battery

c. UPS on bypass

d. Inverter fault

e. Rectifier fault

f. Fan alarm

2.11 STATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

A. General

1. A static transfer switch shall be provided as an integral part of the UPS. The control logic shall contain an automatic transfer circuit that senses the status of the inverter logic singles and alarm conditions to provide an uninterrupted transfer of the load to the bypass source without exceeding the transient limits specified herein when a malfunction occurs in the UPS or an external overload conditions occurs. The static transfer switch shall be a full electronic static type switch that has a maximum transfer time of less than one millisecond.

B. Operation

1. The static transfer switch shall be used to connect the bypass source to the critical load when required and have the following features:

2. Uninterrupted Transfer -- The static transfer switch shall automatically cause the bypass input source to assume the critical load after the inverter logic senses one of the following conditions:

a. Inverter overload exceeds units rating

b. Battery protection period expired

c. Inverter Failure

3. Interrupted Transfer -- If the AC bypass input line is beyond the conditions rated below and interrupted transfer (not greater than 0.2 seconds) shall be make upon detections of fault condition.

a. Bypass voltage greater than +10% from the UPS rated output voltage.

b. Bypass frequency greater than +0.5 Hz from the UPS rate output frequency.

c. Phase differential of AC bypass voltage to UPS output Voltage greater than +4 degrees.

4. Manual Transfer -- A manually initiated static transfer shall be made by depressing the invert on/off pushbutton on the system status panel.

5. Overload Ratings -- The static bypass transfer switch shall have the following overload characteristics.

a. 500% of UPS output rating for 0.1 seconds.

b. 200% of UPS output rating for 90 seconds.

6. Overloads in excess of the ratings given will cause the UPS to disconnect the load.


7. Automatic Uninterrupted Forward Transfer -- The static transfer switch shall automatically forward transfer, without interruption, after (1) the equipment in turned "on", or (2) an overload induced reverse transfer has occurred and the overload current subsides to less than the UPS full load rating. The automatic forward transfer shall occur only after the UPS automatically synchronized with the AC bypass input line.

8. Forced Transfer -- The control logic circuitry shall provide the means of making a forced transfer of the static transfer switch on an interrupted basis, minimum interruption 200 milliseconds, when the UPS inverter is not synchronized to the bypass AC input source.

2.12 MECHANICAL DESIGN

A. Enclosures

1. The UPS shall be housed in free-standing, dead-front enclosure. Doors and framework shall be of 14 gauge steel. All instruments, status indicators, and controls shall be mounted on either the front to the UPS module or internally. The overall size of the UPS shall be [ ]" high, [ ]" wide and [ ]" deep, maximum.

B. Ventilation

1. Forced air cooling shall be provided to ensure that all components are operated within their environmental ratings. Power switching modules shall be cooled by redundant fans located over the power switching modules directly above critical components, to ensure that the cooling air path is not obstructed. Internal air baffles shall carry heated air from large magnetic components to reduce the interior cabinet temperature. Redundant fans shall be located above the air baffles. Blower motors shall be equipped with sealed bearings. Fan failures or a thermal overload protection shall be provided and shall be manually resettable.

2.13 UPS BATTERY SYSTEM

A. Battery Description

1. The UPS shall be provided with a storage battery to serve as an emergency power source for the UPS inverter. The ampere hour rating of the battery shall be sufficient to support the UPS inverter for the protections time specified with the UPS operating at rated load. The battery rating shall be based on an ambient temperature of 25° C.

2. Battery Life -- The battery shall be designed for an expected life of 5 years.

B. Battery Circuit Breakers

1. The battery shall be in a self contained enclosure with a circuit breaker to disconnect the DC circuit between the battery and the UPS inverter input. The circuit breaker shall be equipped with a shunt trip and auxiliary switch. The shunt trip shall be used to open the circuit breaker upon activation of the Emergency Power Off (EPO) pushbutton located on the UPS system status panel.

2.14 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

A. General

1. The UPS shall be capable of withstanding any combination of the following environmental conditions and that it must operate without mechanical or electrical damage, or degradation of operating characteristics.

B. Ambient Temperature

1. Operating 0° C to +40° C

2. Non-operating and Storage: -20° C to +70° C

C. Relative Humidity


1. Operating: 0 to 95% for temperatures from 0° C to +40° C, excluding condensation due to temperature change.

2. Non-operating and Storage: 0 to 95%, excluding condensation due to temperature change



A. The following inspections and test procedures shall be performed by factory trained field service personnel during the UPS start-up.

1. Inspect equipment for signs of damage.

2. Verify installation per drawings supplied with installation manuals or submittal package.

3. Inspect cabinets for foreign object.

4. Verify neutral and ground conductors are properly sized and configured per manufacturer’s requirements as noted in manufacturers drawings supplied with installation manuals or submittal package.

5. Inspect all cell cases.

6. Inspect each cell for proper polarity.

7. Verify all printed circuit boards are configured properly.

B. Mechanical Inspection

1. Check all control wiring connections for tightness.

2. Check all power wiring connections for tightness.

3. Check all terminal screws, nuts and/or spade lugs for tightness.

C. Electrical Inspection

1. Check all fuses for connectivity.

2. Confirm input and bypass voltage and phase rotation is correct.

3. Verify control transformer connections are correct for voltages being used.

4. Assure connection and voltage of the battery string(s).

D. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.

3.2 UNIT START-UP

A. Energize control power.

B. Perform control/logic checks and adjust to meet manufacturer’s specification.

C. Verify DC float and equalize voltage levels.

D. Verify DC voltage clamp and over-voltage shutdown levels.

E. Verify battery discharge, low battery warning and low battery shutdown levels.

F. Verify fuse monitor alarms and system shutdowns.

G. Verify inverter voltages and regulation circuits.

H. Verify inverter/bypass sync circuits and set overlap time.

I. Perform manual transfers and return.

J. Simulate utility outage at no load.

K. Verify proper recharge.


3.3 DOCUMENTATION

A. The manufacturer shall furnish the owner two instruction manuals covering the installation, operation and maintenance of the UPS and batteries.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. General

1. The complete UPS system and self-contained battery cabinet shall be covered by a full parts and labor warranty as a system from the same manufacturer. The warranty period shall be for twelve (12) months after customer acceptance or eighteen (18) months after shipment whichever occurs first.


DEMOLITION 26 4119-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 4119

DEMOLITION

PART 1 – GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions, Division 1 and Division-2 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is a Division-26 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is part of each Division-26 section making reference to demolition.


A. Extent of major items of demolition work is indicated by drawings. Other demolition work shall be performed as required to maintain system operation.

B. The intent of the drawings is to indicate major items affected and not to show every device, outlet, fixture, etc. affected by demolition work.

C. The drawings do not necessarily reflect as-built conditions. The contractor shall visit the jobsite prior to bidding to determine the overall scope of demolition work.

D. Refer to sections of other Divisions for applicable requirements affecting demolition work.

E. Refer to Section 260500 for requirements with regard to power outages affecting the operation of existing electrical systems.


A. NEC COMPLIANCE:

1. Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to methods used for demolition work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL:

A. Demolition work shall be laid out in advance to eliminate unnecessary cutting, drilling, channeling, etc. Where such cutting, drilling, or channeling becomes necessary, perform with care, use skilled mechanics of the trades involved. Repair damage to building and equipment. Cutting work of other Contractors shall be done only with the consent of that Contractor. Cutting of structural members shall not be permitted.

3.2 PATCHING AND REPAIR

A. The Contractor is responsible for all demolition, patching and repair of all finished interior surfaces pertaining to the installation of this particular phase of work. All surfaces shall be finished (painted, etc.) to match the adjacent materials, finishes and colors.

B. Hard surfaces: Whenever demolition or excavation is required for the installation of the electrical system, it shall be the responsibility of this contractor to make repairs and/or replacements of hard finish surfaces such as concrete, asphalt, roofing, etc.

C. The method of patching and repair shall follow good construction practices and all finished surfaces shall match materials and finish wherein the demolition occurred.

3.3 EXISTING EQUIPMENT

A. The following is a part of this project and all costs pertaining thereto shall be included in the base bid.

DEMOLITION 26 4119-2 © BNA Consulting

B. The new electrical equipment and apparatus shall be coordinated and connected into the existing system as required. Auxiliary systems shall comply, unless otherwise specified.

C. The existing electrical devices, conduit and/or equipment that for any reason obstructs construction shall be relocated. Provide conduit, wiring, junction boxes, etc. as required to extend existing circuits and systems to relocated devices or equipment.

D. The new fixtures indicated for existing outlets shall be installed in accordance with the fixture specifications.

E. When installing equipment in the existing building, it shall be concealed.

F. All existing electrical equipment and systems in portions of the building not being remodeled shall be kept operational, in service and in working condition throughout the entire construction period. Restore any circuits and systems interrupted. Provide temporary panels, temporary wiring and conduit, etc. as required.

G. Maintain circuit integrity and continuity of all existing circuits and systems that interfere with or are interrupted by remodel work unless those circuits are to be abandoned completely. Maintain all circuits and systems in operation during construction. Provide temporary panels, temporary wiring and conduit, etc. as required.

H. Existing raceways may be used where possible in place, except as noted. All circuits, conduit and wire that are not used in the remodeled area shall be removed back to the panelboard, where it shall be labeled a spare with circuit number indicated. Re-used raceway shall meet all requirements for new installations.

I. Obtain permission from the Architect and Owner's representative before penetrating any ceiling, floor, and wall surfaces.

J. Any and all equipment having electrical connections that require disconnecting and reconnection at the same or another location throughout the course of construction shall be included as part of this contract.


INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING 26 5100-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 26 5100

INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR BUILDING LIGHTING

PART 1 – GENERAL





A. Types of lighting fixtures in this section are indicated by schedule and include the following:

1. High-Intensity-Discharge (HID)

2. Fluorescent

3. Incandescent/Halogen

4. LED (Light Emitting Diode)


A. Comply with NEC, NEMA and ANSI 132,1 as applicable to installation and construction of lighting fixtures. Provide lighting fixtures that have been UL-listed and labeled.

B. Components and fixtures shall be listed and approved for the intended use by a National Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) including: UL, ETL, and CSA or equivalent

C. All led products shall comply with the latest version of Illuminating Engineer Society (IES) publications LM-79 and LM-80.

1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. PRODUCT DATA:

1. Submit manufacturer's data on interior and exterior building lighting fixtures.

B. SHOP DRAWINGS:

1. Submit dimensioned drawings of lighting fixtures. Submit fixture shop drawings in PDF format with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in luminaire "type" alphabetical order, with proposed fixture catalog number and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet.

2. When applicable submit standard color samples with the shop drawings. If standard colors are not acceptable, a color sample will be provided to the fixture manufacturer. Return of the shop drawings will be delayed until color samples are provided.

3. Submit ballast and driver manufacturer cut sheets.

4. Submit a list of all lamps used on projects.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of fixture):


1. HID MAGNETIC BALLASTS:

a. Philips Advance.

b. Universal Lighting Technologies Co.

c. Venture Lighting International

2. INCANDESCENT AND FLUORESCENT LAMPS:


b. Osram Sylvania

c. Phillips Lighting Corp.

3. HID LAMPS:


b. Osram Sylvania

c. Philips Lighting Corp.

d. Venture Lighting International

4. LED:

a. Cree

b. Nichia

c. Samsung

d. Philips Lumiled

e. Osram

f. Xicato

2.2 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES:

A. GENERAL:

1. Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated complete with, but not necessarily limited to, housings, lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, ballasts, LED drivers, starters, and wiring. Label each fixture with manufacturer's name and catalog number. Provide all enclosed fixtures with positive latch mechanisms; spring tension clips not acceptable. Provide all exterior fixtures with damp or wet location label as required by application.

B. SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS:

1. Provide all pendant and stem hung fixtures with flexible ball joint hangers at all points of support. Equip hooks used to hang fixtures with safety latches. Provide all detachable fixture parts, luminous ceiling accessories, louvers, diffusers, lenses, and reflectors with locking catches, screws, safety chain, or safety cable.

C. FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS: - (ELECTRONIC):

1. Provide rapid start, fluorescent programmable start lamp ballasts capable of operating lamp types indicated, with power factor(ratio of actual power to apparent power) above 95%, ballast factor of .71, and operating with audible noise level lower than the quietest C.B.M. certified ballast for the same application, listed as class A. Provide ballasts that comply with applicable state, federal, and industry standards and:

a. Are UL listed,

b. Comply with FCC requirements governing electromagnetic and radio frequency interference.


c. Comply with IEEE standards for line voltage transient protection, and ANSI C.62.41 for location director A3 in the normal mode and location category A1 in the common mode.

d. Comply with ANSI and IEEE standards for harmonic distortion

2. Light output shall not vary by more than 1% over a plus or minus 10% variation in line voltage, and shall not vary more than 5% of light output of equivalent C.B.M. certified ballast. See drawings and schedules for input voltage requirements. Ballasts shall consistently start and operate lamps from a supply line voltage of plus or minus 10% from nominal line voltage.

3. Provide ballasts that operate at a frequency above 20K hz from an input frequency of 60 hz; have an efficacy factor (relative light output per watt consumed) at least 10% above the C.B.M. certified electromagnetic system for the same application; and have a lamp crest factor (ratio of peak to R.M.S. lamp current) of 1.7 or less. Ballasts shall have a total current harmonic distortion of less than 10%.

4. All T5 and Compact electronic ballasts shall be programmed rapid start for maximum lamp life on shorter start cycles. Filament voltage shall be applied prior to the application of open circuit voltage to allow adequate heating of the filaments and then open circuit voltage is applied to start the lamps.

5. Ballasts shall provide for a minimum lamp starting temperature of 0 degrees F.

6. T8 ballasts shall be programmed rapid start unless specified on the fixture schedule otherwise.

7. Ballasts for lamps of T5, T4, and T2 diameter shall contain end-of-life sensing circuitry to prevent lamp, lamp base, or socket damage at end-of-life.

8. Ballast manufacturer shall warrant ballasts for T8 and T5 lamps to be free from defects in material or workmanship for at least 5 years from date of manufacture. Ballasts for T4 and smaller shall be 3 years. Contractor shall provide warrantee in accordance with other sections of this specification. Warranty shall include an allowance for nominal replacement labor and replacement of defective product.

9. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for all lamp ballast combinations. Provide electronic ballasts of one of the following:

a. Motorola

b. Philips Advance

c. Osram Sylvania

d. Universal Lighting Technologies Co.

10. CBM LABELS:

a. Provide fluorescent-lamp ballasts that comply with Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association standards and carry the CBM label.

D. LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRES:

1. LED luminaires that can be serviced in place shall have a disconnecting means internal to the luminaries to disconnect simultaneously from the source of supply all conductors of the driver, including the grounded conductor. Disconnects shall not be required under the following exceptions:

a. Luminaries located in hazardous locations.

b. Luminaries used for egress lighting.

c. Cord-and-plug luminaries.


d. In industrial establishments with restricted public access where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation.

e. Where more than one luminaire is installed in a space and where disconnecting the supply conductors to the luminaire will not leave the space in total darkness.

f. Provide LED luminaires which are tested in accordance with IES LM-79, diodes tested in accordance with IES LM-80, and provide a minimum R9 rating of ≥ 50 (unless specified differently), a CRI rating of ≥ than 80 and L70 (6K) = 50,000 hours (IES TM-21). Provide with 0-10V dimming drivers as standard.

g. The fixture manufacturer(s) shall warrant the luminaires, in their entirety, to be free from defects in material or workmanship for at least 5 years from date of manufacture. Provide warranty in accordance with other sections of this specification and include a certificate of warranty from the fixture manufacturer with extended warranty information and proper forms and procedure description.

E. FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES

1. Fluorescent luminaries that utilize double-ended lamps and contain ballast(s) that can be serviced in place shall have a disconnecting means internal to the luminaries to disconnect simultaneously from the source of supply all conductors of the ballast, including the grounded conductor. Disconnects shall not be required under the following exceptions:

a. Luminaries located in hazardous locations.

b. Luminaries used for egress lighting.

c. Cord-and-plug luminaries.

d. In industrial establishments with restricted public access where conditions of maintenance and supervision ensure that only qualified persons service the installation.

e. Where more than one luminaire is installed in a space and where disconnecting the supply conductors to the luminaire will not leave the space in total darkness.

F. DIFFUSERS:

1. Where plastic diffusers are specified, provide 100 percent virgin acrylic compound; minimum thickness, .125 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Install lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standards of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work as appropriate to properly interface installation of lighting fixtures with other work. Consult architectural reflected ceiling plan for exact location of all lighting fixtures.

C. Provide all necessary supports, brackets, and miscellaneous equipment for mounting of fixtures. Support all ceiling mounted fixtures from the building structure; independent of the ceiling system, unless noted. Support each recessed fixture (fluorescent incandescent, and/or HID) from the building structure with #12 ga. steel wire attached to each corner (in addition to supports normally provided for attachment to the ceiling


system). Provide backing supports above (or behind) sheetrock, plaster and similar ceiling and wall materials. Support surface mounted ceiling fixtures from channel. Support ceiling mounted outlet boxes independent of the raceway system, and capable of supporting 200 pounds. Feed each recessed fixture directly from an outlet box with flex conduit as required; do not loop from fixture to fixture. See plans for additional details.

D. Provide each lay-in light fixture with at least 36" (Not to exceed 72") of 3/8" steel flexible conduit.

E. Coordinate lighting in mechanical room with duct and equipment locations to avoid obstruction of illumination.

F. Provide gypsum board protection as required, (acceptable to fire official having jurisdiction) to ensure fire rating of each ceiling that the fixtures are installed in.

G. COORDINATION MEETINGS:

1. Meet at least twice with the ceiling installer. Hold first meeting before submittal of shop drawings to coordinate each light fixture mounting condition with ceiling type. During second meeting, coordinate fixture layout in each area.

2. Meet at least once with the mechanical installer prior to fabrication and installation of duct work. Coordinate depth and location of all fixtures and duct work in all areas.

H. ADJUST AND CLEAN:

1. Clean lighting fixtures of dirt and debris upon completion of installation.

2. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. Repair all nicks and scratches to appearance of original finish.

I. SPARE PARTS:

1. Provide a spare set of diffusers (acrylic and/or glass only) for each fixture type and one for each additional 10 fixtures of each type; not to exceed 10 spares for any single fixture type.

2. In addition, furnish stock of replacement lamps amounting to 15 percent (but not less than one lamp) of each type and size used. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.


A. Upon completion of installation of lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements.

B. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

C. At the time of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures that are observed to be noticeably dimmed after the Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect/Engineer.

D. GROUNDING:

1. Provide equipment grounding connections for each lighting fixture.



BLANK PAGE

TELEPHONE SYSTEM (RACEWAYS) 27 1501-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 27 1501

TELEPHONE SYSTEM (RACEWAYS)

PART 1 – GENERAL





A. The extent of telephone system work is indicated by drawings and is hereby defined to include, but not be limited to raceway, outlets, device plates, backboards, grounding and miscellaneous items required for complete raceway system.

B. Refer to other Division-26 sections for requirements for raceways, trays, boxes and fittings, wiring devices (plates), and supporting devices, and other sections, as applicable.


A. Comply with applicable portions of NEC as to type products used and installation of components. Provide products and materials that have been UL-listed and labeled.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. Provide complete raceway system for telephone including but not limited to, raceway, outlets, device plates, backboards, grounding and miscellaneous items as required.

B. Provide 4" square box with appropriate plaster or tile ring.

C. Provide telephone coverplates for wall outlets to match color and material of wiring device plates; for floor outlets, match color and material of floor power outlet covers.

D. Provide fire treated, or hypalon coated plywood terminal backboards, 4' x 8' x ¾" mounted vertically in the 8’ direction on a minimum of two full walls or as shown on plans.

E. Provide terminal cabinets of code gauge steel, flush or surface, as indicated, with concealed trim clamp, concealed hinges and flush lock, with gray baked enamel finish to match finish of panelboard covers. Construct back boxes of code gauge galvanized steel with removable endwalls.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE SYSTEM:

A. CONDUIT

1. Contractor shall provide 1” conduit from telecommunications outlet/connector to accessible ceiling space, then utilize non-continuous cable support devices to cable tray.

2. Paint all electrical boxes and their covers for the telephone and data system green.

3. Achieve the best direct route parallel with building lines with no single bend greater than 90 degrees or an aggregate of bends in excess of 180 degrees between pull points or pull boxes.


4. Conduit runs shall not have continuous sections longer than 100 feet without a pull box and may only be filled to 35% capacity. The overall length of conduit from the telecommunications outlet to the data room shall not exceed 275 ft.

5. Ream all conduit ends and fit with an insulated throat nylon bushing with non-indenter type malleable steel fittings to eliminate sharp edges.

6. Telecommunications conduits should not be routed over or adjacent to heat sources such as boilers, hot water lines, or steam lines. Neither should they be routed near large motors, generators, photocopy equipment, or electrical power cabling and transformers.

7. Conduits that enter an EF/ER/TR must terminate near the corners to allow for proper cable racking. Terminate these conduits as close as possible to the wall where the backboard is mounted to minimize the cable route.

8. Terminate conduits that protrude through the structural floor 1” to 3” above the surface within an EF/ER/TR.

9. After installation, conduits shall be clean, dry, unobstructed, capped for protection, labeled for identification, reamed and fitted with bushings.

10. A 200 lb pull cord (nylon, 1/8” minimum) shall be installed in any empty conduit.

11. When the number of conduits requires more than one row, restrict the number of rows to two wherever practicable.

12. Run a minimum of one 1" conduit from telephone terminal backboard or cabinet to the fire alarm control panel.

B. PULL BOX REQUIREMENTS

1. NEC sized pull boxes are not acceptable. Follow BICSI and EIA/TIA 569-B guidelines for pull box sizing.

2. Provide pull boxes in sections of conduit that are 100 feet or longer, contain more than two 90 degree bends, or contain a reverse bend.

3. Conduits that enter the pull box from opposite ends should be aligned.

4. Pull boxes shall have a length 12 times the diameter of the largest conduit.

5. All pull boxes must be accessible.

C. FIRESTOPPING:

1. Provide firestop solution equivalent to the wall/ceiling/floor rating.

2. Provide firestop labels next to each penetration with written date. Label both sides of the penetration.

3. Take picture of both sides of the firestopping seal and include in O&M documentation of all firestopped locations. Provide drawing correlating photographs to actual locations in building.

4. All penetrations through fire rated building structures (walls and floors) shall be sealed with an appropriate Firestop system. This requirement applies to through penetrations (complete penetration) and membrane penetrations (through one side of a hollow fire rated structure). Any penetrating item i.e., riser slots and sleeves, cables, conduit, cable tray, and raceways, etc. shall be properly firestopped.

5. Firestop systems shall be UL Classified to ASTM E8124 (UL 1479). A drawing showing the proposed firestop system shall be provided to the Engineer prior to installing the firestop system(s).

6. Firestopping within conduits and sleeves shall be re-enterable. Firestopping outside and around annular space of sleeves and conduits at wall penetrations


shall dry to a hard consistency. Mineral wool or other cavity stuffing shall be utilized as noted in the firestop system approved for this project.

D. Utilize firestop pass-through type devices for medium to large penetrations into fire walls/floors. Similar to STI Series SSB

E. GROUNDING

1. Provide a Telecommunication Main Grounding Bus Bar (TMGB) 12” L x 4” H x ¼” thick copper bus bar on insulating standoffs adjacent to phone board in Main Telephone Room. Connect to Intersystem Bonding Terminal utilizing copper conductors per the following chart:

a. < 25’ - #4

b. < 50’ - #1

c. < 75’ - #2/0

d. > 75’ - #3/0

2. For Secondary Telephone Rooms provide a Telecommunication Grounding Bus Bar (TGB) 12” L x 2” H x ¼” thick copper bus bar on insulating standoffs adjacent to phone board. Connect to TMGB utilizing copper conductors per the schedule above.

3. Bond cable tray, raceway system, structural steel and all other metal equipment located within the Telephone Room utilizing copper conductors per the schedule above.

F. POWER: Provide a minimum of four duplex receptacles on two dedicated circuits adjacent to each terminal backboard or cabinet. See drawings for additional power outlets.



BLANK PAGE

AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEMS 27 4100-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 27 4100

AUDIOVISUAL SYSTEM (RACEWAYS)

PART 1 – GENERAL



B. Division-26, 27 & 28 basic materials and methods sections apply to work specified in this section.

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS:

A. BNA Project Contact:

1. Jaime Verhaal, CTS-D a. Phone: 801-532-2196 b. Email: [email protected]

2. Joey Rooker a. Phone: 801-532-2196 b. Email: [email protected]

B. Coordination:

1. Coordinate final inspection of the systems installed, with Audiovisual (AV) Consultant, three (3) weeks in advance.

2. Obtain GANTT chart for construction time frame from the General Contractor.

3. Coordinate with Electrical contractor to meet at least twice with the ceiling installer. Hold first meeting before submittal of shop drawings to coordinate the mounting condition of all ceiling-mounted AV equipment with ceiling type. During second meeting, coordinate the location of all ceiling-mounted AV equipment in each area.

4. Meet with Electrical contractor prior to pathway rough-in to coordinate AV system requirements in each area.

5. Coordinate color and finish of all AV system components with Architect or Electrical contractor as appropriate.

6. Coordinate all AV system components within millwork/furniture with millwork shop drawings prior to rough-in.


A. Provide the specified systems in a complete and operating condition with all necessary materials and labor to fulfill the requirements and the intent of the drawings and specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer’s standard system components. Contractor shall furnish all cables, materials and equipment, whether specifically mentioned herein or not, to ensure a complete and functional system.

B. Master quotes do not relieve contractor from preforming due diligence for equipment type, equipment quantity, and quantity of room types. Any errors, conflicts, or omissions between the drawings and/or specifications and master quotes shall be the responsibility of the contractor to resolve.

C. Equipment submitted in bid proposal that has not been approved by AV Consultant in writing will not be accepted and shall be replaced by approved equipment at contractor’s expense. Equipment not listed within this specification, or contract documents, that are required for a complete and working system, shall be of professional grade and used in the same manner as needed for a complete and working system.


D. Input plates shall match the color and style being used throughout the project.

E. Contractor is responsible for coordinating with all other trades for equipment locations, mounting requirements, supports and plenum space requirements.

F. All cabling shall be installed in a minimum of 1” conduit to accessible ceiling space unless otherwise noted. Provide conduit to accessible ceiling space and then utilize non-continuous open top cable supports every 5’.


A. Installer:

1. Integrating firm shall have worked satisfactorily for a minimum of (5) years of completing systems equal to this scope, quality, type and complexity.

2. Key personnel assigned to the project shall each have minimum of (10) years of experience in completing systems equal to this scope, quality, type and complexity.

3. Contractor shall be a factory authorized distributor of all equipment specified for the geographical area of the project.

4. Contractor shall maintain complete installation and service facilities for the duration of the project contract.

5. Contractor shall have current manufacturer certificates for all AV systems and equipment listed within this specification.

B. Contractor must follow the standards described within:

1. BICSI/INFOCOMM AV Design Reference manual.

2. ANSI/INFOCOMM 2M-2010 Standard guide for Audiovisual Systems Design and Coordination Processes.

3. ANSI/INFOCOMM 10:2013 Audiovisual Systems Performance Verification Guide.

C. All work shall be done by expert technicians qualified in the field with knowledge of specified systems. Workmanship shall comply with industry best practices concerning grounding, shielding, cable dressing, cable termination and equipment mounting.

1.5 SUBMITTALS:

A. The following items shall be included in the shop drawings submittal.

1. All submittals shall be submitted in a digital format with bookmarks for each section of equipment. Any submittals that are partial or incomplete shall be rejected and count as one submittal against the submittal allowance.

2. Project manager to provide written proof, signed and dated, that shop drawings and/or brochure has been checked for accuracy prior to submittal. Shop drawings to comply in all respects with the requirements of the contract drawings and specifications for this project.

1.6 WARRANTY:

A. Systems shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of substantial completion against defective materials, inferior workmanship or improper installation adjustment. Guarantee shall cover all parts and labor.

B. If system failure causes audiovisual system to be inoperative or unusable for its intended purpose, contractor, when notified of the problem, shall repair system so it will be operational and usable within three (3) business days. If defective components cannot be repaired in time, provide temporary equipment as required.

C. Contractor shall honor equipment warranties for term established by manufacturer if


greater than warranty time frame mentioned above.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL:

A. All equipment shall be installed as shown on the drawings and in strict accordance with the specifications. Any errors, conflicts, or omissions discovered in the specifications or the drawings shall be submitted in writing to the AV Consultant for clarification.

B. Provide correct junction boxes as described on sheet ET001 in the AUDIOVISUAL SYMBOLS, SCHEDULES & NOTES.


3.1 INSTALLATION OF AV SYSTEMS:

A. Provide AV systems and ancillary equipment as indicated on drawings and in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s written instructions, the NEC, and with industry best practices.

B. Coordinate all work performed by other contractors pertaining to the AV system, including raceways, electrical boxes and fittings.

C. Pathway Requirements:

1. General:

a. All pathways shall be designed, constructed, grounded and installed in accordance with all recommendations delineated within TIA 569-B and Standard TIA 942.

b. Prior to placing any cable pathways or cable, the contractor shall survey the site to determine job conditions will not impose any obstructions that would interfere with the safe and satisfactory placement of the cables. Arrangements to remove any major obstructions not identified on plans need to be determined at that time with the Engineer.

2. Conduits:

a. Achieve the best direct route parallel with building lines with no single bend greater than 90 degrees or an aggregate of bends in excess of 180 degrees between pull points or pull boxes.

b. Provide large radius elbows on all bends.

c. Conduit runs shall not have continuous sections longer than 100 feet without a pull box. Refer to rough-in schedule for conduit fill capacity.

d. AV conduits should not be routed over or adjacent to heat sources such as boilers, hot water lines, or steam lines. Neither should they be routed near large motors, generators, photocopy equipment, or electrical power cabling and transformers.

e. After installation, conduits shall be clean, dry, unobstructed, capped for protection, labeled for identification, reamed and fitted with bushings.

f. A 200lb pull cord (nylon, 1/8” minimum) shall be installed in any empty conduit.

3. Open Top Cable Support Requirements:

a. Non-continuous cable supports shall provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to comply with required bend radii of high-performance cables


b. Non-continuous cable supports shall have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables.

4. Pull Box Requirements:

a. NEC sized pull boxes are not acceptable. Follow BICSI and EIA/TIA 569-B guidelines for pull box sizing.

b. Provide pull boxes in sections of conduit that are 100 feet or longer, contain more than two 90 degree bends, or contain a reverse bend.

c. Conduits that enter a pull box from opposite ends should be aligned.

d. Pull boxes shall have a length 12 times the diameter of the largest conduit.

e. All pull boxes must be accessible.

D. Cabling System:

1. Follow T568B scheme for copper category cabling terminations.

2. Follow TIA/EIA-568A for commercial buildings cabling.

3. Provide a minimum 6” service loop in each AV system junction box. Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall boxes if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding manufacturers bend radius.

4. In a false ceiling environment, a minimum of 3 inches shall be maintained between cable supports and false ceiling. At no point shall cable(s) rest on lay-in ceiling grids or panels.

5. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices.

6. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid seismic support wires or lighting fixture seismic support wires. Where support for AV cable is required, the contractor shall install appropriate carriers to support the cabling.

7. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner.

8. Pulling tension for balanced twisted pair shall not exceed 25lbf and for optical fiber shall not exceed 50lbf.

9. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 0.125”. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.

10. Cable shall not be draped on, tied or otherwise secured to electrical conduit, plumbing, ventilation ductwork or any other equipment. Cable shall be secured to building supports or hangers or to additional blocks or anchors specifically installed for this purpose.

E. Grounding System:

1. All grounding and bonding shall be done according to ANSI J-STD-607-A, TIA 942, and NEC.

2. All cabinets/racks shall utilize paint piercing grounding washers, to be used where rack sections bolt together, on both sides, under the head of the bolt and between the nut and rack.

3. All racks shall further utilize a full-length rack ground strip attached to the rear of the side rail with the thread-forming screws provided to ensure metal-to-metal contact. Similar to Panduit RGS.


4. All active equipment shall be bonded to ground. If the equipment manufacturer provides a location for mounting a grounding connection, that connection shall be utilized. All active equipment shall be bonded using the appropriate jumper for the equipment being installed using the thread-forming screws. Similar to Panduit RG.

5. Racks shall have individual, appropriately sized conductors bonded to the grounding backbone. Do not bond racks or cabinets serially – daisy-chained rack grounds will not be accepted.

6. Refer to electrical diagrams for additional ground connection requirements.

F. Cabling groups and conduit separation:

1. Refer to “CABLING GROUPS AND CONDUIT SEPARATION SCHEDULE”.

G. Firmly secure all equipment in place that is not intended for portability.

H. Mount projectors permanently and provide mechanical index ensuring precise alignment of the projected image.

I. Provide adequate structural support for AV system components. Provide fastenings and supports with a safety load factor of at least five.

J. Coordinate with lighting control system installer for programming and interface of AV user interfaces with lighting control system.

1. Coordinate with the lighting control supplier for type of connection required to communicate with the lighting system. Note that lighting controls may not be selected until after bid.

2. Refer to diagrams, plans and/or lighting control specifications for lighting control requirements within the AV system.

3. Controls shall trigger presets determined by the owner prior to final walk through Presets may be changed within the programing warranty period at owner’s request and covered under the warranty.

3.2 LABELING

A. The contractor shall develop and submit for approval a labeling system for the cable installation. The Owner will negotiate an appropriate labeling scheme with the contractor. At a minimum, the labeling system shall clearly identify all components of the system: racks, cables, panels and wall plates. The labeling system shall designate the cables origin and destination and a unique identifier for the cable within the system. All labeling information shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and all test documents shall reflect the appropriate labeling scheme.

B. All labels shall meet UL 969 requirements for legibility, defacement and adhesion requirements. Handwritten labels are not allowed. All labels shall maintain consistent typeface, size and color.

C. Provide laminated plans (minimum size 11x17) of all AV as-built plans (including riser diagrams) in each and every AV Rack.

3.3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be submitted prior to testing of system. Total of two (2) manuals, shall be delivered to the Company. Manuals shall include all model numbers, service, installation, and programming information.

3.4 RECORD DRAWINGS:

A. The Owner shall provide electronic (DWG) format of AV System system drawings that as-built construction information can be added to. These documents will be modified by the AV contractor to denote as-built information as defined above and returned to the Owner.


B. Provide a complete set of "as built" drawings in paper and electronic (DWG and PDF) formats showing cabinets, racks, patch panels, wiring, specific interconnections between all equipment and internal wiring of equipment. Drawings are to include all labeling information used in denoting equipment used in the installation. Labeling, icons, and drawing conventions used shall be consistent throughout all documentation provided.


FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 28 3111-1 © BNA Consulting

SECTION 28 3111

FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM (RACEWAYS)

PART 1 - GENERAL





A. Extent of fire alarm and detection systems work is indicated by drawings, schedules and as specified herein.

B. Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire alarm and detection system components and accessories. Provide components and systems that are UL-listed and labeled for fire alarm. Provide fire alarm and detection systems and accessories that are FM approved. Comply with State and local requirements as applicable.

C. Comply with applicable provisions of current NFPA Standards 72, National Fire Alarm Code, local building codes, and meet requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Carefully review all Division 23 drawings for all fire/smoke dampers. Fire/smoke dampers are NOT shown on electrical plans. Electrical contractor is responsible for coordinating 120V power to all dampers and providing fire alarm connections to each one. See mechanical drawings for all locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCOPE OF THE WORK:

A. Provide a rough-in for connection to an existing addressable fire alarm system with 08 ANALOG initiating loops/minimum of 1500 points.

B. Provide all rough-in for fire alarm devices.

C. Provide pathway for duct smoke detectors and fan relays at all fan units 2000 CFM and over. Shut down all supply and return fans upon a general alarm signal.

D. Provide a pathway for a fire alarm duct detector within 5-feet of any fire/smoke damper as required to comply with IMC 607.5.4.1. The duct detector shall be listed for the air velocity, temperature and humidity at the point where it is to be installed. A duct detector will not be required at a fire/smoke damper located on a corridor wall where the corridor has smoke detection devices installed. For dampers installed within an un-ducted opening in a wall, a spot-type detector listed for releasing service shall be installed within 5-feet horizontally of the damper. Provide a fire alarm relay at each fire/smoke damper. Provide a test switch at each location where the damper is located above an inaccessible ceiling or is located more than 10 feet above the finished floor. Coordinate the location of test switches with owner/architect.

E. All wiring shall be in conduit (3/4" minimum). All conduit and connectors, shall be made of steel. All conduit runs shall form a complete loop from the fire alarm control panel.

F. Provide vandal resistant cages to protect horn/strobes, smoke and heat detectors as indicated and, in gyms whether shown or not. Securely fasten security cages as required. Provide backing and bracing as required to ensure that attachment extends beyond the ceiling materials. Cages shall have two pieces, one backplate and one cover to attach to backplate.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

A. Install wiring, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings in accordance with Division 26 Basic Materials and Methods section, “Raceways”, “Wires and Cables”, and “Electrical Boxes and Fittings”, and in accordance with other sections, as applicable.

B. All wire used on the fire alarm system shall be U.L. Listed as fire alarm protective signaling circuit cable per NEC, Article 760.

C. Review proper installation procedure for each type of device with equipment supplier before installation.

D. Provide a minimum of one 3/4" conduit with (2) Cat 3 telephone cables from FACP to main telephone terminal.

E. Where smoke or heat detectors are specified, install pathway for device a minimum of three feet from adjacent air supply diffusers to ensure proper operation of device.

F. Refer to NFPA for spacing and exact placement of fire alarm devices.

G. Electrical Identification: Refer to Section 260553 for requirements.

PART 4 - FINAL ACCEPTANCE AND GUARANTEE

4.1 GUARANTEE:

A. Furnish a three-year guarantee for all equipment, materials and installation, including all labor, transportation, and equipment.

B. Emergency Response. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall provide an emergency response within four hours of any reported system failure to resolve the problem on a continuous basis.

4.2 PRE-TEST:

A. The contractor shall with a representative of the manufacturer conduct a test 3 days before the final test to verify operation of all devices. Any problems must be corrected before the final test.

4.3 FINAL TEST:

A. Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable, a test on the system shall be performed as follows:

1. The contractor's job foreman, a representative of the manufacturer, a representative of the owner, shall operate every building fire alarm device to ensure proper operation and correct annunciation at the control panel. Fan shutdown and door holder circuits shall operate.

2. Conduct a full 24 hour test of battery operation. System shall be put on the batteries for a full 24 hours and all notification appliances shall be operational for a period of 5 minutes.

B. The supervisory circuitry of the initiating and indicating circuits shall also be verified.

PART 5 - AS BUILT DRAWINGS AND OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS:

5.1 AS BUILT DRAWINGS:

A. A complete set of CAD "as-built" drawings showing installed wiring, color coding, specific interconnections between all equipment, and internal wiring of the equipment shall be delivered to the owner upon completion of the system. Vendor shall not request drawings from the Engineer. Vendor shall request current architectural drawings from the Architect and include all cost with bid.


B. A building map shall be supplied to the owner indicating the exact location of all devices along with the addresses of the individual devices. Install building fire alarm map adjacent to the fire alarm panel and all remote operating panels. Provide high quality plastic sign (map holder) with two layers. The back layer shall be painted black. The front layer shall be a clear center for viewing the CAD fire alarm drawing. Edges of the sign shall be colored to match the building interior. The building map shall indicate the various devices and wiring by the use of different colors (minimum of five colors).

C. Provide a CD to the Owner containing the information specified below. The CD shall include all information required to allow the Owner to change the fire alarm program themselves. The CD shall contain a minimum of the following:

1. CAD drawing files of building fire alarm map.

2. CAD drawing files of as-built fire alarm components and point to point connections.


4. Job specific configuration programming.

5. Tutorial file on complete programming of fire alarm system.



BLANK PAGE

DPS Calvin Rampton - Arnell-West · DPS Calvin Rampton 2nd Floor Remodel DFCM Project No.: 17332550...

Documents

Transcript of DPS Calvin Rampton - Arnell-West · DPS Calvin Rampton 2nd Floor Remodel DFCM Project No.: 17332550...